manualshive.com logo in svg

Brocade Communications Systems Network Advisor 12.3.0, User Manual

Share
Download
Brocade Communications Systems Network Advisor 12.3.0 User Manual Download Page 84

32

Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual

53-1003154-01

Uninstalling a patch

2

5. Click Upgrade.

If the patch process is interrupted (for example, loss of power), you must restart the patch 
process.

The patch installer performs the following functions:

•

Extracts patch files to the 

Install_Home 

folder.

•

Creates a back up (zip) of the original files to be updated and copies the zip file to the 

Install_Home

\patch-backup directory (for example, 

Install_Home

\patch-backup\na_11-3-0a.zip). 

The first time you apply a patch, the back up patch zip file uses the following naming 
convention: 

<Application

>_<

Major_Version

>-<

Minor_Version

>-<

Revision_Number

>

<

Patch_Version>

.zip (for example, 

Install_Home

\patch-backup\na_11-3-0a.zip). 

Each additional time you apply a patch, the back up patch zip file uses the following 
naming convention: 

<Application

>_<

Major_Version

>-<

Minor_Version

>-

<

Revision_Number

><

Patch_Version>-<Previous_Patch_Version>

.zip (for example, 

Install_Home

\patch-backup\na_11-3-0-patch-a.zip). 

•

Generates a patch log.

•

Updates the conf file (

Install_Home

\conf\patch.conf) to include the patch version applied 

and patch created date. 

•

Updates the patch version in the About dialog box (Select Help > About in the main 
window).

6. Start all services by completing the following steps.

a. Launch the Server Console. 

b. Click the Services tab.

c. Click Start to start all services.

Uninstalling a patch

Note that only one set of back up files are retained which enables you revert back to the previous 
version. You can only revert back one version. For example:

•

If you upgrade from patch A to patch B, you can revert back to patch A.

•

If you upgrade from patch A to patch B to patch C then to patch F, you can only revert back to 
patch C.

To uninstall a patch, complete the following steps.

1. Stop all services by completing the following steps.

a. Launch the Server Console. 

b. Click the Services tab.

c. Click Stop to stop all services.

2. Go to the 

Install_Home

/patch-backup directory.

3. Extract the patch zip file (for example, na_1120a_<

Company_Name>

.zip).

Summary of Contents for Network Advisor 12.3.0

Page 1: ...53 1003154 01 11 July 2014 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual Supporting Network Advisor 12 3 0...

Page 2: ...n source license agreements To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products view the licensing terms applicable to the open source software and obtain a copy of the programming...

Page 3: ...2012 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1002948 01 Updated for Network Advisor 12 1 0 July 2013 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003057 01 Updated for Network Advisor 12 2 0 Januar...

Page 4: ...iv Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01...

Page 5: ...nagement server and client 3 Launching a remote client 4 Clearing previous versions of the remote client 5 Logging into the web client 5 Launching the Configuration Wizard 6 Viewing active sessions 10...

Page 6: ...45 Viewing the fabric discovery state 45 Troubleshooting fabric discovery 46 Managed count exceeded troubleshooting 46 Virtual Fabric discovery troubleshooting 48 SAN Fabric monitoring 49 Stop monitor...

Page 7: ...Management server backup 75 Configuring backup 76 Enabling backup 78 Disabling backup 78 Viewing the backup status 79 Changing the backup interval 79 Starting immediate backup 80 Reviewing backup eve...

Page 8: ...settings 105 Registering a server as a Syslog recipient automatically 105 Configuring the Syslog listing port number 106 SNMP Trap Registration settings 106 Registering a server as a SNMP trap recipi...

Page 9: ...ount 148 Enabling a user account 148 Deleting a user account 149 Unlocking a user account 149 Roles 149 Creating a new role 149 Editing a role 150 Copying a role 151 Deleting a role 151 Adding privile...

Page 10: ...233 Reports expand navigation bar 234 Reports toolbar 234 Generating a report 235 Generated reports 236 Report schedules 238 Report templates 245 Default reports 248 Chapter 7 Dashboard Management Das...

Page 11: ...ut of Range Violations widget 293 Port Health Violations widget 295 Performance monitors 297 Displaying performance monitors on the dashboard 298 Top Port Alignment Errors monitor 299 Top Port C3 Disc...

Page 12: ...ffic flow measures 342 Traffic flow performance graph monitor 344 Top or bottom traffic flow performance monitor 345 Time series traffic flow performance monitor 346 Configuring a traffic flows monito...

Page 13: ...Customizing the layout of devices on the topology 383 Customizing the layout of connections on the topology 384 Changing a group background color 384 Reverting to the default background color 385 Cha...

Page 14: ...Searching for an assigned event filter 409 Chapter 10 Third party tools About third party tools 411 Starting third party tools from the application 412 Launching a Telnet session 412 Launching an Tel...

Page 15: ...ation 443 Configuring local database authentication 444 Displaying the client authentication audit trail 445 Radius server configuration 445 Configuring Management application data on the Radius serve...

Page 16: ...switch configurations 488 Keeping a copy past the defined age limit 490 Tracking changes from the baseline configuration 490 Replicating configurations 492 Replicating security configurations 496 Enha...

Page 17: ...1 Administrative Domain enabled fabric support 543 AD enabled fabric discovery 543 Management application behavior for AD enabled fabrics 543 Management application support for AD enabled fabrics 544...

Page 18: ...ter 15 Host Management Host management 569 Supported adapters 570 Host Bus Adapters 570 Converged Network Adapters 571 Fabric Adapters 571 AnyIOTM technology 572 HCM software 572 HCM features 573 Host...

Page 19: ...600 Chapter 16 Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE overview 601 DCBX protocol 602 Enhanced Ethernet features 602 Enhanced Transmission Selection 602 Priority based flow control 602 Ethernet jumbo frames...

Page 20: ...configuration 632 Configuring LLDP for FCoE 632 Adding an LLDP profile 633 Editing an LLDP profile 634 Deleting an LLDP profile 634 Assigning an LLDP profile to a port or ports in a LAG 635 802 1x aut...

Page 21: ...ics Virtual Fabrics overview 675 Terminology for Virtual Fabrics 676 Virtual Fabrics requirements 677 FICON best practices for Virtual Fabrics 679 Configuring Virtual Fabrics 680 Enabling Virtual Fabr...

Page 22: ...Importing the signed KAC certificate 715 Uploading the CA certificate onto the DPM appliance and first time configurations 715 Uploading the KAC certificate onto the DPM appliance manual identity enr...

Page 23: ...Creating a self signed certificate for TKLM 741 Importing the Fabric OS encryption node KAC certificates to TKLM 741 Exporting the TKLM self signed server certificate 742 Importing the TKLM certificat...

Page 24: ...ge arrays 827 Remote replication LUNs 827 SRDF pairs 828 Metadata requirements and remote replication 828 Adding target tape LUNs for encryption 829 Moving targets 832 Configuring encrypted tape stora...

Page 25: ...ft for auto rekey 862 Viewing and editing switch encryption properties 863 Exporting the public key certificate signing request from properties 867 Importing a signed public key certificate from prope...

Page 26: ...Duplicating a zone configuration 904 Creating an offline zone database 905 Deleting an offline zone database 906 Refreshing a zone database 906 Merging fabrics 906 Merging two zone databases 907 Creat...

Page 27: ...embers 930 Replacing an offline device by WWN 930 Replacing an offline device by name 931 Chapter 22 Fibre Channel over IP FCIP services licensing 934 FCIP Concepts 934 IP network considerations 934 F...

Page 28: ...advanced settings 967 Enabling Open Systems Tape Pipelining 967 Enabling Tperf test mode 967 Configuring QoS percentages 968 Configuring IPsec and IKE policies 968 Configuring FICON emulation 969 Vie...

Page 29: ...old 998 Protocol error threshold 998 State Change threshold 998 Adding thresholds 999 Adding a C3 Discard Frames threshold 999 Adding an Invalid CRCs threshold 1001 Adding an Invalid Words threshold 1...

Page 30: ...nfiguration 1032 Changing the Allow Prohibit Matrix display 1032 Changing window arrangement 1032 Clearing port names 1032 Cascaded FICON fabric 1033 Configuring a cascaded FICON fabric 1034 Cascaded...

Page 31: ...079 Enabling historical performance collection for selected fabrics 1079 Disabling historical performance collection 1081 Generating and saving a historical performance graph 1081 Exporting historical...

Page 32: ...ization 1114 Changing connection utilization percentages 1114 Viewing Historical Graphs Tables 1120 Mouse functions for graphs 1122 Chapter 29 Flow Vision Flow Vision overview 1125 Supported hardware...

Page 33: ...r integration with Flow Vision 1213 Monitoring and Alerting Policy Suite integration with Flow Vision 1214 Bottleneck Detection integration with Flow Vision 1215 FC Trace Route integration with Flow V...

Page 34: ...ing e mail notification 1256 Defining filters 1258 Setting up basic event filtering 1258 Setting up advanced event filtering 1259 Viewing events 1261 SNMP traps 1261 Adding a trap recipient to one or...

Page 35: ...policy 1304 Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the flapping policy 1304 Event custom reports 1306 Defining report settings 1307 Defining the report identity 1308 Filtering a report defin...

Page 36: ...onitoring category 1344 MAPS policies 1344 User defined policies 1345 MAPS rules 1346 MAPS conditions 1346 MAPS actions 1347 Fence 1347 SNMP traps 1348 Enabling or disabling policy actions for all pol...

Page 37: ...pport information 1390 Copying technical support information to an external FTP server 1391 Deleting technical support files from the repository 1391 Upload failure data capture 1392 Enabling upload f...

Page 38: ...1446 Product events 1447 IP Performance monitoring events 1447 RASLog Events 1447 Appendix D User Privileges About user privileges 1451 About Roles and Access Levels 1469 Appendix E Device Properties...

Page 39: ...ubleshooting 1513 Server troubleshooting 1513 Server Management Console troubleshooting 1514 Supportsave troubleshooting 1515 Technical support data collection troubleshooting 1516 View All list troub...

Page 40: ...1781 EVENT_INFO 1782 FABRIC_INFO 1783 FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT_INFO 1784 FCIP_TUNNEL_INFO 1785 FCOE_DEVICE_INFO 1786 FRU_INFO 1786 GIGE_PORT_ECLOUD_LINK_INFO 1787 GIGE_PORT_INFO 1787 GENERATED_BIRTREPORT_I...

Page 41: ...838 TRILL_TRUNK_INFO 1839 USER_ROLE_RESOURCE_INFO 1839 VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_INFO 1840 VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS_INFO 1840 VM_ADDRESS_INFO 1841 VLAN_INT_CLASSIFIER_INFO 1842 VM_CONNECTIVITY_INFO 1842 VM_NE...

Page 42: ...ii Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER_INFO 1863 RESET_VCS_LICENSED 1864 TRILL_TRUNK_INFO 1864 WIRELESS_INTERFACE 1864 WIRED_INTERFACE 1865 CEE_PORT_INFO 1867 Inde...

Page 43: ...ructions Chapter 5 User Account Management provides information on how to manage users Chapter 6 Web Client provides details about using the web client to monitor your network Chapter 7 Dashboard Mana...

Page 44: ...29 Flow Vision provides information on a network diagnostic tool that provides a unified platform to manage traffic related applications on Fabric OS devices Chapter 30 Frame Monitor provides informa...

Page 45: ...switch 24 port 8 Gbps FC Switch Fabric OS v6 1 0 or later Brocade 4012 switch Embedded 12 port 4 Gbps FC Switch Brocade 4016 switch Embedded 16 port 4 Gbps FC Switch Brocade 4018 switch Embedded 18 po...

Page 46: ...HBA Brocade 1860 Fabric Adapter 16 Gbps FC HBA mode 10 Gbps CNA mode 10 Gbps NIC mode Adapter Software 3 0 0 0 or later Brocade 1867 HBA 16 Gbps Mezzanine HBA Adapter Software 3 0 3 0 or later Brocad...

Page 47: ...ckbone Chassis with Encryption Blade Fabric OS v6 1 1_enc or later Brocade DCX 4S with FX8 24 Blades 4 slot Backbone Chassis with 8 Gbps 12 FC port 10 GbE ports 2 10 GbE ports blade Fabric OS v6 3 1_C...

Page 48: ...ng VCS fabric properties Viewing IP device and port properties Database tables IP Element Manager Element Manager interface overview Displaying port properties Element Manager toolbar Performance data...

Page 49: ...fies the names of user manipulated GUI elements Identifies keywords and operands Identifies text to enter at the GUI or CLI italic text Provides emphasis Identifies variables Identifies paths and Inte...

Page 50: ...ic documentation that you might find helpful Brocade resources To get up to the minute information go to http my brocade com to register at no cost for a user ID and password White papers online demon...

Page 51: ...obtain the Management application serial number select Help License The License dialog box displays 2 General Information Switch model Switch operating system version Error numbers and messages receiv...

Page 52: ...e WWN from the same place as the serial number except for the Brocade DCX For the Brocade DCX access the numbers on the WWN cards by removing the Brocade logo plate at the top of the nonport side of t...

Page 53: ...nagement application provides easy centralized management of the network as well as quick access to all product configuration applications Using this application you can configure manage and monitor y...

Page 54: ...on which tab SAN or Dashboard you select For a list of available commands refer to SAN main toolbar on page 353 or Dashboard toolbar on page 265 3 Tabs Provides quick access to the following views Das...

Page 55: ...mplete the following steps 1 From the server machine double click the desktop icon or open the application from the Start menu The Log In dialog box displays Figure 2 FIGURE 2 Log In dialog box 2 Remo...

Page 56: ...nt application web start page displays 3 Click the Web Start the Client link The Log In dialog box displays 4 Log into another server by entering the IP address to the other server in the Network Addr...

Page 57: ...ght click the application and select Delete 4 Click Close on the Java Cache Viewer dialog box 5 Click OK on the Java Control Panel dialog box To create a remote client link in the Start menu refer to...

Page 58: ...ys NOTE If the Administrator disconnects the web client using the Active Sessions dialog box Server Active Sessions the web client redirects to the login page after three minutes or as soon as you mak...

Page 59: ...log box For instructions refer to Configuring an internal SCP or SFTP server on page 127 Select External FTP SCP SFTP Server to configure an external FTP server You can configure the external FTP serv...

Page 60: ...erver IP Configuration Preferred Address list Selecting the hostname option prevents clients and devices from communicating with the Server If you select a specific IP address from the Server IP Confi...

Page 61: ...ation screen and edit the syslog port number return to step 6a Click Yes to close the message and continue with step 7 If you enter a port number already in use a Warning displays next to the associat...

Page 62: ...ate to a new view the SAN tab displays with a gray screen over the Product List and Topology Map while data is loading Viewing active sessions To view the Management application active sessions comple...

Page 63: ...ress at Disconnected_Date_and_Time 4 Click Close When you disconnect a client using the Active Sessions dialog box the following event displays in the Master Log Disconnect Client User_Name IP_Address...

Page 64: ...k the port status icon The Port Status dialog box displays Java VM Vendor The Java Virtual Machine vendor Java VM Version The Java Virtual Machine version running on the server Server Name The server...

Page 65: ...ement applciation server If multiple processes occupy the same port the process names display in a comma separated list Recommended Actions Suggested action to take to resolve the issues 3 Click Close...

Page 66: ...TCP SMTP Server port for e mail communication if you use e mail notifications without SSL Server SMTP Server Yes 492 TACACS Authentication port TCP TACACS server port for authentication if you use TA...

Page 67: ...ntication if you use LDAP as an external authentication and SSL is enabled Server LDAP Server Yes 18122 RADIUS Authentication Server Port UDP RADIUS server port for authentication if you use RADIUS as...

Page 68: ...ent Managed Host Server Yes 246071 2 HCM Proxy CIM Indication Listener port TCP Used for HBA management Managed Host Server Yes 246082 Reserved for future use TCP Not used Client Server No 246092 Rese...

Page 69: ...kes shown in the table below to perform common functions NOTE To open a menu using keystrokes press ALT plus the underlined letter To open a submenu open the menu then press the key for the underlined...

Page 70: ...3 Choose from one of the following options Select Default to configure the look and feel back to the Management application defaults Select System to configure the Management application to have the...

Page 71: ...g the font size to Large may cause the interface components for example text and button labels to display incorrectly 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work 5 Click OK on the message NOTE Changes do no...

Page 72: ...tions dialog box displays 2 Select Product Improvement in the Category list 3 Select the No thank you option 4 Click OK to save your selection and close the Options dialog box Data transfer If you agr...

Page 73: ...transmits the data The client transmits the data securely to the Brocade web server using the Apache HTTP Components third party library The client communicates with the Brocade web server using an a...

Page 74: ...er enables you to configure the data source name DSN for the database To install the ODBC driver and create a new data source complete the following steps 1 Double click edb_psqlodbc exe located on th...

Page 75: ...ata Source Administrator dialog box 22 To export data select Data Import External Data New Database Query and complete the steps in the Data Connection Wizard Connecting to the database using the ODBC...

Page 76: ...xODBC 1 Open the odbc ini file in an editor and enter the datasource information as follows TestDB Description PostgreSQL 8 4 Driver opt PostgreSQL psqlODBC lib psqlodbcw so Database dcmdb Servername...

Page 77: ...eed screen click Finish Executing SQL queries from the CLI To execute SQL queries from the command line interface CLI complete the following steps 1 Choose one of the following options On Windows syst...

Page 78: ...to start all services NOTE If the server is configured to use an external FTP server the Server Management Console does not attempt to start the built in FTP service 9 Click Close to close the Server...

Page 79: ...v2 0 BeanShell 2 0b4 Sun Public License Gnu Lesser Public License BouncyCastleCryptoProvider 1 45 Bouncy Castle License CastorBindingFramework 0 9 9 1 Apache License v2 0 Conf M 1 9 3 Java based softw...

Page 80: ...ols License MimeTypeDetectionUtility 2 1 2 Apache License v2 0 MyBatisPersistenceFrameworkandSchhemaMigrationsf orJava 3 0 2 GA Apache License v2 0 OpenSAML 2 3 0 Apache License v2 0 OpenSSLforLinux 1...

Page 81: ...6 2 or later Enhanced Group Management Trial and Licensed version Only Requires Enhanced Group Management license Fault Management Requires Fabric OS 4 4 or later for SNMP traps Fabric Binding Trial...

Page 82: ...n Only Requires Fabric OS 6 2 or later Requires Fabric OS 6 3 or later for State Change and C3 Discard Frames violation types Security Management Requires Fabric OS 5 2 and later for SCC Policy Requir...

Page 83: ...e following steps 1 Stop all services by completing the following steps a Launch the Server Console b Click the Services tab c Click Stop to stop all services NOTE If you perform patch upgrade while s...

Page 84: ...rsion zip for example Install_Home patch backup na_11 3 0 patch a zip Generates a patch log Updates the conf file Install_Home conf patch conf to include the patch version applied and patch created da...

Page 85: ...ed in the restore xml folder 8 Go to the Install_Home conf directory 9 Open the version properties file in a text editor 10 Change the patch version patch version value to the reverted patch for examp...

Page 86: ...34 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Uninstalling a patch 2...

Page 87: ...s not supported For a Fabric OS fabric the seed switch must be the primary Fabric Configuration Server FCS If you use a non primary FCS to discover the fabric the Management application displays an er...

Page 88: ...stribute the changes to other switches When FCS Policy is defined ConfigDownload is allowed only from the primary FCS switch but Management application does not check at the time of download that the...

Page 89: ...the widget you selected To discover specific IP addresses or subnets complete the following steps 1 Select Discover Fabrics The Discover Fabrics dialog box displays 4 slot Backbone Chassis as seed sw...

Page 90: ...he Fabric Name field 4 Enter an IP address IPv4 or IPv6 for a device in the IP Address field To configure the preferred IP format for the Management application server to connect with Fabric OS device...

Page 91: ...the topology In addition the Fabric OS switch must have Physical AD visibility For Virtual Fabric discovery device requirements refer to Virtual Fabrics requirements on page 677 To discover a Virtual...

Page 92: ...device you must configure SNMPv3 and your SNMP v3 user account must be defined as a Fabric OS switch user When you discovers Virtual Fabric enabled switch with the SNMPv3 username admin which is the s...

Page 93: ...rtitioned the Undiscovered Seed Switches dialog box displays a Select the Select check box for each undiscovered seed switch to discover their fabrics b Click OK on the Undiscovered Seed Switches dial...

Page 94: ...f the logical switch Fabric Name The name of the fabric where device is located Status The status of the update such as Success Failed or Not Applicable Reason The reason for the status for Failed or...

Page 95: ...3 Enter a user name in the User Name field 14 Enter a context name In the Context Name field 15 Select the authorization protocol in the Auth Protocol field 16 Enter the authorization password in the...

Page 96: ...r want the Management application to discover and monitor a specific fabric you can delete it from active discovery Deleting a fabric also deletes the fabric data on the server both system collected a...

Page 97: ...g box Viewing the fabric discovery state The Management application enables you to view device status through the Discover Setup dialog box To view the discovery status of a device complete the follow...

Page 98: ...e Seed Switch Seed Switch Not registered for SNMP Traps New Discovery Pending Troubleshooting fabric discovery If you encounter discovery problems complete the following checklist to ensure that disco...

Page 99: ...covery complete the following steps 1 Select Discover Fabrics The managed count exceeded message displays Managed counts that have been exceeded display with a light red background Managed counts that...

Page 100: ...v3 is not configured At the time of discovery SNMP v3 is not configured for all other switches in the fabric After discovery a device is upgraded to Fabric OS 6 2 or later and is Virtual Fabric enabl...

Page 101: ...describes the icons that indicate the current status of the discovered switches For Professional and Professional Plus the default monitoring interval is 120 seconds minimum interval is 120 seconds T...

Page 102: ...the following steps 1 Select Discovery Fabrics The Discover Fabrics dialog box displays 2 Select the fabric you want to stop monitoring from the Discovered Fabrics table 3 Click Unmonitor 4 Click Clo...

Page 103: ...as missing in the Accept Changes dialog box If an ISL connected to this switch is disconnected the ISL is also marked as missing in the in the Accept Changes dialog box If a device connected to this s...

Page 104: ...e fabric has user defined Admin Domains created or if the fabric is merged with another fabric already in the monitored state 4 Click Close on the Monitor Status dialog box 5 Click Close on the Discov...

Page 105: ...d switch does not result in formation of a new fabric If a merge occurs the historical data is lost only from the second fabric You can change the seed switch as long as the following conditions are m...

Page 106: ...en you change the seed switch for a fabric the Management application performs the following checks in the order they are listed Identifies all switches and removes those running unsupported firmware...

Page 107: ...hosts from a comma separated values CSV file or import all hosts from discovered fabrics or VM Managers NOTE Host discovery requires HCM Agent 2 0 or later CIM and WMI host discovery requirements ESX...

Page 108: ...ate Validation checkbox is not selected 2 Restarting the Server Management Console SMC is necessary whether the Enable Certificate Validation check box is selected or not 3 Refer to Discovering Hosts...

Page 109: ...ent option Go to step 9 To configure CIM server credentials select the CIM server ESXi only option Continue with step 8 To configure WMI server credentials select the Windows Management Instrumentatio...

Page 110: ...splays Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem A host group displays in the Discovered Hosts table of the Discover Host Adapters dialog box The discovery status is updated dynamically...

Page 111: ...mentation WMI option Continue with step 9 If you do not need to configure Host credentials skip to step 13 9 Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options To configure di...

Page 112: ...brics or an individual fabric from the host list 6 Click Add All hosts that are part of a managed fabric and have a registered host name display in the host list If no host with a registered host name...

Page 113: ...admin Leave this field blank for the CIM server 11 Enter your password in the Password field The HCM agent default is password Leave this field blank for the CIM server 12 Click OK on the Add Host Ad...

Page 114: ...scovery with authentication select the HTTPS option in Protocol To configure discovery without authentication select the HTTP option in Protocol 9 Enter the port number in the Port field The HCM agent...

Page 115: ...ptions To configure discovery with authentication select the HTTPS option in Protocol To configure discovery without authentication select the HTTP option in Protocol 5 Enter the port number in the Po...

Page 116: ...discovering a host to active discovery To rediscover a host to active discovery complete the following steps 1 Select Discover Host Adapters The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays 2 Select the...

Page 117: ...ollowing steps 1 Select Discover Host Adapters The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays 2 Right click the Hosts node and select Expand All to show all devices The Name field displays the discove...

Page 118: ...1 Verify IP connectivity by issuing a ping command to the host a Open the command prompt b From the server type ping Host_IP_Address 2 If the host is responding to ping but discovery still fails veri...

Page 119: ...g a VM manager on page 67 step 4 and step 5 requires a vCenter user with read only or read write privilege on the vCenter server node and all objects in the inventory below the vCenter server Enabling...

Page 120: ...og box 3 Enter the IP address or host name in the Network Address field 4 Enter the VM manager port number in the Port field 5 Enter the VM manager username in the User ID field 6 Enter the VM manager...

Page 121: ...ger discovery complete the following steps 1 Select Discover VM Managers The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays 2 Select the Host in the Discovered VM Managers list and click Edit The Edit VM Ma...

Page 122: ...Managers list and click Include 3 Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box Removing a VM manager from active discovery If you decide you no longer want the Management application to discove...

Page 123: ...elect Discover VM Managers The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays 2 Select the VM manager you want to delete permanently from discovery in the Previously Discovered Addresses table 3 Click Delet...

Page 124: ...ame 3 Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh 4 Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box Troubleshooting VM manager discovery If you encounter discovery problems complete t...

Page 125: ...mber of historical events saved to the repository as well as the retention period for the events For more information refer to Event storage settings on page 90 Flyovers Use to customize the propertie...

Page 126: ...register the server as the trap recipient on products If SAN products have Informs enabled the registration is for the Informs For more information refer to SNMP Trap Registration settings on page 10...

Page 127: ...on progress files Director Switch firmware files FAF files Switch technical supportSave and Switch backup files and miscellaneous files Backup conf contains the Management application configuration fi...

Page 128: ...Configuring backup To configure backup complete the following steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Server Backup in the Category list The Server Backup pane displays...

Page 129: ...files for the network drive NOTE The Management application should not directly access local or network resources through mapped drive letters When the Management application must access a remote reso...

Page 130: ...p to a hard drive or writable CD if the device does not exist or is not writable an error message displays that says you have entered an invalid device For backup to a network drive if the device does...

Page 131: ...ackup occurs NOTE Do NOT modify the backup properties file To change the backup interval complete the following steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Server Backup in...

Page 132: ...list 3 Click Backup Now Click Yes on the confirmation message The backup process begins immediately 4 Click Apply or OK Reviewing backup events The Master Log which displays in the lower left area of...

Page 133: ...l supportSave and Switch backup files and miscellaneous files Backup conf contains the Management application configuration files Backup cimom contains the SMIA configuration files In a disaster recov...

Page 134: ...Management application automatically retries the collection after the short tick interval However there are two exceptions to this retry rule If collection failure is due to an ACL rule blocking acce...

Page 135: ...h run only for switches that have a particular feature For example the EncryptionBaseCollector only runs for encryption switches The Management application uses the following Switch level collectors B...

Page 136: ...rotocol SNMP is an internet standard protocol for managing devices on IP networks SNMP is a component of the Internet Protocol Suite as defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force IETF It consists...

Page 137: ...for firmware download For Fabric OS devices used to collect technical support information For more information refer to FTP SCP SFTP server settings on page 125 Fabric OS Network OS SCP Secure copy S...

Page 138: ...th reset and the associated default state Importing OUI and editing product type mapping You can import the OUI information and assign the product type as Initiator Target or Default The latest OUI ca...

Page 139: ...roduct Type for each OUI will be Default and can be changed to Target or Initiator The following example formats are supported in the OUI text file 00 00 88 hex Brocade Communications Systems Inc 00 0...

Page 140: ...nge to Target Initiator or Default 5 Click OK SAN End node display The connectivity map can be configured to display or not display end nodes This option enables you to set the end node display for al...

Page 141: ...ent Server and the managed SAN device is lost You can configure the application to enable events when the Ethernet connection is lost Enabling SAN Ethernet loss events The Options dialog box enables y...

Page 142: ...to store historical events to a file before purging them from the repository Configuring event storage To configure event storage complete the following steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialo...

Page 143: ...Click OK Purged events from the master log table are stored in the Install_Home data archive events directory using the format event_MMDDYYY zip for example event_04052011 zip These files are retaine...

Page 144: ...ed properties to the Selected Properties table d Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the properties in the Selected Properties table if necessary The properties displayed in the Selected...

Page 145: ...e for all protocols b Select each property you want to display in the connection flyover from the Available Properties table Depending on which protocol you select some of the following properties may...

Page 146: ...window containing the product port or connection information displays For the product icon the pop up window displays the display name and IP address of the device For the connection the pop up windo...

Page 147: ...that names be unique on your system 4 Click OK on the Options dialog box 5 Click OK on the duplicate names may exist message To fix duplicated names refer to Fixing duplicate names on page 96 Setting...

Page 148: ...nce of duplicate names Fabric The fabric name FC Address The Fibre Channel address Names The current name of the device If you selected the Append Incremental numbers for all repetitive names option t...

Page 149: ...on the confirmation message Viewing names To view names associated with devices complete the following steps 1 Select Configure Names The Configure Names dialog box displays Figure 32 FIGURE 32 Confi...

Page 150: ...age 100 Fix Duplicates button Click to launch the Fix Duplicates dialog box For more information refer to Fixing duplicate names on page 96 Apply Names button Click to apply unassigned detached names...

Page 151: ...evice in the Name field 4 Click Add The new device displays in the table If you set names to be unique on the Options dialog box and the name you entered already exists a message indicating the name a...

Page 152: ...es from the Display list Only devices with a name display The table displays the Name WWN Operational Status Type and a Description of the device 3 Click the name you want to edit in the Name column 4...

Page 153: ...hing for a device by name You can search for objects switch fabric product ports or N Ports by name To search for a name in the Connectivity Map refer to Searching for a device on page 375 To search b...

Page 154: ...in the Search field You can search on partial WWNs NOTE To search for a device the device must be discovered and display in the topology 5 Click Search All devices with the specified WWN or partial W...

Page 155: ...owing steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Security Misc in the Category list The Security Misc pane displays Figure 33 FIGURE 33 Options dialog box Security Misc pan...

Page 156: ...t Server Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Security Misc in the Category list 3 Select the Enforce Fabric OS MD5 Checksum File Import check box 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work Con...

Page 157: ...lient login check box NOTE Users logging into the client will not see the banner when logging in to this Server 4 Click Yes on the confirmation message 5 Click Apply or OK to save your work Syslog Reg...

Page 158: ...ply or OK to save your work SNMP Trap Registration settings You can automatically register the server as the trap recipient on products If SAN products have Informs enabled the registration is for the...

Page 159: ...s for the traps forwarded by the server Configuring SNMP v1 and v2c credentials To configure a SNMP v1 or v2c credentials complete the following steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialog box di...

Page 160: ...6 Select one of the following privacy protocol types from the Priv Protocol list CBC DES continue with step 7 CFB_AES 128 continue with step 7 CFB_AES_256 continue with step 7 NONE go to step 8 7 Ent...

Page 161: ...th which the Management application server communicates The truststore file is used when making decisions on what to trust The server truststore truststore jks is stored in the Install_Home conf secur...

Page 162: ...uststore Certificates table Contains the following fields and components Alias Name Unique alias of the certificate Issued To To whom the certificate was issued Issued By Author of the certificate Imp...

Page 163: ...y is of type RSA the default signature algorithm is SHA256withRSA Issuer Entity that signed the certificate Validity Dates that the certificate is valid Subject Name of the entity whose public key the...

Page 164: ...ed from the server truststore Changing the password for the truststore repository To change the keystore password refer to Changing the keystore password on page 114 1 Select Server Options The Option...

Page 165: ...he default signature algorithm is SHA256withRSA Issuer Entity that signed the certificate Validity Dates that the certificate is valid Subject Name of the entity whose public key the certificate ident...

Page 166: ...e following steps a Browse to the location of the new certificate b Enter the password for the new certificate in the Password field The new certificate is cached locally in the client 6 Click Apply o...

Page 167: ...Clear the check box to disable certificate validation 4 Click Apply or OK to save your work Client export port settings You can configure a port for communication between the client and server Config...

Page 168: ...interfaces are not plugged in you must disable them otherwise the following features do not work properly Server impact Configuration wizard does not display all IP addresses Trap and Syslog auto regi...

Page 169: ...4 Select the return IP address in the Client Server IP Configuration Return Address list 5 Select the preferred IP address in the Switch Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list If DNS is not co...

Page 170: ...ssage 4 Click Next on the FTP Server screen 5 Complete the following steps on the Server IP Configuration screen Figure 41 FIGURE 41 Server IP Configuration screen a Select an address from the Server...

Page 171: ...he application to use dual network cards Issues with Client to Server connectivity can be due to different reasons Some examples are The computer running the Server has more than one network interface...

Page 172: ...effect after application restart message 7 Memory allocation settings You can configure memory allocation for the client and server to improve performance You can trigger switch polling when a state...

Page 173: ...t Heap Size is 950 MB NOTE There is no restriction on the Client Heap Size value The correct Client Heap Size value should be given according to the RAM present in the server when it is launched NOTE...

Page 174: ...ttings on the size of the SAN To configure asset polling complete the following steps 1 Select Server Options The Options dialog box displays 2 Select Memory Allocation in the Category list to set the...

Page 175: ...bar Double click the icon to launch the Memory Allocation pane of the Options dialog box NOTE If you exceed the recommended count the network size status icon refreshes when the license is refreshed...

Page 176: ...e Options dialog box displays 2 Select Product Communication from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane The Product Communication pane displays Figure 42 FIGURE 42 Options dialog box P...

Page 177: ...t in the Category pane The Product Communication pane displays Figure 42 3 Fabric OS and Network OS products only Select IPv4 default or IPv6 to set the preferred IP format 4 Click Apply or OK to save...

Page 178: ...er to Viewing port status on page 12 Accessing the FTP server folder Choose from one of the following options to access the FTP server folder To access the internal FTP folder select Monitor Techsuppo...

Page 179: ...devices running 5 3 and later NOTE SFTP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 7 0 and later To configure the internal SCP or SFTP server settings complete the following steps 1 Select Server Opti...

Page 180: ...rnal SCP or SFTP server to download firmware and allow technical support NOTE SCP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 5 3 and later NOTE SFTP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 7 0 and la...

Page 181: ...lete the following steps a Select the SFTP Server check box to configure the external SCP server All fields are mandatory b Enter the IP address for the remote host in the SFTP Host IP field c Enter a...

Page 182: ...ully or an error message displays If you receive an error message make sure your credentials are correct the server is running the remote directory path exists and you have the correct access permissi...

Page 183: ...number 6 Click Apply or OK to save your work NOTE Changes to this option take effect after application restart 7 Click OK on the changes take effect after application restart message Support mode set...

Page 184: ...ss than 5 log files for the Client a new file is created For local clients log files network_address client log 1 through network_address client log 5 are created in the User_Home Product_Name localho...

Page 185: ...see table below next to the product icon Connections are also tracked A new connection displays a solid gray line with an added icon and missing connections display a yellow dashed line with a removed...

Page 186: ...ric tracking by choosing one of the following options Select the fabric on which you want to disable fabric tracking on the Product List or Connectivity Map and select Monitor Track Fabric Changes Rig...

Page 187: ...r fabric Switches This table shows a brief summary of the switches including status whether the device port will be added or removed from the fabric name fabric name IP address WWN and domain ID This...

Page 188: ...or fabric Switches This table shows a brief summary of the switches including status whether the device port will be added or removed from the fabric name fabric name IP address WWN and domain ID Thi...

Page 189: ...tracking or accept changes for a switch or fabric Switches This table shows a brief summary of the switches including status whether the device port will be added or removed from the fabric name fabr...

Page 190: ...138 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Fabric tracking 4...

Page 191: ...in areas of responsibilities AORs then assign one or more AORs to a user s privilege When you assign a user an AOR that user will be able to manage only the devices in that AOR Devices in a user s AO...

Page 192: ...tains the following fields and components Authentication Primary The primary authentication server type configured through the Server Management Console Secondary The secondary authentication server t...

Page 193: ...he selected user refer to Editing a user account on page 145 Duplicate button Click to launch the Duplicate Users dialog box for the selected user refer to Copying a user account on page 145 Delete bu...

Page 194: ...delete the selected role refer to Deleting a role on page 151 AOR table Lists the default system AOR and any user defined AORs Name The unique name of the AOR Default system AORs include All Fabrics A...

Page 195: ...ned to the user Privileges provide access to the features in Management application A role is a group of selected privileges A role can be assigned to one or more Management application users who need...

Page 196: ...e mail address separating each with a semi colon To send a text message or page via e mail use the following format number carrier com where number is your phone number and carrier com is the SMS serv...

Page 197: ...gged out and must log back in to see the changes 5 Click Close to close the Users dialog box Copying a user account You can create a user account by copying an existing one When you copy an account yo...

Page 198: ...references to user_acct2 user_acct2 now has the following user defined views Fabric1 Fabric2 Fabric_CO Host1 and Hosts NOTE You cannot copy user preferences to user accounts that are currently logged...

Page 199: ...rk Advisor Server for the changes to take effect Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account To assign roles and AORs to an existing user account complete the following steps 1 Selec...

Page 200: ...e confirmation message the user is logged out and must log back in to see the changes 5 Click Close to close the Users dialog box Disabling a user account To make the user account inactive but keep it...

Page 201: ...user account You can unlock a user account when a user is locked out of the system because of too many invalid login attempts To unlock a user account complete the following steps 1 Select Server User...

Page 202: ...ving privileges from a role on page 152 6 Click OK to save the new role and close the Add Role dialog box The new role displays in the Roles list of the Users dialog box To add users to this role foll...

Page 203: ...d close the Duplicate Role dialog box The new role displays in the Roles list of the Users dialog box To add users to this role follow the instructions in Exporting a user account on page 146 5 Click...

Page 204: ...ox Removing privileges from a role You remove privileges from the Edit or Duplicate Users dialog boxes To remove privileges from role complete the following steps 1 Select Server Users The Users dialo...

Page 205: ...1 This AOR group can then be assigned to UserA When using the Management application UserA will be able to create configurations generate reports and perform backups only to entries in AOR Group 1 whi...

Page 206: ...age 155 or Removing products from an AOR on page 156 6 Click OK to save the new AOR and close the Add AOR dialog box The new AOR displays in the AOR list of the Users dialog box 7 Click Close to close...

Page 207: ...box displays 3 Complete step 3 through step 5 in Creating an AOR on page 153 4 Click OK to save the new AOR and close the Duplicate AOR dialog box The new AOR displays in the AOR table of the Users d...

Page 208: ...roducts to the Selected Products table Select multiple hosts by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one host 7 Click OK to save your work 8 Click Close to close the Users dialog box Remov...

Page 209: ...ber of days to warn the user prior to password expiration in the Warning Period field Only enabled when the Password Age value is greater than zero Valid values are 0 through 998 The default is 0 The...

Page 210: ...ear Valid values are 0 through 127 The default is 1 6 Configure the password lockout support by completing the following steps a Enter the number of failed login attempts allowed before the user accou...

Page 211: ...lated the password policy Full Name Displays the full name of the user who violated the password policy Reason Displays the reason the user violated the password policy 5 Click Close on the View Polic...

Page 212: ...rwise this field is blank Account State Displays the current state of the account Valid states include Active Locked out by user manager Locked out threshold reached Password expired Password format p...

Page 213: ...e number and carrier com is the SMS server For example 3035551212 txt att net text message or 3035551212 page att net page NOTE Check with your carrier for the exact e mail address 9 Click OK on the U...

Page 214: ...the password Number of Digits The minimum number of digits required in the password Punctuation Required The minimum number of punctuation characters required in the password Maximum Repeat The maxim...

Page 215: ...instructions about setting up basic event filters refer to Setting up basic event filtering on page 1258 4 Enter your e mail text message or page address in the E mail Address field Enter more than o...

Page 216: ...164 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 User profiles 5...

Page 217: ...d reports The web client s main window contains a number of areas The following graphic illustrates the various areas and descriptions of them are listed below FIGURE 54 Management application web cli...

Page 218: ...f you exceed the maximum port count for your version software functionality is impacted and you must reduce the port count through discovery or contact your vendor to purchase an additional license fo...

Page 219: ...avigation bar contains the following components 1 Default Dashboards list Use to select one of the following default dashboards Product Status and Traffic Click to display the dashboard For more infor...

Page 220: ...et title The Events Inventory and Status widgets display the severity icons and the number of products with that severity beneath the widget title When the widget or monitor is minimized the severity...

Page 221: ...nce monitors in this dashboard My Dashboards Displays user defined dashboards Only displays dashboards that you create in the Java client Shared Dashboards Displays dashboards shared by other users in...

Page 222: ...ta for the selected products and the ports that belong to the selected products If you select a port scope dashboard widgets displays data for the specified ports and the products to which the ports b...

Page 223: ...nutes Displays data for 30 minutes 1 Hour Displays data for 1 hour 6 Hours Displays data for 6 hours 12 Hours Displays data for 12 hours 1 Day Displays data for 24 hours 3 Days Displays data for 3 day...

Page 224: ...details for all ports Initiator ports ISL ports and Target ports Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor includes details for all ports Initiator ports ISL ports and Target ports SAN Ports Health...

Page 225: ...orts and Target ports SAN Inventory widget Stacked bar chart view of FC devices grouped by operational status and selected category SAN Status widget Pie chart view of FC devices categorized by operat...

Page 226: ...ay data for a specific duration refer to Configuring the dashboard display on page 171 Events widget The Events widget Figure 58 displays the number of events by severity level for a specified time ra...

Page 227: ...therefore could skew the bars for the other events you can exclude Syslog events If they are excluded they will not be displayed in the legend Users selections are persisted per user per server Custom...

Page 228: ...nventory by physical location Driver Displays the Host product inventory by driver BIOS Displays the Host product inventory by BIOS boot code image version OS Type Displays the Host product inventory...

Page 229: ...the current state of all products discovered for a group in various colors on each bar Tooltips showing the number of devices in that state are shown when you pause on the bar Double click a bar in th...

Page 230: ...SAN product data 1 Double click a section in the SAN Status or SAN Inventory widgets The SAN Inventory Detailed View page displays with the following fields and components Scope The network and time...

Page 231: ...h status worst to best order with the associated icon displays underneath the widget title Pie chart The device status as a percentage of the total number of devices The pie chart displays the percent...

Page 232: ...s in the Java client The VM Alarms widget displays the vCenter alarms for the specified fabric and time range in a table The VM Alarms widget includes the following data Widget title The name of the w...

Page 233: ...0 or later with the Fabric Watch license or FC devices running Fabric OS 7 2 0 or later with the Fabric Vision license but not migrated to MAPS The MAPS widgets display on the main Dashboard tab The M...

Page 234: ...n with a MAPS and Fabric Watch violation for each category Always displays whether or not there is a violation NOTE For FCIP Health the Network Object Count is based on the number of VE_port and circu...

Page 235: ...idget title Product A product label such as product name IP address node WWN domain ID or zone alias Port A port identifier such as port name number address WWN user port number or zone alias Click to...

Page 236: ...omizing the Port Health Violations widget You can customize the widget to display violations for a specific fabric and time frame To display data for a specific fabric or group refer to Setting the ne...

Page 237: ...ble view of the traffic measure All SAN FCIP tunnel collector All SAN FC port collector port throughput collector All SAN TE port collector Top Port Underflow Errors Table view of the underflow errors...

Page 238: ...cified in the monitor Alignment Errors sec The number error rate of alignment errors per second for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port Alignment Errors m...

Page 239: ...second for the duration specified in the monitor C3 Discards The number error count of Class 3 discard errors for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port C3...

Page 240: ...O The number error count of Class 3 frames received at this port and discarded at the transmission port due to timeout errors for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for t...

Page 241: ...specified in the monitor CRC Errors The number error count of cyclic redundancy check CRC errors for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port CRC Errors monito...

Page 242: ...in the monitor Encode Error Out The number error count of encoding errors outside of frames for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port Encode Error Out monit...

Page 243: ...errors for the duration specified in the monitor TX Link Failures The number error count of transmit link failure errors Viewing additional details for the Top Port Link Failures monitor 1 Click the V...

Page 244: ...t errors for the duration specified in the monitor TX Link Resets The number error count of transmit link reset errors Viewing additional details for the Top Port Link Resets monitor 1 Click the View...

Page 245: ...cified in the monitor Overflow Errors sec The number error rate of overflow errors per second for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port Overflow Errors moni...

Page 246: ...f end of frames received Receive EOF sec The number rate of end of frames received per second for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port Receive EOF monitor...

Page 247: ...ecified in the monitor Runtime Errors sec The number error rate of runtime errors per second for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port Runtime Errors monito...

Page 248: ...f synchronization failures for the port Sync Losses sec The number of synchronization failures for the port per second Viewing additional details for the Top Port Sync Losses monitor 1 Click the View...

Page 249: ...r Too Long Errors sec The number error rate of frames longer than the maximum frame size allowed errors per second for the duration specified in the monitor Viewing additional details for the Top Port...

Page 250: ...nected Port Initiator or Target Displays the address of the port RX Traffic MB s The top receive traffic in megabits per second TX Traffic MB s The top transmit traffic in megabits per second Viewing...

Page 251: ...Underflow Errors The number error count of underflow errors for the duration specified in the monitor Underflow Errors sec The number error rate of underflow errors per second for the duration specifi...

Page 252: ...led View page Widget summary The product count for each status worst to best displays underneath the widget title Top value The top value and the time that value was reported Port The port affected by...

Page 253: ...The port state for example Enabled Status The port status for example Up 2 Click the close X button Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor The Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor Figure 66...

Page 254: ...Page refer to Port summary view on page 225 When you launch the Port page the detailed view closes Connected_Port where Connected_Port is Connected Port Initiator or Target Displays the address of the...

Page 255: ...title Top value The top value and the time that value was reported Product The product affected by this monitor Click to launch the Product page for this device refer to Product summary view on page 2...

Page 256: ...model Port Count The number of ports on the product Firmware The firmware level running on the product Location The location of the product Contact A contact name for the product 2 Click the close X b...

Page 257: ...lick to launch the Product page for this device refer to Product summary view on page 216 When you launch the Product page the detailed view closes Min The minimum value of the measure in the specifie...

Page 258: ...highest value in the table Product The product affected by this monitor Click to launch the Product page for this device refer to Product summary view on page 216 When you launch the Product page the...

Page 259: ...tag Serial The serial number of the product Model The product model Port Count The number of ports on the product Firmware The firmware level running on the product Location The location of the produc...

Page 260: ...y this monitor Click to launch the Product page for this device refer to Product summary view on page 216 When you launch the Product page the detailed view closes Min The minimum value of the measure...

Page 261: ...uct summary view on page 216 Ports Not In Use The number of ports not in use for the product Pause on a rown to display the minimum current and maximum vaules for the selected row This field also disp...

Page 262: ...ventory page displays a detailed view of the discovered fabrics and switches FIGURE 77 Inventory page The Inventory page has three panes 1 Expand navigation pane Contains the list of fabrics and switc...

Page 263: ...roducts in the fabric Click a product to display the Product Page in the center pane Product summary view on page 216 Fabric summary view The Fabric summary view displays the Product List fabric summa...

Page 264: ...Type Displays the type of product State Displays the state for the product and the port Status Displays the status for the product and the port Tag Displays the tag number of the product Serial Displ...

Page 265: ...the virtual machine associated with the host VM HBA Device Model Displays the device model of the virtual machine associated with the host FIGURE 83 Target Details table The Target Details table displ...

Page 266: ...table Info icon Displays the total number of Information events triggered Click to only display Information events in the table Debug icon Displays the total number of Debug events triggered Click to...

Page 267: ...e Fabric ID name of the selected fabric Seed Switch Displays the IP address of the seed switch for the selected fabric Principal Switch Displays the IP address of the principal switch for the selected...

Page 268: ...a product in the Product List pane The product summary displays with two panes Product Page and Properties FIGURE 86 Product summary 3 Review the product summary data FIGURE 87 Product Page area The...

Page 269: ...umber of days the product has been up and running FIGURE 89 Port Details area The Ports Details area displays the following data for the selected product Collapse Expand button Click to collapse or ex...

Page 270: ...iew refer to Viewing the port summary on page 225 State Displays the state offline or online of the port Status Displays the status of the port Type Displays the type of port Port WWN Displays the wor...

Page 271: ...the ingress port defined in the flow definition Egress Port Displays the egress port defined in the flow definition Source Displays the port number defined in the flow definition An asterisk indicate...

Page 272: ...following details for events triggered in the fabric Collapse Expand button Click to collapse or expand the view All Displays the total number of events triggered Emergency icon Displays the total nu...

Page 273: ...mmunication events Count Displays the number of times the event occurred Message ID Displays the message ID of the event Fabric Name Displays the name of the fabric on which the event occurred Port Na...

Page 274: ...2 hours 1 Day Displays data for 24 hours Alignment Errors Bad Packets Received BB Credit Zero C3 Discards C3 Discards Other C3 Discards RX TO C3 Discards TX TO C3 Discards Unreachable CRC Errors Disca...

Page 275: ...der to select all flows in the table 3 Click Show Performance in the Flows area 4 Click Settings 5 Select one or more of the following measures you want to include in the graph from the Flows Measures...

Page 276: ...le Remove flows from the graph by clearing the check box 9 Click Update Viewing product properties To view product properties complete the following steps 1 Click the Inventory icon 2 Select a product...

Page 277: ...plays the tag number of the product Sequence Displays the sequence number of the product Routing Policy Displays the routing policy configured on the product Port Count Displays the number of ports on...

Page 278: ...in a graph The x axis displays the time scope you selected The y axis display depends on the performance measure you selected If you have not selected performance measures the graph displays receive...

Page 279: ...selected and the time the flow measure was collected Unnamed check box Select the check box for each flow you want to include in the graph Select the check box in the table header to select all flows...

Page 280: ...he violation occurred Unit The units description of the measure value Marginal Displays a check mark if this action event notification is configured and enabled on the device Critical Displays a check...

Page 281: ...rt name FRU name and so on on which the violation occurred Fabric Name Displays the Fabric name to which the object belongs Category Displays the MAPS category such as Port Switch Status Fabric FRU Se...

Page 282: ...of the switch Name Displays the port name Slot Port Displays the slot and port number User Port Displays the number of the user port Area ID Port Index Displays the area identifier and port index numb...

Page 283: ...duct Calculated Status Displays the calculated operational status Zone Alias Displays the zone alias of the port For GigE port properties the Details area displays the following data for the selected...

Page 284: ...y Displays the severity icon for the event When the same event Warning or Error occurs repeatedly the Management application automatically eliminates the additional occurrences Time Displays the time...

Page 285: ...ly retains a maximum 10 000 reports In addition the Management application only retains reports for a maximum of 2 years Note that the Management application purges reports nightly FIGURE 98 Reports p...

Page 286: ...ar is located on the upper right side of each tab and provides buttons and fields to perform various functions The buttons and fields that display in the toolbar change based on the selected tab For m...

Page 287: ...port in the Reports expand navigation bar 2 Click Generate New Report Depending on the report you select the Select Fabric or Select Switch dialog box displays FIGURE 100 Select Fabric dialog box Next...

Page 288: ...erated Reports toolbar The toolbar is located on the upper right side of the tab and provides buttons and fields to perform various functions FIGURE 102 Generated Reports toolbar 1 Delete button Selec...

Page 289: ...rt Table functions For a description of how to use the Events table functionality refer to Table functions on page 232 3 Click the name of the report you want to view from the list of generated report...

Page 290: ...n the upper right side of the tab and provides buttons and fields to perform various functions FIGURE 103 Manage Schedule toolbar 1 Add button Click to configure a new report schedule For step by step...

Page 291: ...If you used more than one template displays the number of templates as a link Click to view the templates included in the schedule Frequency The frequency at which the report is run E mail icon Whethe...

Page 292: ...to include in the schedule from the Available Templates list 6 Click Add 7 Select a report in the Selected Templates and Criteria list Depending on the reports you selected you may need to enter param...

Page 293: ...d generation is successful you can access the reports from the Management application You can also configure the schedule to send the report to a specified e mail E mailing reports on page 243 or dire...

Page 294: ...include in the report 4 Click Ok on the Select Fabric dialog box Selecting switches The Switch Report requires that you select a switch from a list of discovered switches 1 Select one of the Switch r...

Page 295: ...u can e mail reports make sure that the user e mail address is valid and you must configure e mail notification through the Management application Java client refer to the User Manual or online help 1...

Page 296: ...Port Report refer to Selecting fabrics on page 241 If you selected Switch Report refer to Selecting switches on page 242 7 Repeat step 7 for each report you selected 8 Click Next 9 Select the frequenc...

Page 297: ...rovides buttons and fields to perform various functions FIGURE 109 Templates toolbar 1 Delete button Select one or more templates that you want to remove from the list and click to delete You can only...

Page 298: ...n Displays whether the report is shared or not Table functions For a list of general table functions in the Reports page refer to General report page functions on page 234 Viewing a report 1 Click the...

Page 299: ...rwrite message to overwrite the report When the export is complete click OK on the successful export message Importing report templates You can import external report design rptdesign files into the M...

Page 300: ...fabric is divided into three parts Fabric wide port details Switch wide port details and individual port details For detailed information about this report refer to Fabric Ports report on page 253 Fa...

Page 301: ...escription of the fabric Contact The name of the person or group you should contact about the fabric Discovered Time The date and time the fabric was discovered Last Changed Time The date and time whe...

Page 302: ...name of the port FC Address The FC address of the device User Defined Device Name The user defined device name for the switch User Defined IP Address The user defined IP address for the switch Locati...

Page 303: ...he world wide name of the virtual switch Switch IP Address The IP address of the physical switch Click to launch the Switch report Port Name The port name Port WWN The world wide name of the port FC A...

Page 304: ...e Name The name of the connected device Device Vendor The vendor of the connected device Role The role of the connected device Node WWN The node WWN of the connected device Port WWN The port WWN of th...

Page 305: ...of Ports connected The number of connected switch ports in the fabric Number of Ports Free The number of free switch ports in the fabric Fabric Ports AG Port Details table IP Address The IP address of...

Page 306: ...of the AG typically the F_port Port Index The port index for the F_port Port Speed Gbps The port speed for the F_port Port Status The switch port status Port State The switch port state Port Type The...

Page 307: ...e for the switch For example online or offline Operational Status The operational status of the switch For example healthy operational degraded marginal down failed unknown or unreachable Previous Ope...

Page 308: ...physical or logical Zone Aliases The alternate name of the zone Bottlenecked Port Details table IP Address The IP address of the switch Switch Name The switch name Domain ID Port The domain ID of the...

Page 309: ...WWN of the backbone switch Switch Name The switch name of the backbone switch Domain ID The domain ID of the switch to which the AG is connected Slow Port The slot and port number of the port to which...

Page 310: ...Node Name The node name Node WWN The world wide name of the node Connected Switch Properties Switch Name The name of the connected switch Domain ID The domain ID of the connected switch Port Index The...

Page 311: ...e The adapter s name Adapter HCM Name The adapter s HCM name Adapter Node The adapter s node name Adapter Status The status of the adapter Adapter Model The adapter s model number Adapter Serial The a...

Page 312: ...must be enabled Factory The WWN is assigned at the factory Boot Over SAN Indicates whether boot over SAN is enabled Max Supported Speed The maximum speed that is supported on the port For the FC port...

Page 313: ...here optimum performance is required Vendor Name The vendor of the extended link Vendor OUI The vendor s organizational unique identifier OUI Vendor Part The part number of the extended link Revision...

Page 314: ...ize Select Actual size PDF only to display the report at its actual size Select Fit to whole page PDF only to resize the report to display entirely in the view 6 Click OK on the Export Report dialog b...

Page 315: ...The Management application has the following default dashboards Product Status and Traffic and SAN Port Health The dashboard provides a high level overview of the network and the current states of ma...

Page 316: ...w of the network managed by Management application server 4 SAN tab Displays the Master Log Minimap Connectivity Map topology and Product List For more information refer to the SAN tab overview 5 Dash...

Page 317: ...splay all widgets or a selected widget in a png format For more information refer to Exporting the dashboard display on page 273 4 Print list Prints the dashboard display all widgets or a selected wid...

Page 318: ...and provides a list of dashboards to choose from as well as buttons to perform add and delete functions FIGURE 113 Expand navigation bar The toolbar contains the following fields and components 1 Dash...

Page 319: ...gging the grab bars Use the vertical grab bars between widget columns to adjust the width of widgets in the adjacent columns Use the horizontal grab bars to adjust the height of adjacent widget rows R...

Page 320: ...splay only the dashboard you need 1 Click the Dashboards expand navigation bar 2 Enter your filter criteria in the Filter text box 3 To make the filter case sensitive or insensitive choose one of the...

Page 321: ...rd in this dashboard 4 Click OK The new dashboard displays in the Dashboards expand navigation bar under My Dashboard and becomes the active dashboard Editing a user defined dashboard You can edit a u...

Page 322: ...s a shared dashboard it is unshared from all the shared users and removed from the shared dashboard section If the unshared dashboard is the active dashboard the shared user is notified with a warning...

Page 323: ...name_2 and so on in an incremental sequence The imported dashboard becomes the active dashboard Setting the dashboard display You can set the dashboard to minimize or expand all status widgets and per...

Page 324: ...to remove the associated performance monitor from the dashboard The Performance Monitors list contains the following additional information Title The name of the performance monitor For more informat...

Page 325: ...The file is saved to the location you selected Printing the dashboard display You can print the current dashboard display all widgets and monitors or a selected widget or monitor 1 Select one of the...

Page 326: ...subset of objects fabrics devices or groups using the network scope selection Default network scopes are visible to all users User defined scopes are visible only to the user who created them When a s...

Page 327: ...be displayed based on the selected scope The default network scope is All It includes all managed and monitored fabrics or groups in your AOR If the selected fabric or group is deleted from discovery...

Page 328: ...more the objects you want to include in the network from the Available Targets list and click the right arrow button The objects display in the Selected Targets list To remove an object from the Selec...

Page 329: ...the Selected Targets list To remove an object from the Selected Targets list select it and click the left arrow button 5 Click Delete 6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Scopes dialog b...

Page 330: ...the granularity based on the start date You can also enter the time manually in the spin box If the selected date is 8 days or more before the current date then the entered time will be rounded to the...

Page 331: ...display data from September 9 2013 5 55 AM to September 9 2013 6 25 AM Third refresh will display data from September 9 2013 6 00 AM to September 9 2013 6 30 AM If the start date is within 8 days from...

Page 332: ...llowing from the time period Out of Range Violations widget Top Product Memory Utilization monitor Top Product CPU Utilization monitor Top Products with Unused Ports monitor Top Port Utilization Perce...

Page 333: ...t Health Violations widget Table view of out of range port health violations There are four versions of this monitor based on the type of port All ports initiator ports ISL ports and Target ports SAN...

Page 334: ...t during the selected time range Latency The number of bottleneck violations caused due to latency for the port during the selected time range NOTE The Bottleneck violation for the AN 1010 event is sh...

Page 335: ...by selecting one of the following from the time period If the dashboard time period is 30 minutes then the Display Range is 30 minutes and the Display Interval is 60 seconds If the dashboard time per...

Page 336: ...g check box Select to include Syslog information default on the Event Summary Bar chart The event severity using the color codes in Table 26 Network Scope Select to display the events count of the pro...

Page 337: ...cluded they will not be displayed in the legend Users selections are persisted per user per server Customizing the Events widget You can customize the Events widget to display events for a specific ne...

Page 338: ...where 2 3 0 005 is the driver number and 3 is the number of products running that driver level Change the grouping by selecting one of the following from the Group By list Model Displays the Host prod...

Page 339: ...isplays the current state of all products discovered for a group in various colors on each bar Tooltips showing the number of devices in that state are shown when you pause on the bar Color legend Dis...

Page 340: ...he product inventory by contact name Zoom in on an area of the widget by dragging the mouse upper left corner to lower right corner to select one or more bars NOTE If the ratio between the longest and...

Page 341: ...ause on the slice When there is one status category with less than one percent of the total number of devices the status widget displays the number of devices in each category on each slice Color lege...

Page 342: ...Model The model number of the product Port Count The number of ports on the product Firmware The firmware version of the product Location The physical location of the product This field is editable a...

Page 343: ...usage kbps and VM total disk latency ms Latency Number of latency violations Usage Number of usage violations Aborts Number of abort violations Resets Number of reset violations Customizing the VM Al...

Page 344: ...nd automatically alert you to problems long before they become costly failures The widget displays the number of MAPS threshold violations for all network objects such as ports trunks switches and cir...

Page 345: ...idget refreshes every 10 seconds If you delete discover or unmonitor a device the widget refreshes FIGURE 125 Out of Range Violations widget The Out of Range Violations widget includes the following f...

Page 346: ...u can customize the widget to display violations for a specific fabric or group and time frame To display data for a specific fabric or group refer to Creating a customized network scope on page 275 T...

Page 347: ...s display either the MAC address or the port name instead of WWN Connected_Port_Link where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port Initiator or Target Displays one of the following Connected Port The IS...

Page 348: ...er is powered on Refreshed The time of the last update for the widget For SAN violations the following categories display as blank Abnormal Frame Terminations The number of frames abnormally terminate...

Page 349: ...he C3 discards measure All SAN FC port collector Top Port C3 Discards RX TO Table view of the C3 discards RX TO measure There are four versions of this monitor based on the type of port All ports init...

Page 350: ...derflow errors measure All SAN TE port collector Top Port Utilization Percentage Table view of the port utilization percentage measure There are four versions of this monitor based on the type of port...

Page 351: ...the device properties dialog box Target The target port on the connected device Click to launch the device properties dialog box Alignment Errors The number error count of alignment errors for the du...

Page 352: ...the connected device Click to launch the switch port properties dialog box Initiator The initiator port on the connected device Click to launch the device properties dialog box Target The target port...

Page 353: ...cards RX TO monitor The Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor Figure 128 displays the top ports with receive Class 3 frames received at this port and discarded at the transmission port due to timeout in...

Page 354: ...Status The port status for example Up Refreshed The time of the last update for the monitor To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display options r...

Page 355: ...he switch port properties dialog box Initiator The initiator port on the connected device Click to launch the device properties dialog box Target The target port on the connected device Click to launc...

Page 356: ...tor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated device For more information about shortcut menus refer to Application menus on page 1411 Double click a row to navigate to the Historical G...

Page 357: ...rrors The number of CRC errors Link Failures The number of link failures Invalid Transmissions The number of invalid transmissions Product The product affected by this monitor Type The type of port fo...

Page 358: ...perties dialog box Initiator The initiator port on the connected device Click to launch the device properties dialog box Target The target port on the connected device Click to launch the device prope...

Page 359: ...ays the top ports with link resets in a table FIGURE 132 Top Port Link Resets monitor The Top Port Link Resets monitor includes the following data Severity icon monitor title The worst severity of the...

Page 360: ...ance monitor on page 323 Accessing additional data from the Top Port Link Resets monitor Right click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated device For more infor...

Page 361: ...nitor To edit a port performance monitor refer to Editing a preconfigured performance monitor on page 323 Top Port Receive EOF monitor The Top Port Receive EOF performance monitor displays the top por...

Page 362: ...Link where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port Initiator or Target Displays one of the following Connected Port The ISL or IFL port on the connected device Click to launch the switch port properties...

Page 363: ...Connected Port The ISL or IFL port on the connected device Click to launch the switch port properties dialog box Initiator The initiator port on the connected device Click to launch the device proper...

Page 364: ...lor associated with the threshold and number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title Port The port affected by this monitor Connected_Port_Link where Connected_Port_Link is...

Page 365: ...port affected by this monitor Connected_Port_Link where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port Initiator or Target Displays one of the following Connected Port The ISL or IFL port on the connected devi...

Page 366: ...he color associated with the threshold and number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title Port The port affected by this monitor Connected_Port_Link where Connected_Port_Li...

Page 367: ...h the switch port properties dialog box Initiator The initiator port on the connected device Click to launch the device properties dialog box Target The target port on the connected device Click to la...

Page 368: ...entage monitor includes the following data Severity icon monitor title The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title Port The port affected by this monitor Connected_Port_Link where C...

Page 369: ...rical Graphs Tables dialog box For more information refer to Performance Data on page 1067 Top Product CPU Utilization monitor The Top Product CPU Utilization monitor Figure 138 displays the top produ...

Page 370: ...row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated device For more information about shortcut menus refer to Application menus on page 1411 Double click a row to navigate to t...

Page 371: ...Refreshed The time of the last update for the monitor To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display options refer to Editing a preconfigured perfo...

Page 372: ...ample Reachable Tag The product tag Serial The serial number of the product Model The product model Port Count The number of ports on the product Firmware The firmware level running on the product Loc...

Page 373: ...e The top temperatures Max The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range Fabric The fabric to which the device belongs Product Type The type of product for example switch State The prod...

Page 374: ...URE 142 Top Product CPU Utilization monitor The Top Products with Unused Ports monitor includes the following data Severity icon monitor title The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor...

Page 375: ...omize Dashboard dialog box select the monitor you want to edit and click Edit 2 Select the number of products to include in a selected measure by entering a number in the For Top N Bottom N Monitors N...

Page 376: ...ducts Ports and Traffic Flows monitors Displays the top number of products ports or traffic flows for the selected measure in a table Bottom N Products Ports and Traffic Flows monitors Displays the bo...

Page 377: ...lass 3 frames discarded due to unreachable destination C3 Discards Other The number of class 3 frames discarded due to other reasons Encode Error Out The number of encode errors outside of the frame S...

Page 378: ...ad Frame Rate f s The SCSI write frame rate per second as reported in the last data point received for the flow Write Frame Rate f s The SCSI write frame rate per second as reported in the last data p...

Page 379: ...ported in the last data point received for the flow Mirrored Rx Frames frames The mirrored received frame count as reported in the last data point received for the flow Top or bottom product performan...

Page 380: ...tact A contact name for the product Refreshed The time of the last update for the monitor To configure a product performance monitor refer to Configuring a user defined product performance monitor on...

Page 381: ...rcentage bar of the selected measure Depending on the selected measure both the error rate per second and error count may display For selected measures more than one Measure_Type may display for examp...

Page 382: ...user defined monitor title Number of Products Ports y axis The y axis always displays a numbered range zero to the maximum number of objects for the products or ports affected by the selected measure...

Page 383: ...n Data Details dialog box for more information refer to Viewing product distribution data details on page 339 or Viewing port distribution data details on page 340 TABLE 29 Port measures types Common...

Page 384: ...is The line color and the associated data that each line represents Network Scope The network scope such as Local or Published Displays Local if you select the targets when creating the monitor Displa...

Page 385: ...number products affected by the selected measure Distribution Select to monitor the selected measure for five defined distribution percentages Time Series Select to monitor a selected measure for a r...

Page 386: ...lor based on hue saturation and brightness click the HSV tab Specify the hue 0 through 360 degrees saturation 0 through 100 value 0 through 100 and transparency 0 through 100 To specify a color based...

Page 387: ...e Performance tab 3 Click Add The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays 4 Select Time Series from the Monitor Type Product or Port area 5 Select the port measure for the monitor in the...

Page 388: ...omize Dashboard icon The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays 2 Click the Performance tab 3 Click Add The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays 4 Select the type of monitor you are...

Page 389: ...eshold colors Top N and Bottom N monitors only The decreasing order defaults are as follows 90 and above displays red 75 and above displays orange 60 and above displays yellow and all others display b...

Page 390: ...gh 255 To reset to the default color click Reset 9 Time series monitors only Add targets for the monitor by clicking Add and completing the steps in Adding targets to a user defined performance monito...

Page 391: ...tilization Percentage The CPU utilization percentage for the product Temperature The temperature in Celsius for the product Fan Speed The fan speed in RPM for the product Response Time The response ti...

Page 392: ...number of link resets Signal Losses The number of signal failures Sync Losses The number of synchronization failures Link Failures The number of link failures Sequence Errors The number of sequence er...

Page 393: ...starts Current Compression Ratio The current compression ratio for the FCIP tunnel IP Errors The number of errors Discards The number of discarded frames Receive EOF The number of end of frames receiv...

Page 394: ...igured performance graph on the dashboard Traffic flow measures You can use the following measures to create your traffic flow monitors SCSI Read Frame Count frames The SCSI read command frame count a...

Page 395: ...The received word count in bytes as reported in the last data point received for the flow Transmit Throughput Mbps The transmit throughput in megabytes per second as reported by the last data point Re...

Page 396: ...he following data Monitor title The user defined monitor title Value y axis The number of objects affected by the selected measure Time x axis The time the monitor collected the data Legend below the...

Page 397: ...For a list of selected measures refer to Traffic flow measures on page 342 By default flows display sorted by the Measure_Type value top flows sort from highest to lowest and bottom flows sort lowest...

Page 398: ...flow performance monitor The time series traffic flow performance monitors display Figure 149 the selected measure in a chart FIGURE 149 Traffic flow performance monitor example The time series traff...

Page 399: ...The new performance monitor displays at the bottom of the Performance Monitors list 7 Select the Display check box for the new monitor 8 Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box Configuring a us...

Page 400: ...e 60 and above displays yellow and all others display blue The maximum values allowed are 32 768 through 32 767 for SFP power and 0 through 32 767 for all other measures a Top N and Bottom N monitors...

Page 401: ...1 Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box The new performance monitors display at the bottom of the dashboard Adding targets to a traffic flow performance monitor You can only add targets for T...

Page 402: ...rgets from the monitor by selecting one or more targets in the Selected Flow list and clicking the left arrow button 9 Click OK on the Performance Dashboard Monitor Targets dialog box The targets disp...

Page 403: ...iew Management In this chapter SAN tab overview 352 Master Log 359 Minimap 361 Status bar 362 Icon legend 363 Customizing the main window 368 Product List customization 373 Search 374 SAN view managem...

Page 404: ...perform on the SAN tab Some menu items display as disabled unless you select the correct object from the product list or topology map For a list of the many functions available on each menu refer to...

Page 405: ...Utilization icon on the toolbar For more information refer to Utilization Legend on page 358 12 Minimap Displays a bird s eye view of the entire topology Does not display until you discover a fabric F...

Page 406: ...refer to Search on page 374 16 Help Displays the Online Help View All list The View All list is located at the top left side of the window and enables you to create copy or edit a view select how to v...

Page 407: ...Show Hide Attached Port Displays or hides the attached ports of the target devices 3 Show Hide Unoccupied Port Displays or hides the ports of the devices shown in the connectivity map that are not co...

Page 408: ...Displays all discovered fabrics groups devices and ports as both text and icons Also displays the status of the fabrics groups devices and ports For a list of icons that display in the All Levels colu...

Page 409: ...functions Customize Customize the Product list For more information refer to Product List customization on page 373 Sort Click a column head to sort the list Click a column head again to reverse the...

Page 410: ...ct List and vice versa Device double click Double click a device to launch Web Tools for the selected device Zoom In Zoom Out Click the appropriate button to zoom in or out on the Topology Map Tool ti...

Page 411: ...and in Changing the order of columns You can sort the Master Log by clicking a column heading By default the Master Log is sorted by the Last Event Server Time column To filter information in the Mas...

Page 412: ...odule on which the event occurred Message ID The message ID of the event Product Address The IP address of the product on which the event originated Contributor The name of the contributor on which th...

Page 413: ...or float the Minimap to customize your main window To float the Minimap and view it in a separate window click the Detach icon in the upper right corner of the Minimap To anchor the Minimap and return...

Page 414: ...n Waiting for next backup to start Backup Disabled icon Backup is disabled Backup Failed icon Backup failed at hh mm ss mm dd yyyy 4 Network Size Status Displays a memory allocation status icon which...

Page 415: ...splays the number of clients logged into the server Click to launch the Active Sessions dialog box For more information refer to Viewing active sessions on page 10 13 User s ID Displays the user ID of...

Page 416: ...with blue icons Unmanageable devices display with gray icons Some of the icons shown only display when certain features are licensed VC module Multi fabric VC module iSCSI Target iSCSI Initiator TABLE...

Page 417: ...oup icons that display on the topology Host group icons The following table lists the manageable Host product group icons that display on the topology TABLE 33 Icon Description Icon Description Switch...

Page 418: ...e topology TABLE 35 Icon Description Occupied FC Port Unoccupied FC Port Attached FC Port Trunk port group IP and 10 GE Port Attached IP and 10 GE Port Attached to Cloud 10 GE Port Virtual Port Virtua...

Page 419: ...g table lists the event icons that display on the topology and Master Log For more information about events refer to Fault Management on page 1255 Unknown Link Down Unreachable TABLE 37 Event Icon Des...

Page 420: ...Click the zoom in icon on the Connectivity Map toolbar Press CTRL and the plus sign on the number pad on the keyboard Use the Zoom dialog box a Select View Zoom The Zoom dialog box displays FIGURE 158...

Page 421: ...toolbar The Export Topology To PNG File dialog box displays 2 Browse to the directory where you want to export the image 3 Edit the name in the File Name field if necessary 4 Click Save If the file na...

Page 422: ...where in the table and select Customize or Table Customize The Customize Columns dialog box displays FIGURE 159 Customize Columns dialog box 2 Choose from the following options Select the check box to...

Page 423: ...to Fit or Table Size Column to Fit To resize all columns in the table right click anywhere in the table and select Size All Columns to Fit or Table Size All Columns to Fit Sorting table information To...

Page 424: ...r information in a table You can search for information in the table by any of the values found in the table 1 Right click anywhere in the table and select Table Search The focus moves to the Search f...

Page 425: ...boxes and the Product List Property fields containing a green triangle in the lower right corner are editable To edit a field with a green triangle click in the field and make your changes Adding a pr...

Page 426: ...that you created on the Product List To delete a label complete the following steps 1 Right click the user defined column heading on the Product List you want to delete and select Delete Column 2 Clic...

Page 427: ...Manage View Display View View_Name with the appropriate options of port display View Port Display Display_Option and connected end devices View Port Display Show All enabled NOTE Search does not sear...

Page 428: ...is case sensitive For example you can enter the first five characters in a device name All products in the Product List that contain the search text display highlighted Regular Expression Enter a Unic...

Page 429: ...cific information about those fabrics or devices If you discover or import a network with more than approximately 2 000 devices the devices display on the Product List but not on the Topology Map Inst...

Page 430: ...the Available Fabrics table select the fabrics you want to include in the view and click the right arrow button to move your selections to the Selected Fabrics and Hosts table The Available Fabrics t...

Page 431: ...ype host or fabric number of products in the selected host or fabric 8 Click OK to save the customized view and close the Create View dialog box The new view displays automatically in the main window...

Page 432: ...o select multiple sequential rows press SHIFT and click on a sequence of rows 6 To remove fabrics and hosts from a view select the fabrics and hosts you want to remove in the Selected Fabrics and Host...

Page 433: ...lank it may be because all fabrics have been selected and are displayed in the Selected Fabrics and Hosts table To select more than one row press CTRL and click individual rows To select multiple sequ...

Page 434: ...attached port numbers in decimal format Hex Select to display all domain IDs and user and attached port numbers in hex format Product Label Select to configure which product labels display NOTE Change...

Page 435: ...and manage its devices Group types include Fabric Host Storage Router and Switch groups 1 Right click a group or the Connectivity Map and select Map Display The Map Display Properties dialog box displ...

Page 436: ...ge the way inter device connections display on the topology 1 Right click a group or the Connectivity Map and select Map Display The Map Display Properties dialog box displays 2 Select one of the foll...

Page 437: ...k the RGB tab Specify the values for red 0 to 255 green 0 to 255 blue 0 to 255 and alpha 0 to 255 or enter a color code in the Color Code field To specify a color based on values of cyan magenta yello...

Page 438: ...label Port WWN Displays the port world wide name as the port label User Port Displays the user s port number as the port label Zone Alias Displays the zone alias as the port label All port labels with...

Page 439: ...apse from the shortcut menu To collapse all groups on the topology by one level click the Collapse button on the Connectivity Map toolbar Expanding groups To expand a group on the topology do one of t...

Page 440: ...tion list 4 Click the right arrow button to move the zones to the Selected Zones list 5 Click Save The Save Application dialog box displays 6 Enter a new name in the Application Name field 7 Click OK...

Page 441: ...e center 403 Viewing Call Home status 404 Assigning a device to the Call Home center 405 Removing a device from a Call Home center 405 Removing all devices and filters from a Call Home center 405 Defi...

Page 442: ...nd UNIX Oracle E mail Windows and UNIX When configuring modem and HP LAN Call Home centers you must enter the customer contact information in the device s Element Manager You may also need to configur...

Page 443: ...phone number or e mail a specific recipient Enable and disable individual devices from contacting the assigned Call Home centers Show or hide Call Home centers on the display Enable and disable Call...

Page 444: ...ted product from the selected Call Home center refer to Removing a device from a Call Home center on page 405 Disabled when no product or Call Home center is selected in the Call Home Centers list Cal...

Page 445: ...t Fabric Name The name of the fabric Vendor The vendor of the product Call Home Status One of the following Call Home statuses for the product Enabled The product is manageable and Call Home is enable...

Page 446: ...all Home center 4 Click OK on the Centers dialog box The Call Home dialog box displays with the selected Call Home centers listed in the Call Home Centers list Hiding a Call Home center NOTE Before yo...

Page 447: ...Call Home Centers list 3 Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers list The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays Figure 170 FIGURE 170 Configure Call Home Center dialog box IBM optio...

Page 448: ...cted Call Home center must be enabled to test the phone number A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center You must contact the Call Home center to verify that the event was r...

Page 449: ...eck box to enable secure communication between the SMTP server and the Management application 12 Enter the port number of the server in the SMTP Server Settings Port field The default is 465 if SMTP o...

Page 450: ...the Call Home dialog box Call Home alert e mail messages When an event triggers a Call Home alert an e mail message is sent to the selected Call Home center The e mail message includes the following...

Page 451: ...Reason Event Details about the triggered event Includes the following data Event Time Event Severity Event Reason Code FRU Code Event Type Event Description Event Data Information about the triggered...

Page 452: ...Call Home center 6 Set the time interval at which to check the Call Home center by selecting the Set heartbeat interval at ___ days 1 28 check box and entering the interval in the field 7 Enter the pa...

Page 453: ...t the HP LAN Call Home center you want to edit in the Call Home Centers list 3 Click Edit Centers beneath the Call Home Centers list The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays Figure 173 FIGUR...

Page 454: ...a Call Home center complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Event Notification Call Home The Call Home dialog box displays 2 Select the Enable check box of the Call Home center you want to enabl...

Page 455: ...the correct format 6 Click OK to close the Test Event Sent message 7 Click OK to close the Configure Call Home Center dialog box 8 Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box Disabling a Call Home cent...

Page 456: ...the device The possible status options include Enabled The device is manageable Call Home is enabled and a filter is applied Disabled Call Home is disabled on at least one device or Call Home is disa...

Page 457: ...nter Devices assigned to a Call Home center do not display in the Products List 5 Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box Removing a device from a Call Home center To remove a device or multiple de...

Page 458: ...ll to select all event types in the list or select Unselect All to clear the selected event types in the list For more information about Call Home events refer to Appendix B Call Home Event Tables The...

Page 459: ...elect Monitor Event Notification Call Home The Call Home dialog box displays 2 Select the event filters you want to assign in the Call Home Event Filters list 3 Select the Call Home centers to which y...

Page 460: ...nt filter in the Call Home Centers list 4 Click the right arrow button For existing event filters a confirmation messages displays 5 Click Yes The selected event filter is applied to the selected devi...

Page 461: ...ilter you want to remove in the Call Home Event Filters list 3 Click Remove If the event filter is not assigned to any devices a confirmation message displays asking if you want to remove the event fi...

Page 462: ...410 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Searching for an assigned event filter 9...

Page 463: ...ption from the Tools menu 420 Changing an option on a device s shortcut menu 422 Removing an option from a device s shortcut menu 423 Microsoft System Center Operations Manager SCOM plug in 423 About...

Page 464: ...d application you must enter the IP address of the applications server as a parameter to be able to open the application For step by step instructions about entering the IP address of the server refer...

Page 465: ...ou can open a device s Element Manager directly from the application To launch a device s Element Manager complete the following steps On the Connectivity Map double click the device you want to manag...

Page 466: ...Connectivity Map double click the Fabric OS device you want to manage Web Tools displays OR On the Connectivity Map right click the Fabric OS device you want to manage and select Element Manager Hard...

Page 467: ...vileges on page 1451 On the Connectivity Map right click the Fabric OS device you want to configure and select Element Manager Router Admin OR 1 Select a Fabric OS device 2 Select Configure Element Ma...

Page 468: ...tion for the specific device To launch a Fabric OS HBA s Element Manager complete the following steps NOTE You must have Element Manager Product Administration privileges for the selected device to la...

Page 469: ...ch If you do not have Fabric Watch privileges you will need to enter those credentials to launch Fabric Watch For more information about privileges refer to User Privileges on page 1451 NOTE You must...

Page 470: ...he Tools menu refer to Adding an option to the Tools menu on page 419 9 Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box Entering the server IP address of a tool If the third party tool...

Page 471: ...dialog box displays 2 Click the Tools Menu tab The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools including the tool name as it displays on the Tools menu parameters and keystroke shortcuts Figu...

Page 472: ...Tools menu parameters and keystroke shortcuts 3 Select the tool you want to edit in the Tool Menu Items table The settings for the selected tool display in the fields at the top of the dialog box 4 E...

Page 473: ...n To display the menu option on the shortcut menus for all devices select the All option If you select All skip to step 8 Otherwise continue to step 5 5 Select the appropriate type in the Condition 1...

Page 474: ...oose one of the following options To display the menu option only for devices that meet the conditions listed select the Match Conditions option To display the menu option on the shortcut menus for al...

Page 475: ...Setup Tools dialog box Microsoft System Center Operations Manager SCOM plug in NOTE The System Center Operations Manager SCOM plug in is only supported on Windows NOTE The SCOM plug in is only availab...

Page 476: ...able SSL on the Management_Application_Name to use HTTPS Communication between SCOM Console and the Management application Make sure that the fabric or switch is managed by the the Management applicat...

Page 477: ...ck Edit The Edit SCOM Server dialog box displays The Host field is not editable in the Edit SCOM Server dialog box 3 Edit the domain name in the Domain field 4 Enter your user ID and password 5 Click...

Page 478: ...426 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Microsoft System Center Operations Manager SCOM plug in 10...

Page 479: ...ment application server or web server port number From the AAA Settings tab Enterprise Licensed version only you can configure an authentication server LDAP or Radius server and establish authenticati...

Page 480: ...he following at the command line smc OR sh smc Services tab You must be logged in at the administrator Windows systems or root UNIX systems level to stop start and restart the Management application s...

Page 481: ...ollowing steps 1 Launch the Server Management Console 2 Click the Services tab 3 Click Refresh to update the table with the latest status of the services in case the services were stopped or restarted...

Page 482: ...Management Console Restarting all services To stop and restart all services complete the following steps 1 Launch the Server Management Console 2 Click the Services tab 3 Click Restart to stop then r...

Page 483: ...wing server port numbers To view the Management application server or web server port number complete the following steps 1 Choose one of the following options For Windows systems open the Server Mana...

Page 484: ...nt users and dictionary on the Radius server Make sure that the external server and its user accounts have been properly configured For example you must define roles and areas of responsibility AOR in...

Page 485: ...ry authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary Authentication list Local Database None 8 Set the fall back condition to secondary authentication by selecting one of the...

Page 486: ...ecret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Secret fields 6 Enter the timeout timer value in seconds that specifies the amount of time to wait between retries when the server is busy in the Timeout Sec fie...

Page 487: ...tion make the following preparations first Make sure that the LDAP server you want to use is on the network that the Management application manages Have the IP address of the server available Know the...

Page 488: ...add any number of LDAP servers to the configuration 4 Rearrange the LDAP servers in the table by selecting a server and clicking the Up or Down button to move it 5 Delete a LDAP server by selecting th...

Page 489: ...this user already exists in the local database the roles and AORs are overwritten with the new roles and AORs configured in the LDAP Server LDAP Authorization Use to assign roles and AORs to user gro...

Page 490: ...wait between retries when the server is busy in the Timeout Sec field Default is 3 seconds 8 Enter the number of attempts to be made to reach a server before assuming it is unreachable in the Attempts...

Page 491: ...lication server 8 Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary Authentication list Local Database None 9 Set the fall back condition to secondary authentic...

Page 492: ...Enter the shared secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Secret fields 5 Enter the timeout timer value in seconds that specifies the amount of time to wait between retries when the server is busy in t...

Page 493: ...d of the Management application service account configured on the AD server to which the client is connected It is recommended that you create and use the following name for this account NetworkMangem...

Page 494: ...e following syntax Service_Name Hostname where hostname is the Management application server s host name with domain name For example NetworkManagementSPN DCM VNext 65 JCB COM 7 Test the established a...

Page 495: ...econdary Authentication list Local Database None 8 Click Test The Test Authentication dialog box displays 9 Enter your user ID and password and click Test Test verifies your user ID and password on th...

Page 496: ...lication server 3 Click Apply to save the configuration To display the authentication audit trail refer to Displaying the client authentication audit trail on page 445 4 Click Close to close the Serve...

Page 497: ...es tab to view the previous authentication changes Radius server configuration NOTE You must configure an Radius server as the primary authentication server refer to Configuring Radius server authenti...

Page 498: ...llowing AORs separated by commas All Fabrics or All Hosts For example jsmith User Password password NM Roles AORs List nmRoles Host Administrator Network Administrator Operator Report User Group SAN S...

Page 499: ...sers contacts computers and other AD groups by assigning roles and AORs to groups in the Management application LDAP provides user authentication and authorization using the AD service in conjunction...

Page 500: ...example on Windows 2008 R2 select Start Administrative Tools Active Directory Users and Computers The Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box displays 2 Right click the user in the Users pane...

Page 501: ...he Unique x500 Object ID field d Enter a description of the attribute in the Description field e Select Case Insensitive String in the Syntax list f Click OK 10 Right click the Attributes folder Conso...

Page 502: ...ap in dialog box The Active Directory Schema displays in the Add Remove Snap in dialog box 9 Click OK on the Add Remove Snap in dialog box 10 Save this schema by selecting File Save As 11 Browse to th...

Page 503: ...complete the following steps 1 Select Server Users The Users dialog box displays 2 Click the Authentication Server Groups tab 3 Select the roles and AORs you want to assign to the AD group in the Ava...

Page 504: ...Group dialog box displays FIGURE 184 Fetch AD Group dialog box 4 Select the LDAP server network address from the Network Address list 5 Enter the TCP port number in the TCP Port field if necessary Th...

Page 505: ...up on page 451 or Removing roles and AORs from an AD group on page 451 12 Click Close to close the Users dialog box Deleting an AD group Deleting an AD group deletes the roles and AORs assigned to the...

Page 506: ...on page 75 NOTE You cannot restore data from a previous version of the Management application NOTE You cannot restore data from a higher or lower configuration Trial or Licensed version of the Manage...

Page 507: ...tches in discovered fabrics This information is saved in a zip file in a location that you specify Capturing technical support information To capture technical support information complete the followi...

Page 508: ...e default name of the Server Support Save is DCM SS Time_Stamp NOTE For Linux systems you cannot have blank spaces in the output path target directory If the output path contains blank spaces the supp...

Page 509: ...ion for Client CIMMOM server and Indication using a secure protocol CIMOM tab enables you to configure the CIMOM server port the CIMOM Bind Network Address and the CIMOM log Certificate Management tab...

Page 510: ...ion Tool dialog box displays FIGURE 189 SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box Launching the SMIA configuration tool on Unix NOTE All Management application services must be running before you can log int...

Page 511: ...field for LDAP server authentication 4 Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the application to remember your password the next time you log in 5 Click Login The SMIA...

Page 512: ...he Management application SMI Agent accepts WBEM requests over HTTP without SSL on TCP port 5988 accepts WBEM requests over HTTPS using SSL on TCP port 5989 slptool commands Use the following slptool...

Page 513: ...ion SNIA FC HBA DMTF LaunchInContext SNIA Fan SNIA Fabric SNIA Switch DMTF Role Based Authorization SNIA Power Supply SNIA Sensors SNIA Server slptool findattrs service wbem http IP_Address Port NOTE...

Page 514: ...me cimom bin slptool findsrvs service wbem and press Enter to verify the SLP service is advertising its WBEM services 5 Choose one of the following options to verify the SLP service is advertising the...

Page 515: ...the SMIA Configuration Tool enables you to access the following Management application features or information Fabric Discovery enables you to view discovered fabrics discover new fabrics as well as...

Page 516: ...e 1451 The Authentication tab enables you to configure mutual authentication for Client and Indication using a secure protocol Enabling or disabling CIM client and indication mutual authentication Whe...

Page 517: ...entication is disabled 3 Select the Enable Indication Mutual Authentication check box as needed If the check box is checked indication mutual authentication is enabled If the check box is clear defaul...

Page 518: ...ollowing options Select No Authentication to allow the CIM client to query the CIMOM server without providing credentials however note that the CIMOM server requires the Management application credent...

Page 519: ...Configuring the SMI Agent port number To configure the SMI Agent port number complete the following steps 1 Click the CIMOM tab FIGURE 191 CIMOM tab 2 Select or clear the Enable SSL check box to enab...

Page 520: ...SAN SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes on the CIMOM tab For more information about privileges refer to User Privileges on page 1451 To configure the network bind address...

Page 521: ...only log support data that indicates a potential problem Info default select to only log support data for informational messages Config select to only log support data for static configuration messag...

Page 522: ...ate Viewing a certificate Exporting a certificate Deleting a certificate Importing a certificate To import a certificate complete the following steps 1 Click the Certificate Management tab FIGURE 192...

Page 523: ...t Client or Indication from the Authentication list The appropriate certificates display in the Certificates list 2 Select the certificate you want to view in the Certificates list The certificate det...

Page 524: ...u want to delete in the Certificates list 4 Click Delete 5 Click Yes on the confirmation message The selected certificate is removed from the Certificates list 6 Click Close to close the SMIA Configur...

Page 525: ...the indication mutual authentication is enabled or disabled for the Server Configuration and the Current Configuration CIMOM Server Authentication Displays whether or not the CIMOM server authenticat...

Page 526: ...Configuration and the Current Configuration Options include the following 10000 Off 1000 Severe 900 Warning 800 Info default 700 Config 500 Fine 400 Finer 300 Finest 0 All Managed Ports Displays the...

Page 527: ...prise Edition Trial and Licensed version Configuration files are stored in an Postgress database on the Management application server You can save entire configurations of switch configuration files a...

Page 528: ...switch configurations to the repository 1 Select Configure Configuration File Backup Now The Save Switch Configurations dialog box displays FIGURE 194 Save Switch Configurations dialog box 2 Select t...

Page 529: ...backup configuration on events complete the following steps 1 Click the SAN tab 2 Select Configure Configuration File Configuration File Manager The Configuration File Manager dialog box displays 3 Cl...

Page 530: ...d Switch Configurations table 3 Click OK The configuration is downloaded to the device If necessary the restoration process prompts you to disable and reboot the device before the configuration begins...

Page 531: ...f fabrics to be backed up NOTE If a backup is scheduled for more than one fabric and some of the fabrics contain common members the backup will include the unique switch configuration values obtained...

Page 532: ...and select the specific fabric Backup check boxes in the Selected Fabrics table to back up individual fabrics The Selected Fabrics table includes the following information Fabric Name The world wide n...

Page 533: ...vailable in Other Configurations Imported Displays the user imported configurations Unmanaged Unmonitored Switch Configurations Displays the configurations with deleted and unmonitored switches Config...

Page 534: ...onfiguration To restore a configuration refer to Restoring a configuration from the repository on page 483 View button Select a row in the Configurations table and click to display the contents of the...

Page 535: ...rations dialog box The Saved Switch Configurations table displays the following information Keep check box Select to keep the associated configuration past the defined age limit The configuration will...

Page 536: ...load for specific configuration sections You can also perform the following functions from the Configuration File Manager dialog box Comparing switch configurations on page 488 Viewing configuration f...

Page 537: ...nager The Configuration File Manager dialog box displays 2 Click the Switch Configuration tab The default product is selected in the Connectivity Map or Product List or select the switch or fabric fro...

Page 538: ...gurations and the latest configurations will not be deleted 1 Right click a device in the Product List or the Connectivity Map and select Configuration File Configuration File Manager The Configuratio...

Page 539: ...which you want to export the configuration 4 Click Export The configuration is automatically named cfg_Switch_name_Date_and_Time and exported to the location you selected Importing a configuration NO...

Page 540: ...he SAN tab 2 Select Configure Configuration Configuration File Manager The Configuration File Manager dialog box displays 3 Click the Switch Configurations tab 4 Select a switch to view the configurat...

Page 541: ...atch Case check box Click to render the search case sensitive Repeats check box Click to continue the search at the top when the bottom is reached Whole Words check box Click to continue the search Di...

Page 542: ...is cleared to enable the age limit again The file marked as Baseline will be marked as Keep 3 Click Apply to save changes Tracking changes from the baseline configuration Use change tracking to compa...

Page 543: ...change status of the latest device backup Backup Type Backup options include the following types Discovery The discovery backup is obtained after the discovery process Event Triggered Occurs when a tr...

Page 544: ...fer to Table 43 on page 494 Validation which lists the configuration settings that you can validate before you replicate For more information about the fields and components of this step refer to Tabl...

Page 545: ...ociated with the selected available switch Name The name of the source switch to be replicated Configuration Type The type of configuration IP Address The IP address of the source switch to be replica...

Page 546: ...x or selecting the file using the Browse button TABLE 43 Step 5 Destination Switches Field Component Description Available Switches table Lists the available switches you can select to be applied to t...

Page 547: ...es Switch Name The name of the switch selected to be the destination switch IP The IP address of the switch selected to be the destination switch WWN The world wide name of the switch selected to be t...

Page 548: ...e configuration settings that you can validate before you replicate For more information about the fields and components of this step refer to Table 49 on page 498 Summary which lists the replication...

Page 549: ...ion Contact The primary contact at the customer site Description A description of the customer site State The port state for example online or offline Status The operational status of the port for exa...

Page 550: ...Right and left arrow buttons Click to move the switches back and forth between the Available Switches table and the Selected Switches table Selected Switches table Lists the switches selected as the d...

Page 551: ...rmware download HCL is not supported when downgrading from Fabric OS version 7 0 to 6 4 You must remove all non default logical switches and disable Virtual Fabrics before downgrading NOTE Firmware do...

Page 552: ...e your FTP SCP or SFTP server configured to use the built in FTP SCP or SFTP server select a specific version from the Firmware to Download column or use Select Latest to automatically select the late...

Page 553: ...field A confirmation message displays Click Yes on the confirmation message This field does not display if the external server is installed on the same machine as the Management application and occup...

Page 554: ...ed on the same platform as the Management application software 1 Select Configure Firmware Management The Firmware Management dialog box displays 2 Select the Repository tab Figure 228 Initially the r...

Page 555: ...fer to Deleting a firmware file on page 504 6 Click Close to close the Firmware Management dialog box Importing a firmware file You can import firmware files release notes and MD5 checksum files into...

Page 556: ...firmware file twice first when the firmware is downloaded to the client and again when the file is copied from the client to the server s repository If you configure the Management application to enfo...

Page 557: ...sword is mandatory NOTE If you change the switch password for one Fabric ID FID user name the switch password changes for all FIDs that have the same user name NOTE You should change the switch passwo...

Page 558: ...ord for unmanaged switches 3 Click the right arrow to move the selected switches to the Selected Switches table If you select an unmanaged switch an error messages displays Click OK to close the error...

Page 559: ...e the following steps 1 Select Configure Switch Password The Manage Switch Password dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 206 2 Select the switches for which you want to reset the password from t...

Page 560: ...eset Password Summary dialog box displays Frame viewer NOTE Frame viewer is only supported on devices running Fabric OS 7 1 0 or later Frame viewer enables you to view a list of devices with discarded...

Page 561: ...e frames stored for any 1 second timestamp is 20 Date Time Timestamp when the frames were discarded Type Type of discard Valid values include timeout destination unreachable and unroutable Tx Port Egr...

Page 562: ...view the data for the discarded frames from the selected port Discarded Frame History for the Selected Product table Summary of the discarded frames for the selected port Count Number of discarded fra...

Page 563: ...log records are not stored in the database Add Flow button Select a device in the upper table and click to add a flow definition refer to Provisioning flows on page 1816 NOTE Flow Vision is supported...

Page 564: ...ort Connectivity The Port Connectivity View dialog box displays Figure 211 FIGURE 211 Port Connectivity View dialog box The following details the information located in default order on the Port Conne...

Page 565: ...al and Unmonitored Status The port s status for example Enabled Faulty Healthy Unknown and so on Switch Port Type The port type for example E Port F Port U port and so on Speed The current port speed...

Page 566: ...itch Role The role of the switch for example subordinate Switch FCS Role Whether the Fabric Configuration Server FCS which is the primary point of control that manages all the switches within a fabric...

Page 567: ...e Port Connectivity View dialog box opened click Refresh Enabling a port To enable a port from the port connectivity view right click the port you want to enable from the Port Connectivity View dialog...

Page 568: ...filter requirements display To enable the filter select the Filter check box Resetting the filter Reset immediately clears all existing definitions You cannot cancel the reset To reset the Filter dial...

Page 569: ...t of fields on the Port Details dialog box refer to Viewing port properties on page 1482 3 Sort the results by clicking on the column header 4 Rearrange the columns by dragging and dropping the column...

Page 570: ...g port connection properties You can view the information about products and ports on both sides of the connection 1 Right click the connection between two end devices on the Connectivity Map and sele...

Page 571: ...le One row for each circuit Status Whether the connection is Active or Missing 1 Port The port number of the first switch 1 Port Type The port type of the first switch 1 WWPN The world wide port numbe...

Page 572: ...tual km The actual distance in km for end port connectivity Distance Estimated km The estimated distance in km for end port connectivity ED TOV The Error Detect timeout value in milliseconds of the co...

Page 573: ...rce allocation time out value in milliseconds of the connected switch This variable works with the E D TOV variable to determine switch actions when presented with an error condition Sequence The sequ...

Page 574: ...a port is online or offline by looking at the Connectivity Map or the Product List To determine a port s status on the Connectivity Map right click on the product whose ports you want to view and sele...

Page 575: ...Transceiver Temp C and Voltage mVolts Status icons Warning icon One of the five parameters exceeds the threshold of that parameter The corresponding parameter field displays with a yellow background N...

Page 576: ...es 4 Sort the results by clicking on the column header 5 Rearrange the columns by dragging and dropping the column header 6 Click Close to close the Port Optics SFP dialog box Refreshing port optics T...

Page 577: ...nformation Model User s Guide version 1 release 13 part number SC33 7998 08 Make sure you have System Modification Program Extended SMP E Resource Access Control Facility RACF and UNIX systems service...

Page 578: ...loyment report on page 539 5 Recommission the F_Port For step by step instructions refer to Recommissioning an F Port on page 11 6 Review the recommission deployment report For step by step instructio...

Page 579: ...field The default namespace is root cimv2 6 Optional Enter a user identifier for the CIMOM server in the Credentials User ID field The credentials user identifier cannot be over 128 characters 7 Optio...

Page 580: ...nter a user identifier for the CIMOM server in the field The credentials user identifier cannot be over 128 characters Credentials Password Optional Enter a password in the field The password cannot b...

Page 581: ...o delete CIMOM servers refer to Deleting CIMOM server credentials on page 532 9 Click OK to close the Port Commissioning Setup dialog box Editing CIMOM server credentials 1 Select Configure Port Commi...

Page 582: ...d Password the Management application provides default values 3 Browse to the location of the file csv format and click Open The imported CIMOM servers display in the Systems List 4 Click OK to save y...

Page 583: ...OM server credentials on page 531 6 Click OK to close the Port Commissioning Setup dialog box Testing CIMOM server credentials You should validate the CIMOM server credentials before you decommission...

Page 584: ...d then select Configure Port Commissioning Decommission Recommission Port From the Product List right click the F_Port and select Decommission Recommission Port From the Topology right click the F_Por...

Page 585: ...instances 3 Click OK on the Port Commission Confirmation dialog box While decommissioning is in progress a down arrow icon displays next to the port icon in the Product List You can view the port comm...

Page 586: ...accept changes in the Management application client Select the E_Port in the Product List and then select Configure Port Commissioning Decommission Port While decommissioning is in progress a down arr...

Page 587: ...ommission Recommission All F Ports on the Switch From a Dashboard widget right click the switch and select Decommission Recommission All F Ports on the Switch Decommissioning all ports on a switch NOT...

Page 588: ...ng all ports on a switch Select the switch or logical switch for which you want to recommission all ports and then select Configure Port Commissioning Recommission All F Ports on the Switch NOTE You c...

Page 589: ...ication contacts all registered CIMOM servers within the fabric affected by the action and obtains the status from each CIMOM server If all CIMOM servers are reachable the Management application sends...

Page 590: ...icon displays next to the port icon in the Product List You can view the port commissioning results in the deployment reports refer to Viewing a port commissioning deployment report on page 539 When t...

Page 591: ...ble to the client CIM_ERR_INVALID_NAMESPACE The target namespace does not exist Viewing a port commissioning deployment report To access a port commissioning deployment report complete the following s...

Page 592: ...save the file and click Save E mailing a report You can e mail a report in a CSV comma separated values or HTML file Each report has an Email list at the top right corner of the page To export reports...

Page 593: ...LPAR IEE169I VARY REJECTED message If you receive the IEE169I VARY REJECTED PATH dddd xx OFFLINE DUE TO sss message on the z OS use the force option to vary the path online as the IBM message text in...

Page 594: ...dialog box 8 Click OK on the message A progress message displays with a list of the steps to be performed Capturing client support save Capturing logs and server data Capturing partial full database...

Page 595: ...nstructions for discovering AD enabled fabrics are detailed in Discovering fabrics on page 37 Management application behavior for AD enabled fabrics Note the following considerations and interactions...

Page 596: ...ontext ADO AD255 Not supported All AD User interface impact Allow Prohibit Matrix X Filters AD enabled fabric from the Fabrics list Cascaded FICON FICON Merge X Filters AD enabled fabric from the Fabr...

Page 597: ...able Disable Port Enable Disable X None Routing Configuration X Filters switches from an AD enabled fabric from the dialog box SMI Agent X None SNMP Informs X None Syslog Registration X None Technical...

Page 598: ...ny of the following five events occur Loss of Sync Loss of Signal OLS Offline Primitive Sequence NOS Not Operational Primitive Sequence LIP Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence For Fabric OS devices...

Page 599: ...icon for blocked FC ports displayed with the port icon Click the plus sign symbol to expand the view to display the ports Port Auto Disable Displays whether Port Auto Disable is currently enabled or...

Page 600: ...g events occur on the configured port Loss of Sync Loss of Signal OLS Offline Primitive Sequence NOS Not Operational Primitive Sequence LIP Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence To configure the PAD...

Page 601: ...ger PAD device must be running Fabric OS 7 0 or later refer to Configuring Port Auto Disable event triggers on page 548 6 Click OK on the Port Auto Disable dialog box Enabling Port Auto Disable on all...

Page 602: ...s on which you want to disable PAD Press CTRL and click to select multiple ports 5 Click Disable under Port PAD is disabled on the selected ports 6 Click OK on the Port Auto Disable dialog box Disabli...

Page 603: ...lick Disable under Switch PAD stops on all ports for the selected device 6 Click OK on the Port Auto Disable dialog box Resuming Port Auto Disable on a device NOTE Port Auto Disable requires devices r...

Page 604: ...o unblock ports complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Port Auto Disable The Port Auto Disable dialog box displays 2 Select the fabric on which you want to unblock ports from the Fabric list 3...

Page 605: ...SV to the Management application NOTE The Management application enables you to map HBAs from multiple fabrics previous versions limited HBA mapping to one fabric NOTE Converged Network Adapters CNAs...

Page 606: ...ble by clicking once on any of the column titles HBA The World Wide Name of the node Fabric Name The fabric name WWN The World Wide Name for the fabric Connected Switch The label of the connected devi...

Page 607: ...BA Host To delete a Host complete the following steps 1 Right click an HBA icon in the Fabric topology and select Host Port Mapping The Host Port Mapping dialog box displays 2 Select the Host you want...

Page 608: ...K to save your changes and close the Host Port Mapping dialog box If the HBA is part of more than one fabric a message displays The selected Host_Name Host_WWN is part of more than one fabric The port...

Page 609: ...lete a result summary displays with the information listed in Table 54 5 Click OK to close the Import Results dialog box 6 Click OK to close the Host Port Mapping dialog box TABLE 54 Import Results Va...

Page 610: ...d from the Host Click OK to close the message On the Connectivity Map the HBA displays on its own Exporting Host port mapping The Host Port Mapping dialog box enables you to export a Host port The exp...

Page 611: ...g 13 4 Browse to the location where you want to save the export file Depending on your operating system the default export location are as follows Desktop My documents Windows root Linux 5 Enter a nam...

Page 612: ...560 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Exporting Host port mapping 13...

Page 613: ...the system is unable to make The Management application allows you to create and assign properties to a Storage Device during the mapping process using the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Once a Stora...

Page 614: ...rray displays in the Storage Array list in edit mode 3 Rename the new storage array and press Enter 4 Add storage ports to the new storage array NOTE You must add at least one storage ports to the new...

Page 615: ...e other fabrics will automatically be removed from the storage array 3 Click the left arrow button The selected storage port is removed from the Storage Array list and added to the Storage Ports table...

Page 616: ...le in the lower right corner of the field 4 Click OK on the Properties dialog box to save the storage array properties 5 Click OK to save your work and close the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Deleti...

Page 617: ...es dialog box 6 Click OK on the Storage Port Mapping dialog box Importing storage port mapping The Storage Port Mapping dialog box enables you to import externally created storage port mapping informa...

Page 618: ...ave all current mappings when conflict occurs Click Cancel to cancel the import When import is complete a result summary displays with the following information Import Results on page 566 5 Click OK t...

Page 619: ...ay 20000037E19CED New Storage Array To export a storage port array complete the following steps 1 Select a storage port icon in the topology view then select Discover Storage Port Mapping The Storage...

Page 620: ...568 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Exporting storage port mapping 14...

Page 621: ...switches and fabrics of the SAN using the Management application Adapters and hosts are visible as part of the fabrics managed by the Management application The Management application integrates with...

Page 622: ...5 Dual port stand up HBA with a per port maximum of 8 Gbps using an 8 Gbps SFP 1 2 815 Single port stand up HBA with a maximum of 8 Gbps using an 8 Gbps SFP 1 1 8042 Dual port mezzanine HBA with a per...

Page 623: ...d up 1010 10 Gbps maximum 1 Stand up 10071 2 10 Gbps maximum 2 Expansion 1 The Brocade 1741M k and Brocade 1007 are two port 10 GbE CNAs that mount on a blade server that installs in a system enclosur...

Page 624: ...t ship from the factory with 10 GbE SFP transceivers installed or no SFP transceivers installed are configured for Ethernet mode by default Fabric Adapter ports set in NIC mode appear as Ethernet port...

Page 625: ...nly FCoE ports CNA only Ethernet ports CNA only Diagnostics which enables you to test the adapters and the devices to which they are connected Link status of each adapter and its attached devices Loop...

Page 626: ...hen you discover an adapter and ports using host discovery the adapter and all its ports are shown as physical Instructions for discovering hosts are detailed in Chapter 3 Discovery VM Manager A vCent...

Page 627: ...supported characters is 64 4 Enter the password into the Password field The maximum number of supported characters is 64 5 Enable or disable the vSphere client plug in registration If you enable this...

Page 628: ...s described above are part of the range of ports reserved for use by the Management application server configurable during installation from the Server Configuration wizard Refer to the Installation a...

Page 629: ...abric level views If you discover or import a fabric with more than approximately 2 000 devices the devices display on the Product List but not on the Connectivity Map Instead the topology area shows...

Page 630: ...ersion 3 0 3 1 or later The ability to update drivers to the hosts is available for hosts that are disovered through the Host Connectivity Manager HCM agent with driver version 2 3 0 0 or later Driver...

Page 631: ...rchitecture The host s architecture for example 32 bit or 64 bit Current Driver Version The host s current driver version Message Additional information pertaining to the selected host 4 Select the ho...

Page 632: ...a driver file from the repository 1 Select one or more driver files from the Available Driver Files list on the Driver Repository dialog box 2 Click Delete The driver file is removed from the Driver R...

Page 633: ...ns 1 From the Management application menu bar select Configure Host Adapter Software 2 Click the Boot Image tab The Boot Image Management dialog box shown in Figure 223 displays FIGURE 223 Boot Image...

Page 634: ...click the right arrow button to move the selected hosts to the Selected Hosts list You can select up to 50 hosts The first 20 hosts execute the download concurrently If you select more than 20 hosts t...

Page 635: ...box to create and assign port level configurations to either a single or multiple adapter ports at a time You can save up to 50 port level configurations The Management application supports the follo...

Page 636: ...nfiguring host adapter ports To create edit duplicate or delete port configurations complete the following steps Select Host Adapter Ports from the Configure menu The Configure Host Adapter Ports dial...

Page 637: ...ialog box 2 Enter a name for the port configuration in the Configuration Name field A maximum of 128 alphanumeric characters is supported 3 Configure at least one of the following port properties Port...

Page 638: ...es and the default value is 0 minutes The Bootup Delay feature allows you to configure the delay to device discovery offsetting the disk spinup delay time when servers and storage devices are powered...

Page 639: ...te indicated by Completed in the Progress list Editing a port configuration The Edit Port Configuration dialog box allows you to modify port configuration parameters that were configured using the Add...

Page 640: ...ent in the network Preconfigure boot LUN zoning You can configure Solaris ports or Linux ports on the switch enabling the server to boot automatically with the predefined boot LUNs NOTE Fabric Assigne...

Page 641: ...us dialog box Disabling the FAWWN feature on a switch or AG ports 1 Select Configure Fabric Assigned WWN or Right click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dia...

Page 642: ...FAWWN on a switch or AG port 1 Select Configure Fabric Assigned WWN or Right click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays 2 Select a switch po...

Page 643: ...The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays 2 Click the Attached AG Ports tab The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box Attached AG Ports tab displays FIGURE 228 Configure Fabric Assign...

Page 644: ...ned WWN Configuration AG Ports list Deleting AG port FAWWNs 1 Select Configure Fabric Assigned WWN or Right click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog bo...

Page 645: ...ons to the Host Adapter Management privilege Other HBA related operations are controlled by the following privileges The HBA technical support launch point is controlled by the Technical Support Data...

Page 646: ...t measures and CNA port measures The ports are properly filtered to display only the CNA or HBA port based on the selection Table 59 lists the counters that are supported for the FC ports and for the...

Page 647: ...r FC SP is not available for virtual ports or unmanaged HBA ports The user must have the Security privilege to use this feature FC SP is not supported for hosts connected to Access Gateway mode enable...

Page 648: ...hat verifies a message s integrity using Message Digest version 5 MD5 produces a 128 bit digest and is the required authentication mechanism for LDAP v3 servers SHA1 A secure hashing algorithm that co...

Page 649: ...wing methods Monitors logs for specified conditions and sends a notification or runs a script when the specified condition is met Creates event based policies which contain an event trigger and action...

Page 650: ...g the HCM Agent CIM events are only logged in the master log and the forwarding of CIM events is not supported Syslog forwarding is the process by which you can configure the Management application to...

Page 651: ...eck box to back up boot image files from the boot image repository Select the Include FTP Root directory check box If you select the FTP Root directory the FTP Root sub directories Technical Support a...

Page 652: ...alog box displays 2 Select Server Backup in the Category list 3 Select the Enable Backup check box 4 Click Apply or OK Disabling backup Backup is enabled by default If you want to stop the backup proc...

Page 653: ...650 FCoE overview Fibre Channel over Ethernet FCoE leverages Ethernet enhancements called Data Center Bridging DCB to transport encapsulated Fibre Channel frames over Ethernet Ethernet is the physica...

Page 654: ...able bandwidth that is not being used by higher priority traffic classes and maximizes the use of available bandwidth ETS allows configuration of bandwidth per priority group Priority group ID PG ID u...

Page 655: ...ic OS FCoE converged network adapter supports two layers of protocols Ethernet link layer and FCoE layer Ethernet link layer protocols supported The following protocols support the Ethernet link layer...

Page 656: ...llow FCoE bridging capabilities Saving running configurations The Save Running to Startup dialog box lists discovered DCB switches with Fabric OS version 6 3x firmware or later You can select availabl...

Page 657: ...must configure DCB interfaces and ports differently than you configure Fibre Channel ports to effectively use the converged network features For example priority based flow control PFC and Enhanced T...

Page 658: ...n DCB When you create a DCB map you specify the precedence priority and then you map the priority groups with the Class of Service CoS and apply bandwidth percentages Refer to QoS configuration on pag...

Page 659: ...reate the basic configuration of DCB for FCoE traffic NOTE This section is applicable for Fabric OS versions 6 3 0 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 4 1 and 6 4 2 This section is not applicable for Fabric OS versions 6 3...

Page 660: ...ll of the eight CoS values 0 7 must be used in a DCB map Duplicate CoS values in two or more priority groups are not allowed NOTE You can only edit CoS fields that are displayed with a green tick mark...

Page 661: ...o configure LLDP complete the following steps 1 Select Configure DCB The DCB Configuration dialog box displays 2 Select the switch to edit from the Product Ports list and click Edit The Edit Switch di...

Page 662: ...8 Select the DCB map you created in Creating a DCB map to carry the LAN and SAN traffic on page 607 from the Available DCB Maps list 9 Click the LLDP DCBX tab and select the Enable LLDP DCBX on Te Por...

Page 663: ...VLAN classifiers on the DCB interface NOTE You can complete this procedure using the Management application for Fabric OS versions 7 0 and later For Fabric OS versions earlier than Fabric OS 7 0 you...

Page 664: ...is disabled when multiple switches are selected ports from different switches are selected or LAGs are selected The Edit LAG button is enabled when a single LAG port or switch is selected NOTE When LL...

Page 665: ...ss mode allows only one VLAN and allows only untagged frames Trunk mode allows more than one VLAN association and allows tagged frames IP Netmask The netmask is used to divide an IP address into subne...

Page 666: ...fault is Dynamic Active but LAG members can be Active or Passive if the LAG member is Dynamic 7 When you have finished configuring the policies click OK The Deploy to LAGs dialog box displays 8 Click...

Page 667: ...nfiguration on page 632 802 1x authentication on page 636 5 When you have finished configuring the policies apply the settings to the switch NOTE Clicking Cancel when there are pending changes launche...

Page 668: ...d you can then assign the primary and secondary IP addresses L2 mode is enabled if you select L2 as the interface mode If a DCB port is enabled on the 10 Gbps DCB FC switch module the L2 mode is disab...

Page 669: ...deployment The Deployment Status dialog box launches 8 Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected port or ports 9 Click Close to close the Deployment Status di...

Page 670: ...IP address represents the network and which portion represents the host and can only be configured if the interface mode is L3 Primary and secondary IP address fields are applicable only to the extern...

Page 671: ...nable The Confirmation and Status dialog box launches with the selected ports or LAGs 4 Click Start on the Confirmation and Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected ports or LAGs The sele...

Page 672: ...c Class map is the mapping of user priority to traffic class Priority based flow control Priority based flow control PFC is an enhancement to the existing pause mechanism in Ethernet PFC creates eight...

Page 673: ...riority Group ID 15 0 15 7 and eight are user definable entries with a Priority Group ID of 0 7 Refer to Table 61 for an example of priority group configuration NOTE The 10 Gbps DCB FC switch module c...

Page 674: ...D 15 0 through 15 7 must equal 0 If you set a CoS value to one or more of the PG IDs 0 7 you must also enter a non zero bandwidth percentage The total bandwidth percentage must equal 100 For PG IDs 0...

Page 675: ...g a DCB map You cannot delete the DCB map of a 10 Gbps DCB FC switch module To delete the DCB map of an 8 Gbps DCB switch complete the following steps 1 Select Configure DCB The DCB Configuration dial...

Page 676: ...Map Type list 6 Select a DCB map in the Available DCB Maps list If no DCB maps were created on the switch the Available DCB Maps list is empty Otherwise the following DCB map details display PG ID Li...

Page 677: ...s values in the left pane The fields are now editable If the name of the Traffic Class map already exists an overwrite warning message displays Click Yes to overwrite the existing Traffic Class map 5...

Page 678: ...fic Class in the Map Type list 6 Select a Traffic Class map in the Traffic Class Map list 7 When you have finished the configuration click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports LAGs dialog box Refer to Swi...

Page 679: ...the FCoE map that will be available for assignment to ports on this switch This is a read only field VLAN ID Enter an FCoE VLAN identifier to associate with the FCoE map The values range from 2 throug...

Page 680: ...t least one of the priority group IDs 0 7 4 If enabled click the Enable FCoE check box to disable the port s membership on the FCoE map 5 When you have finished the configuration click OK to launch th...

Page 681: ...Edit 3 Click the VLAN Classifiers tab on the Edit Switch dialog box The Edit Switch dialog box VLAN Classifiers tab displays as shown in Figure 239 The Available Rules list contains the following inf...

Page 682: ...he Available Rules list on the VLAN Classifiers tab of the Edit Switch dialog box and close the Add Rules dialog box NOTE Clicking Apply also adds the rule to the Available Rules list on the VLAN Clas...

Page 683: ...classifier and form a VLAN classifier group If no rules are available you can add rules to a selected switch using the Add Rules dialog box 1 Select Configure DCB from the menu bar The DCB Configurat...

Page 684: ...articular features such as Priority based Flow Control PFC or Class of Service CoS In a Data Center Bridging DCB environment LLDP is enhanced with DCBX protocol to further share or change the configur...

Page 685: ...d functions 2 Select a switch and click Edit 3 Click the LLDP DCBX tab on the Edit Switch dialog box The LLDP DCBX dialog box displays 4 Click the Enable LLDP DCBX checkbox 5 Configure the LLDP Profil...

Page 686: ...he Deploy to Products dialog box Editing an LLDP profile 1 Select Configure DCB The DCB Configuration dialog box displays showing the status of all DCB related hardware and functions 2 Select a switch...

Page 687: ...l configuration parameters which is the default selection are displayed in the Assigned Profile table NOTE A yellow banner displayed on the LLDP DCBX dialog box indicates that LLDP DCBX is disabled on...

Page 688: ...bar The DCB Configuration dialog box displays showing the status of all DCB related hardware and functions 2 Select a switch and click Edit 3 Click the 802 1x tab on the Edit Switch dialog box 4 Click...

Page 689: ...E 242 802 1x dialog box 5 Configure the following 802 1x parameters Wait Period The number of seconds the switch waits before sending an EAP request The value range is 15 to 65535 seconds The default...

Page 690: ...lso allow you to commit the switch level configuration changes to one or more target switches NOTE Deployment from the Management application to a Network OS device is not supported Deploying DCB prod...

Page 691: ...Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 639 53 1003154 01 Switch port and LAG deployment 16 FIGURE 243 Deploy to Products dialog box FIGURE 244 Deploy to Ports dialog box...

Page 692: ...ng and startup Save to running and startup then reboot The name for the scheduled product deployment is pre populated with a DCB MM DD YYYY HR MIN SS prefix This is an editable field 6 Provide a descr...

Page 693: ...for restrictions For ports Port attributes interface mode etc QoS DCB Map Traffic Class Map FCoE Map LLDP Profiles 802 1x Configuration NOTE On the Deploy to Ports dialog box you can write port confi...

Page 694: ...lows Fabric OS Converged 10 Gbe switch module for IBM BladeCenter with Fabric OS 6 3 1_cee or Fabric OS 6 3 1_dcb Excludes Fabric OS DCB switch and FCOE10 24 DCB blade with Fabric OS 6 4 2 or earlier...

Page 695: ...ormance graph You can monitor a device s performance through a performance graph that displays transmit and receive data The graphs can be sorted by the column headers You can create multiple real tim...

Page 696: ...DCB Configuration dialog box and select Real Time Graph from the Performance list A message displays prompting you to close the DCB Configuration dialog box 3 Click OK to close the DCB Configuration d...

Page 697: ...ance dialog box The Historical Performance Graph dialog box displays For complete information about Real Time Performance Graphs refer to SAN real time performance data on page 1074 Historical perform...

Page 698: ...l FCoE port information NOTE FCoE Login Group is not available for Network OS DCB devices 1 Select Configure FCoE from the menu bar The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays all configured login grou...

Page 699: ...rom all discovered hosts Only directly connected devices are supported 1 Select Configure FCoE from the menu bar or Right click the DCB device and select FCoE 2 Click Add The Add Login Group dialog bo...

Page 700: ...carefully before you accept them 9 Click Start to apply the changes or click Close to abort the operation On closing the FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog box the FCoE Configuration Dia...

Page 701: ...re you accept them 7 Click Start to apply the changes or click Close to abort the operation On closing the FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog box the FCoE Configuration Dialog refreshes t...

Page 702: ...on The FCoE login management feature is enabled on the selected switch The value in the FCoE Login Management State column is Enabled after the FCoE Configuration dialog box refresh operation Virtual...

Page 703: ...click the DCB device and select FCoE The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays 2 Select the Virtual FCoE Ports tab The Virtual FCoE Ports tab displays as shown in Figure 252 FIGURE 252 Virtual FCoE P...

Page 704: ...Devices The Connected Devices dialog box displays 2 Select one or more rows from the Connected Devices table and click Disconnect The DCB Confirmation and Status dialog displays The selected connecte...

Page 705: ...he frame sequentially against each rule in the assigned ACL If the frame matches the permit rule the traffic is forwarded otherwise the traffic is dropped You should configure the ACL on the device be...

Page 706: ...Enter a name for the ACL in the Name field 5 Enter a sequence number for the ACL in the Sequence field 6 Select Permit or Deny from the Action list 7 In the Source list select one of the following op...

Page 707: ...tional ACL entries repeat step 3 4 To add a new ACL rule complete step 4 through step 9 in Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration Fabric OS on page 654 The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Ent...

Page 708: ...ries list and click the left arrow button 7 Click OK on the Duplicate Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box The new ACL configuration displays in the ACLs list To copy additional ACLs repeat step 2 thr...

Page 709: ...filtered allowed or denied for the ACL rule 10 Select the Ether Type check box to specify the Ethernet protocol 11 In the Ether Type list select one of the following to specify the Ethernet type bein...

Page 710: ...n existing ACL rule select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button 6 Click OK on the Edit Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box The updated ACL displays in the...

Page 711: ...Layer 2 ACL configuration to an interface Fabric OS To assign Layer 2 ACL configuration to a interface complete the following steps 1 Select Configure Security Layer 2 ACL Port The Port Selection Lay...

Page 712: ...owing convention Po LAG_Number 3 Click OK The Device_Name Port_Number LAG LAG_Number Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays 4 Select the Clear ACL Assignment option 5 Click OK on the Device_Nam...

Page 713: ...nfiguration to the switch The Deploy to Products Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays To save the configuration refer to Saving a security configuration deployment on page 664 Deleting a Layer 2 ACL config...

Page 714: ...Security Management enables you to configure persist and manage a security configuration as a deployment configuration object A deployment configuration object is comprised of the following parts Sec...

Page 715: ...t saved to the product s flash memory Save to running and startup Select to update the running configuration as well as save the deployment configuration to the product s flash memory Selecting this o...

Page 716: ...as well as save the deployment configuration to the product s flash memory Selecting this option is the equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI Save to running and startup then reboot...

Page 717: ...e list and click Edit The Edit Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays 3 Configure the Layer 2 ACL and click OK on the Add Edit Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box 4 Click OK on the Device_Name...

Page 718: ...e right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list 13 Click OK on the Deploy to Products Layer 2 ACL dialog box Configuring a one time deployment schedule To configure a one time schedule...

Page 719: ...day you want deployment to run from the Time hh mm lists Where the hour value is from 1 through 12 the minute value is from 00 through 59 and the day or night value is AM or PM 3 Select the day you wa...

Page 720: ...668 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Security configuration deployment 17...

Page 721: ...ng domain IDs 674 Devices that support Fibre Channel routing The FC FC Routing Service is supported only on the following devices 40 port 8 Gbps FC Switch 80 port 8 Gbps FC Switch 24 port 16 Gbps Edge...

Page 722: ...nes to cross physical SAN boundaries without merging the fabrics and while maintaining the access controls of zones Refer to the Fabric OS Administrator s Guide for detailed information about Fibre Ch...

Page 723: ...The following are some general guidelines for setting up Fibre Channel routing Ensure that the backbone fabric ID of the FC router is the same as that of other FC routers in the backbone fabric On the...

Page 724: ...f you are connecting Fibre Channel SANs through an IP based network see Configuring an FCIP tunnel on page 958 for instructions on setting up an FCIP tunnel between a VE_Port and a VEX_Port ATTENTION...

Page 725: ...ly and opens the FC Router dialog box and Port Configuration wizard For more information refer to the Web Tools Administrator s Guide 7 Follow the instructions in the Port Configuration wizard to conf...

Page 726: ...1 In the Product List or Connectivity Map right click the fabric for which you want to configure logical domains and select Routing Domain IDs The Configure Routing Domain IDs dialog box is displayed...

Page 727: ...ew your entire SAN both physical and virtual at a glance Enables you to manage a logical switch the same as a physical switch so that fewer physical chassis are required for Management application dep...

Page 728: ...witches The legacy EX_Port is connected to the base logical switch Inter Switch Links ISLs connected to the base switch are used to communicate among different fabrics The base switch supports E_Ports...

Page 729: ...r Virtual Fabrics is disabled by default This switch displays as a legacy switch Once upgraded you must enable Virtual Fabrics For more information about enabling Virtual Fabrics on a physical chassis...

Page 730: ...ion Blade E_Ports F_Ports and Encryption ports FC 8 GB Port Blade E_Ports and F_Ports FC 16 GB Port Blade E_Ports and F_Ports 10 Gig FCoE port Blade E_Ports and F_Ports 8 Gbps Extension Blade FC ports...

Page 731: ...Disable Device Probing When selected third party software except for CUP is prohibited from managing the switch This check box should be selected unless otherwise advised by your switch service provi...

Page 732: ...Even if you do not plan to use the chassis for more than a single logical switch you have the option of adding a logical switch in the future without an outage Create at least one logical switch for...

Page 733: ...from one logical switch to another logical switch in a different physical chassis only if the two logical switches have the same FID and are thus in the same logical fabric Traffic between these logi...

Page 734: ...ual Fabric Disable Alternatively you can right click the physical chassis in the Chassis Group and select Disable Virtual Fabric 2 Read the warning message and click OK Creating a logical switch or ba...

Page 735: ...cal Switches node the fabric wide settings for the logical switch are the default settings 4 Click New Switch The New Logical Switch dialog box displays FIGURE 265 New Logical Switch dialog box 5 Clic...

Page 736: ...field b Select either Decimal or Hex and enter a preferred domain ID for the logical switch In a FICON environment select a domain ID that is not in use by the default or another logical switch in th...

Page 737: ...al switch All ports are initially assigned to the default logical switch A port can be assigned to only one logical switch 1 Select Configure Virtual Fabric Logical Switches The Logical Switches dialo...

Page 738: ...displayed in the Status column and Status area in the dialog box 11 When the changes are complete click Close Removing ports from a logical switch 1 Select Configure Virtual Fabric Logical Switches Th...

Page 739: ...The Logical Switches dialog box displays 2 Right click anywhere in the Existing Logical Switches list and select Table Expand All 3 Select the logical switch you want to delete from the Existing Logi...

Page 740: ...g box displays 4 Enter a new identifier in the Logical Fabric ID field to create a new logical fabric template This identifier is how you distinguish among multiple logical fabric templates in the Log...

Page 741: ...ric determined by FID 4 Click OK on the Logical Switches dialog box The Logical Switch Change Confirmation and Status dialog box displays with a list of all changes you made in the Logical Switches di...

Page 742: ...change is displayed in the Status column and Status area in the dialog box 10 When the changes are complete click Close 11 If the newly created switch is not part of a discovered fabric then you must...

Page 743: ...made in the Logical Switches dialog box The Re Enable ports after moving them and QoS disable the ports while moving them check boxes are selected by default NOTE Ports are disabled before moving fro...

Page 744: ...692 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Configuring Virtual Fabrics 19...

Page 745: ...Steps for connecting to a TKLM appliance 739 Steps for connecting to a KMIP compliant SafeNet KeySecure 743 Steps for connecting to a KMIP compliant keyAuthority 762 Encryption preparation 763 Creatin...

Page 746: ...Configure Encryption FIGURE 266 Encryption Center dialog box Beginning with Fabric OS 6 4 the Encryption Center is dynamically updated to reflect the latest changes based on any of the following even...

Page 747: ...ption security Table 66 lists the associated roles and their read write access to specific operations The functions are enabled from the Encryption Center dialog box TABLE 66 Encryption privileges Pri...

Page 748: ...supported Using authentication cards with a card reader When authentication cards are used one or more authentication cards must be read by a card reader attached to a Management application workstati...

Page 749: ...66 on page 694 2 Select an encryption group from the Encryption Center Devices table then select Group Security from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Group Properties dialog box The Securit...

Page 750: ...68 Add Authentication Card dialog box The Add Authentication Card dialog box contains the following information Card Serial A serial number read from the smart card Card Assignment The first and last...

Page 751: ...n select Group Security from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Group Properties dialog box The Security tab is selected Refer to Figure 269 FIGURE 269 Encryption Group Properties dialog box...

Page 752: ...To authenticate using a quorum of authentication cards complete the following steps 1 When using the Authenticate dialog box gather the number of cards needed according to the instructions in the dia...

Page 753: ...unction as an ordinary FC switch or blade when it is powered up but use of the encryption engine is denied To register a system card from a card reader the smart card must be physically available Refe...

Page 754: ...ust be physically available System cards can be registered during encryption group creation or member configuration when running the configuration wizard or they can be registered using the following...

Page 755: ...card for authorizing use of encryption operations Card types identify if the smart card is a system card authentication card or recovery set The Smart Card Asset Tracking dialog box displays two table...

Page 756: ...of encryption engines for which the card is registered For Recovery cards the Usage column shows the group name and the creation date First Name The first name of the person up to 64 characters to wh...

Page 757: ...the Card Details table shows all encryption engines for which the card is registered by switch name and for encryption blades slot number For recovery cards the Card Details table shows the group name...

Page 758: ...n NOTE The Card Password field is activated after the card ID is read and the Login button is activated after the password is entered in the Card Password field 4 Edit the card as needed Note the foll...

Page 759: ...at connect encryption switches and blades to other encryption switches and blades Both ports of each encryption switch or blade must be connected to the same IP network and the same subnet Static IP a...

Page 760: ...Ge0 interface IP address and mask Eth1 IP Mask identifies the Ge1 interface IP address and mask The Gateway IP address is optional 4 Click OK Encryption node initialization and certificate generation...

Page 761: ...MIP support is available from multiple key vaults each key vault implementation is different in terms of High Availability HA clustering support certificate exchange and authentication In the current...

Page 762: ...operations an additional key hardening and integrity check is done on the secondary key vault before the key is used for encryption None If no HA is selected the primary and secondary key vaults are...

Page 763: ...State Connected Type KMIP Secondary Key Vault IP address 10 38 145 17 Certificate ID LKM10_CA Certificate label SSKM_17 State Connected Type KMIP Additional Primary Key Vault Information Key Vault CA...

Page 764: ...re communication between encryption nodes in an encryption group and between encryption nodes and key manager appliances requires an exchange of certificates that are used for mutual authentication Ea...

Page 765: ...xpiry on page 714 4 Import the signed certificate into the Fabric OS encryption node Refer to Importing the signed KAC certificate on page 715 5 Upload the signed KAC and CA certificates onto the DPM...

Page 766: ...a signed CA certificate are returned 4 Download and store the signed certificates The following example submits a CSR to the demoCA from RSA cd opt CA demoCA openssl x509 req sha1 CAcreateserial in ce...

Page 767: ...y Authentication Center KAC CSR has been submitted and signed by a CA the signed certificate must be imported into the switch 1 Select a switch from the Encryption Center Devices table then select Swi...

Page 768: ...your encryption group or the number of encryption groups that will be sharing this DPM kcn 1998 01 com brocade DEK_AES_256_XTS kcn 1998 01 com brocade DEK_AES_256_CCM kcn 1998 01 com brocade DEK_AES_2...

Page 769: ...certificate onto the encryption group leader on page 717 DPM key vault high availability deployment When dual DPM appliances are used for high availability the DPM appliances must be clustered and mus...

Page 770: ...ed secret called a link key The following configuration steps are performed from the NetApp DataFort Management Console DMC and from the Management application Install and launch the NetApp DataFort M...

Page 771: ...Link Key Status of Link Key requested waiting for LKM approval 3 Select the switch then click Establish This sends a Trust Establishment Package TEP message to the LKM SSKM which is needed to establi...

Page 772: ...rminal settings Checking system tamper status No physical intrusion detected 2 Add the Group Leader to the LKM SSKM key sharing group Enter lkmserver add type third party key sharing group followed by...

Page 773: ...gement Program client PC or an external host of your choosing 5 Register the signed KAC certificate that you exported from the member node with the NetApp LKM SSKM appliance LKM SSKM key vault high av...

Page 774: ...ndary LKM SSKM a VAULT_OFFLINE error is logged and the operation is retried Any DEK archived to the primary LKM SSKM in this case is not used DEK retrieval The DEK is retrieved from the primary LKM SS...

Page 775: ...different LKM SSKM you must first synchronize the DEKs from the primary LKM SSKM before reregistering the secondary LKM SSKM Steps for connecting to an ESKM SKM appliance The ESKM SKM management web c...

Page 776: ...SKM for all keys created by encryption switches and blades This needs to be done only once for each key vault 1 Log in to the ESKM SKM management web console using the admin password 2 Select the Secu...

Page 777: ...lt Preselected ESKM SKM key vaults are clustered so only one set of credentials is needed Secondary Key Vault The selection is inactive User Name Enter a user name for the Group Leader User Group Name...

Page 778: ...plete the following steps 1 Log in to the ESKM SKM management web console using the admin password 2 Select the Security tab 3 Under Certificates CAs click Local CAs Refer to Figure 279 4 Enter inform...

Page 779: ...e from ESKM SKM The local CA certificate you created using the procedure for Setting up the local Certificate Authority CA on ESKM SKM on page 726 must be saved to your local system Later this certifi...

Page 780: ...ou just created in Setting up the local Certificate Authority CA on ESKM SKM on page 726 10 Click Sign Request 11 Enter the required data in the Sign Certificate Request section of the window Select t...

Page 781: ...ckup appliance will not be directly used by the switch The procedures in this section will establish a cluster configuration on one ESKM SKM appliance and then transfer that configuration to the remai...

Page 782: ...key you downloaded as specified in Creating an ESKM SKM High Availability cluster on page 729 Complete the following steps on each ESKM SKM appliance you want to add to the cluster 1 Open a new brows...

Page 783: ...Select Public Key Certificate Request CSR then click OK You are prompted to save the CSR which can be saved to your SAN Management Program client PC or an external host of your choosing Alternatively...

Page 784: ...OK The signed certificate is stored on the switch ESKM SKM key vault high availability deployment The ESKM SKM key vault has high availability clustering capability ESKM SKM appliances can be cluster...

Page 785: ...sful the DEK is read from either the primary or secondary ESKMs or SKMs in the cluster until the DEK is read successfully from both If successful then the DEK created can be used for encrypting disk L...

Page 786: ...tch or blade When the secondary ESKM SKM is replaced with a different ESKM SKM you must first synchronize the DEKs from primary ESKM SKM before reregistering the secondary ESKM SKM Steps for connectin...

Page 787: ...y assigned during the initial setup of the TEKA appliance 1 Log in to the Thales management program as admin and select the Network tab Refer to Figure 281 FIGURE 281 TEKA Network Settings 2 Enter the...

Page 788: ...sign the group to a manager 1 From the Encryption Center Devices table select a switch that needs to have a TEKA client then select Properties 2 Click Key Vault User Name The Key Vault User Informatio...

Page 789: ...the Encryption Center Devices table select a switch then select Switch Key Vault Credentials from the menu task bar The Key Vault Credentials dialog box displays Refer to Figure 284 FIGURE 284 Key Vau...

Page 790: ...ly you can select Switch Properties then click the Export button beside the Public Key Certificate Request or you can copy the CSR for pasting in the From Text box on the Thales management program Sig...

Page 791: ...primary TKLM before registering the secondary TKLM The following is a suggested order for the steps needed to create a secure connection to TKLM 1 Initialize all encryption nodes to generate KAC certi...

Page 792: ...a note of this location Converting the KAC certificate format The KAC certificate exported from the encryption switch is in pem format It is automatically converted to a der format during the export...

Page 793: ...Server Certificates to verify that the certificate label is listed on Administer Server Certificates under Certificates 7 Reboot the TKLM server Importing the Fabric OS encryption node KAC certificat...

Page 794: ...t AdminTask tklmCertExport uuid UUID of the certificate fileName filename format DER 3 Exit the wsadmin CLI After export the TKLM server certificate is at the following location For LINUX installed di...

Page 795: ...you are configuring two KeySecure nodes you must complete step 1 through step 6 on the primary node then complete step 7 on the secondary node If only a single node is being configured step 7 is not n...

Page 796: ...Secure Management Console select the Security tab then select Advanced Security High Security The High Security Configuration page displays Refer to Figure 287 FIGURE 287 KeySecure High Security Confi...

Page 797: ...igure 288 FIGURE 288 KeySecure Certificate and CA Configuration page Create Local Certificate Authority 2 Under Create Local Certificate Authority enter the organization information in the fields prov...

Page 798: ...nd CA Configuration page displays Refer to Figure 290 FIGURE 290 KeySecure Certificate and CA Configuration page 2 Under Create Certificate Request enter your organization information in the fields pr...

Page 799: ...icate and CA Configuration page Certificate List 3 Verify the server certificate status is shown as Request Pending 4 Click on the server certificate name that you just created Safenet75ServerCert whi...

Page 800: ...icate and CA Configuration page displays 7 Under Local Certificate Authority List select the CA certificate you just created SafeNetCA then click Sign Request Refer to Figure 293 FIGURE 293 KeySecure...

Page 801: ...cate information is displayed under Certificate Request Information Refer to Figure 295 FIGURE 295 KeySecure Certificate and CA Configuration page Certificate Request Information 10 Click Download aft...

Page 802: ...KeySecure Certificate and CA Configuration page Certificate Installation 14 After the page refreshes the new certificate information is displayed in the Certificate List table Refer to Figure 297 FIGU...

Page 803: ...ect Device Configuration Cluster The Cluster Configuration page displays Refer to Figure 298 FIGURE 298 KeySecure Cluster Configuration page 2 Under Create Cluster enter a user defined password in the...

Page 804: ...Key Refer to Figure 300 You are prompted to enter a local file name FIGURE 300 KeySecure Cluster Configuration page Cluster Settings Configuring a Brocade group on the KeySecure A Brocade group is co...

Page 805: ...and password are now configured on the KeySecure NOTE The user name and password must also be registered on the Management application Proceed to Registering the KeySecure Brocade group user name and...

Page 806: ...each encryption node and signed by the Brocade local CA on KMIP The signed certificate must then be imported back into the encryption node 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu task bar to displ...

Page 807: ...Refer to Figure 303 FIGURE 303 Certificate and CA Configuration page Sign Certificate Request 9 Select the local CA from the Sign with Certificate Authority drop down list The example is using SafeNe...

Page 808: ...switch is added to the encryption group 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 2 Select a switch from the Encr...

Page 809: ...intenance Backup Restore Create Backup The Backup and Restore page displays Refer to Figure 305 FIGURE 305 Backup and Restore page 2 Select the server certificate from the list The example is using Sa...

Page 810: ...tems 5 Select the items for backup then click Continue The Create Backup page displays which is used for setting backup details Refer to Figure 307 FIGURE 307 Backup and Restore page Backup details 6...

Page 811: ...erver Configuration page displays Refer to Figure 308 FIGURE 308 KeySecure Cryptographic Key Server Configuration page 2 Under Cryptographic Key Server Settings select KMIP as the protocol 3 Ensure th...

Page 812: ...displays Refer to Figure 309 FIGURE 309 KeySecure Cluster Configuration page 2 Under Join Cluster enter the cluster information that you configured for the primary KeySecure node Refer to Creating a c...

Page 813: ...eySecure 20 FIGURE 310 KeySecure Cluster Configuration page Cluster Members 6 Verify that both KeySecure nodes are shown as Active 7 From the Devices tab select Maintenance Backup and Restore Restore...

Page 814: ...ires a restart FIGURE 312 KeySecure Services Configuration page 11 Under Restart Halt select Restart then click Commit and wait until the restart is completed The primary and second KeySecure nodes ar...

Page 815: ...es or blades to provide failover support All switches in the planned encryption group are interconnected on an I O synch LAN The management ports on all encryption switches and 8 slot Backbone Chassis...

Page 816: ...igned to an encryption group 3 Select Encryption Create Add to Group from the menu task bar The Configure Switch Encryption wizard welcome screen displays Refer to Figure 314 The wizard enables you to...

Page 817: ...n click Next to begin The Designate Switch Membership dialog box displays Figure 315 The dialog box contains the following options Create a new encryption group containing just the switch Creates an e...

Page 818: ...tic or Manual NOTE When one encryption engine in the HA cluster fails the second encryption engine in the HA cluster takes over the encryption and decryption of traffic to all encryption targets in th...

Page 819: ...tions are NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM The NetApp Key Vault Type name is shown as NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM for both NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM and SafeNet KeySecure for key management S...

Page 820: ...uration instructions refer to the Fabric OS Encryption Administrator s Guide Supporting Key Management Interoperability Protocol KMIP Key Compliant Environments Primary Key Vault The primary key vault...

Page 821: ...HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager ESKM SKM on page 780 For TEKA key vault setting instructions see Configuring key vault settings for Thales e_Security keyAuthority TEKA on page 784 For TKLM key vault...

Page 822: ...lementing encryption on data replication LUNs used by the EMC Symmetrix Remote Data Facility SRDF you must select Enabled for REPL Support 4 Click Next The Specify Certificate Signing Request File Nam...

Page 823: ...ile where you want to store back up master key information or browse to the desired location 8 Enter the passphrase which is required for restoring the master key The passphrase can be between eight a...

Page 824: ...e is five cards The actual number of authentication cards registered is always more than the quorum size so if you set the quorum size to five for example you will need to register at least six cards...

Page 825: ...n Status dialog box displays Refer to Figure 323 FIGURE 323 Configuration Status dialog box 12 Review the post configuration instructions which you can copy to a clipboard or print for later then clic...

Page 826: ...ipboard or print for later then click Finish to exit the wizard Configuring key vault settings for NetApp Link Key Manager LKM SSKM The following procedure assumes you have already configured the init...

Page 827: ...mary key vault 2 Enter the name of the file that holds the primary key vault s public key certificate or browse to the desired location 3 If you are using a backup key vault enter the IP address or ho...

Page 828: ...e where you want to store the public key certificate that is used to authenticate connections to the key vault The certificate stored in this file is the switch s public key certificate You will need...

Page 829: ...e is five cards The actual number of authentication cards registered is always more than the quorum size so if you set the quorum size to five for example you will need to register at least six cards...

Page 830: ...box displays Refer to Figure 329 FIGURE 329 Configuration Status dialog box All configuration items have green check marks if the configuration is successful A red stop sign indicates a failed step A...

Page 831: ...Verify the information is correct then click Next The Next Steps dialog box displays Refer to Figure 330 Instructions for installing public key certificates for the encryption switch are displayed The...

Page 832: ...ult dialog box for ESKM SKM 1 Enter the IP address or host name for the primary key vault 2 Enter the name of the file that holds the primary key vault s CA key certificate or browse to the desired lo...

Page 833: ...he file where you want to store the certificate information or browse to the desired location then click Next The Specify Master Key File Name dialog box displays Refer to Figure 333 FIGURE 333 Specif...

Page 834: ...curity sensitive operations listed above The maximum quorum size is five cards The actual number of authentication cards registered is always more than the quorum size so if you set the quorum size to...

Page 835: ...box displays Refer to Figure 336 FIGURE 336 Configuration Status dialog box All configuration items have green check marks if the configuration is successful A red stop sign indicates a failed step A...

Page 836: ...ey certificates for the encryption switch are displayed FIGURE 337 Next Steps dialog box 12 Review post configuration instructions which you can copy to a clipboard or print for later 13 Click Finish...

Page 837: ...ary key vault s public key certificate or browse to the desired location 3 Enter the password you created for the Brocade group TEKA client 4 If you are using a backup key vault enter the IP address o...

Page 838: ...king up the master key or browse to the desired location 7 Enter the passphrase which is required for restoring the master key The passphrase can be between eight and 40 characters and any character i...

Page 839: ...more than the quorum size so if you set the quorum size to five for example you will need to register at least six cards in the subsequent steps Setting quorum size to a value greater than zero and or...

Page 840: ...the encryption switch was added to the group you named and the public key certificate is stored in the location you specified After configuration of the encryption group is completed the Management ap...

Page 841: ...xit the Configure Switch Encryption wizard 14 Refer to Understanding configuration status results on page 800 Configuring key vault settings for IBM Tivoli Key Lifetime Manager TKLM The following proc...

Page 842: ...ault 2 Enter the name of the file that holds the primary key vault s public key certificate or browse to the desired location 3 If you are using a backup key vault enter the IP address or host name an...

Page 843: ...box 5 Enter the name of the file where the switch s public key certificate is stored or browse to the desired location then click Next The Specify Master Key File Name dialog box displays Refer to Fig...

Page 844: ...inimum number of cards necessary to enable the card holders to perform the security sensitive operations listed above The maximum quorum size is five cards The actual number of authentication cards re...

Page 845: ...box displays Refer to Figure 349 FIGURE 349 Configuration Status dialog box All configuration items have green check marks if the configuration is successful A red stop sign indicates a failed step A...

Page 846: ...ons which you can copy to a clipboard or print for later 13 Click Finish to exit the Configure Switch Encryption wizard 14 Refer to Understanding configuration status results on page 800 Configuring k...

Page 847: ...tions an additional hardening check is done on the secondary key vault before the key is used for encryption Transparent A single key vault should be registered on the BES The client assumes the entir...

Page 848: ...icate KAC File Name dialog box Figure 352 Go to Step 7 Self Signed The self signed certificates are exchanged and registered on both ends The key vault certificate is registered on the switch and the...

Page 849: ...f the file used for backing up the master key or browse to the desired location 10 Enter the passphrase which is required for restoring the master key The passphrase can be between eight and 40 charac...

Page 850: ...ity sensitive operations listed above The maximum quorum size is five cards The actual number of authentication cards registered is always more than the quorum size so if you set the quorum size to fi...

Page 851: ...group 20 FIGURE 355 Confirm Configuration dialog box 14 Confirm the encryption group name and switch public key certificate file name you specified are correct then click Next The Configuration Status...

Page 852: ...ecific to the key vault type FIGURE 357 Next Steps dialog box 16 Review the post configuration instructions which you can copy to a clipboard or print for later then click Finish to exit the Configure...

Page 853: ...ppliance uses its own master key to encrypt DEKs 6 Save the switch s public key certificate to a file The Management application saves the KAC certificate in the specified file 7 Back up the master ke...

Page 854: ...on wizard welcome screen 3 Click Next The Designate Switch Membership dialog box displays Refer to Figure 359 FIGURE 359 Designate Switch Membership dialog box 4 For this procedure select Add this swi...

Page 855: ...p in which to add a switch Member Switches table Lists the switches in the selected encryption group NOTE If you are creating a new encryption group refer to Creating a new encryption group on page 76...

Page 856: ...where you want to store the public key certificate that is used to authenticate connections to the key vault or browse to the desired location then click Next The Confirm Configuration dialog box disp...

Page 857: ...s successful A red stop sign indicates a failed step A message displays below the table indicating the encryption switch was added to the group you named and the public key certificate is stored in th...

Page 858: ...3154 01 Adding a switch to an encryption group 20 FIGURE 364 Error Instructions dialog box 8 Review the post configuration instructions which you can copy to a clipboard or print for later 9 Click Fin...

Page 859: ...ryption Center Devices table then select Engine Replace from the menu task bar The Encryption Group Properties dialog box displays with the Engine Operations tab selected Refer to Figure 365 You can a...

Page 860: ...ster configuration rules The following rules apply when configuring an HA cluster The encryption engines that are part of an HA cluster must belong to the same encryption group and be part of the same...

Page 861: ...Clusters tab selected Refer to Figure 366 3 Select an available encryption engine from the Non HA Encryption Engines table and a destination HA cluster from the High Availability Clusters table Selec...

Page 862: ...the left arrow Refer to Figure 366 4 Either remove the second engine or add a replacement second engine making sure all HA clusters have exactly two engines 5 Click OK Swapping engines in an HA cluste...

Page 863: ...task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 2 Select an encryption group from the Encryption Center Devices table to which the encryption engine belongs then...

Page 864: ...e 266 on page 694 2 Select a group switch or engine from the Encryption Center Devices table to which to add the target then select Group Switch Engine Targets from the menu task bar NOTE You can also...

Page 865: ...3 1003154 01 Configuring encryption storage targets 20 FIGURE 368 Configure Storage Encryption wizard welcome screen 4 Click Next The Select Encryption Engine dialog box displays Refer to Figure 369 F...

Page 866: ...elect the encryption engine blade or switch to configure then click Next The Select Target dialog box displays Refer to Figure 370 The dialog box lists all target ports and target nodes in the same fa...

Page 867: ...an error will result FIGURE 371 Select Hosts dialog box The dialog box contains the following information Hosts in Fabric table Lists the available hosts in the fabric Selected Hosts table Lists the h...

Page 868: ...Select hosts using either of the following methods a Select a maximum of 1024 hosts from the Hosts in Fabric table then click the right arrow to move the hosts to the Selected Hosts table The Port WW...

Page 869: ...e container name is a logical encryption name to specify a name other than the default You can use a maximum of 31 characters Letters digits and underscores are allowed 11 Click Next The Confirmation...

Page 870: ...on The Configuration Status screen displays which shows the status of the new container configuration Refer to Figure 374 The target and host that are configured in the target container are listed as...

Page 871: ...to the key vault type FIGURE 375 Next Steps screen The Next Steps screen contains the following information Important Instructions Instructions about post configuration tasks you must complete after...

Page 872: ...om the menu task bar NOTE You can also select a group switch or engine from the Encryption Center Devices table then click the Targets icon The Encryption Targets dialog box displays Refer to Figure 3...

Page 873: ...t WWN and the Node WWN Click the right arrow button to move the host to the Selected Hosts table NOTE The selected host and target must be in the same zone or an error will result The Selected Hosts t...

Page 874: ...rom the menu task bar The Encryption Disk LUN View dialog box displays Refer to Figure 378 FIGURE 378 Encryption Disk LUN View dialog box The dialog box provides a convenient way to view and manage di...

Page 875: ...aunch the Add New Path wizard The Select Target Port dialog box displays Refer to Figure 379 FIGURE 379 Select Target Port dialog box The dialog box is used to select a target port when configuring mu...

Page 876: ...the wizard Initiator Port table Lists initiator ports using the following identifiers Initiator Port Initiator Port Name Initiator Node Name Fabric 5 Select the initiator port from the Initiator Port...

Page 877: ...ion LUN Identifies if the new LUN is a thin provisioned LUN Options are Yes No Unknown or Not Applicable NOTE Thin provision support is limited to Brocade tested storage arrays The thin provisioned LU...

Page 878: ...anges per disk LUN Adding or modifying more than 25 paths on the same LUN is not recommended unless the LUN is encrypted In environments where there are multiple paths to the same LUNs it is critical...

Page 879: ...ansmits data that is being written to both a local Symmetrix array and a remote symmetrix array The replicated data facilitates a fast switchover to the remote site for data recovery SRDF supports the...

Page 880: ...ronized to ensure the availability of the DEK at the remote site Refer to DPM user documentation for information about how to synchronize the key vaults Both sites may share the same key vault which e...

Page 881: ...group If the local LUN contains host data configuring it with the New LUN option will cause the data on the last three blocks of the LUN to be lost Before using the New LUN option you must migrate the...

Page 882: ...UNs dialog box displays Refer to Figure 385 FIGURE 385 Encryption Target Tape LUNs dialog box 4 Click Add The Add Encryption Target Tape LUNs dialog box displays Refer to Figure 386 A table of all LUN...

Page 883: ...oose a LUN to be added to an encryption target container using one of the two following methods Discover Identifies the exposed logical unit number for a specified initiator If you already know the ex...

Page 884: ...es Tapes that are already made are not rekeyed To rekey a tape you need to read the tape contents using a host application that decrypts the tape contents using the old key then rewrite the tape which...

Page 885: ...ryption Engine A with Target Port A and Host Port A 7 Repeat Step 6 to create a target container for Encryption Engine B with Target Port B and Host Port B Up to this point the Management application...

Page 886: ...ing and disabling tape LUN write early and read ahead To enable or disable tape LUN write early and read ahead follow these steps 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu task bar to display the En...

Page 887: ...on Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 b Select a group switch or engine from the Encryption Center Devices table that contains the storage device to be configured then select Group Swit...

Page 888: ...Targets dialog box displays Refer to Figure 389 A list of the configured CryptoTarget containers is displayed FIGURE 389 Encryption Targets dialog box 3 Select Tape as the container of type for which...

Page 889: ...then click LUNs 2 From the Target Tape LUNs dialog box select the LUNs you want to monitor Viewing and clearing tape LUN statistics for specific tape LUNs To view or clear statistics for tape LUNs in...

Page 890: ...ten to tape Uncompressed Bytes The number of uncompressed bytes written to tape Compressed Bytes The number of compressed bytes written to tape Host Port WWN The WWN of the host port that is being use...

Page 891: ...ics then click Statistics The Tape LUN Statistics dialog box displays Refer to Figure 394 The statistics for all LUNs that are members of the selected tape container are displayed FIGURE 394 Tape LUN...

Page 892: ...by re balancing the tape and disk target containers across the encryption engine This ensures that the tape and disk target containers are distributed within the encryption engine for maximum through...

Page 893: ...er key Although it is generally not necessary to create a new master key you might be required to create one due to the following The previous master key has been compromised Corporate policy might re...

Page 894: ...d are managed from Group Properties Master key actions are as follows Backup master key Enabled any time a master key exists Selecting this option launches the Backup Master Key for Encryption Group d...

Page 895: ...ked up Saving the master key to a file Use the following procedure to save the master key to a file 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Ref...

Page 896: ...yption from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 2 Select a group from the Encryption Center Devices table then select Group Security from the...

Page 897: ...elect a group from the Encryption Center Devices table then select Group Security from the menu task bar The Encryption Group Properties dialog box displays with the Security tab selected 3 Select Bac...

Page 898: ...h your system The key is divided among the cards in the card set up to 10 The quorum of cards required to restore the master key must be less than the total number of cards in the set and no greater t...

Page 899: ...used to restore the master key 8 Click OK Restoring a master key from a key vault Use the following procedure to restore the master key from a key vault 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu ta...

Page 900: ...OK Restoring a master key from a smart card set A card reader must be attached to the SAN Management application PC to complete this procedure Use the following procedure to restore the master key fro...

Page 901: ...ard After five unsuccessful attempts to enter the correct password the card becomes locked and unusable 8 Click Restore You are prompted to insert the next card if needed 9 Repeat step 6 through step...

Page 902: ...ther sensitive encryption information in an encryption engine You can zeroize an encryption engine manually to protect encryption keys No data is lost because the data encryption keys for the encrypti...

Page 903: ...perties dialog box to restore the master key from a backup copy 1 Select Configure Encryption from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 2 Selec...

Page 904: ...cted all configured targets in the group are displayed If a switch is selected all configured targets for the switch are displayed FIGURE 401 Encryption Targets dialog box Redirection zones It is reco...

Page 905: ...gure 402 When a device decommission operation fails on the encryption Group Leader for any reason the crypto configuration remains uncommitted until a user initiated commit or a subsequent device deco...

Page 906: ...ose the dialog box If a rekey operation is currently in progress on a selected LUN a message is displayed that gives you a choice of doing a Forced Decommission or to Cancel and try later after the re...

Page 907: ...at have been decommissioned at the key vault are listed in a table Universal ID button Launches the Universal ID dialog box to display the universal ID for each selected decommissioned key You need to...

Page 908: ...o export the decommissioned key ID to the key vault Rekeying all disk LUNs manually The encryption management application allows you to perform a manual rekey operation on all encrypted primary disk L...

Page 909: ...or LUNs or click No to exclude mirror LUNs A warning message displays requesting confirmation to proceed with the rekey operation 4 Click Yes Rekeying operations begin on up to 10 LUNs If more than 10...

Page 910: ...on page 694 2 Select a group switch or engine from the Encryption Center Devices table then select Group Switch Engine Targets or right click the group switch or engine and select Targets NOTE You ca...

Page 911: ...LUN rekeying operation Options are Read Phase Write Phase Pending Disabled Block Size The block size used on the LUN Number of Blocks The number of blocks written Current LBA The Logical Block Addres...

Page 912: ...e The block size used on the LUN Container Name The CryptoTarget container name Host Port WWN The WWN of the host port that is being used for the write operation Current LBA The Logical Block Address...

Page 913: ...e verified using the cryptocfg show container all stat command and checking the output for Thin Provision LUN Yes Similarly if a thin to full LUN conversion has been performed a discoverLUN command mu...

Page 914: ...feasible for most environments the recommendation from Brocade is that any encrypted LUNs be fully provisioned with disk Viewing time left for auto rekey You can view the time remaining until auto rek...

Page 915: ...ure Encryption from the menu task bar to display the Encryption Center dialog box Refer to Figure 266 on page 694 2 Select a switch or encryption engine from the Encryption Center Devices table then s...

Page 916: ...list of properties associated with the selected switch Name The name of the selected switch Node WWN The world wide name of the node Switch Status The health status of the switch Options are Healthy M...

Page 917: ...y Manager RKM NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM The NetApp Key Vault Type name is shown as NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM for both NetApp Lifetime Key Manager LKM and SafeNet KeySecure for key manageme...

Page 918: ...t be signed by a certificate authority CA The signed certificate must then be imported onto the switch and onto the primary and backup key vaults Export button Exports the public key certificate in CS...

Page 919: ...Submit the CSR to a certificate authority CA for signing CA signing requirements and procedures differ per key manager appliance Importing a signed public key certificate from properties To import a s...

Page 920: ...esponding key vault certificate When adding or changing a key vault if the switches in the encryption group have not been previously registered with the new key vault you must add the switch certifica...

Page 921: ...e dialog box refer to HA Clusters tab on page 877 Link Keys tab Visible for LKM SSKM only For a description of the dialog box refer to Link Keys tab on page 879 Tape Pools tab For a description of the...

Page 922: ...is transparent mode Failback Mode Identifies the group s failback mode Options are Automatic and Manual Failback mode can be changed by clicking on the field and selecting the desired mode The HA fail...

Page 923: ...yed as Thales e Security keyAuthority TEKA If a switch is running a Fabric OS version prior to v7 1 0 Key Vault Type is displayed as Thales Key Manager TEMS Tivoli Key Lifetime Manager TKLM No other k...

Page 924: ...vates the Primary and Backup Key Vault User Names and password fields for completion Username Activates the Primary and Backup Key Vault User Names for completion None Deactivates Primary and Backup K...

Page 925: ...ch has responded and the Group Leader is exchanging information This is a transient condition that exists for a short time after a switch is added or restored to a group OK The member switch is respon...

Page 926: ...application also removes the HA cluster and target container associated with the switch NOTE If the encryption group is in a degraded state the Management application does not remove the HA clusters...

Page 927: ...Properties dialog box displays with the Security tab selected NOTE You can also select a group from the Encryption Center Devices table then click the Properties icon TABLE 67 Switch removal impact Sw...

Page 928: ...when no master key exists or the previous master key has been backed up Back up a master key Enabled any time a master key exists Restore a master key Enabled when either no master key exists or the...

Page 929: ...estored from a backup This situation can occur if all encryption engines in a group are zeroized and then re enabled HA Clusters tab The HA Clusters tab allows you to create and delete HA clusters add...

Page 930: ...rrow button After selecting an encryption engine in both the Non HA Encryption Engines table and the High Availability Clusters table clicking the dual arrow button swaps the cluster members NOTE Swap...

Page 931: ...tch in the encryption group Key Vault The type of key vault either Primary or Secondary Link Key Status The link key status can be one of the following No Link Key No access request was sent to LKM SS...

Page 932: ...yption switch or engine from a tape pool select one or more tape pools listed in the table then click Remove To modify a tape pool you must remove the entry then add a new tape pool The Tape Pools tab...

Page 933: ...ape drive policies the LUN pool policies are used only if no tape pools exist or if the tape media volume does not belong to any configured tape pools All encryption engines in the encryption group sh...

Page 934: ...tape pool label or tape ID that is configured on the tape backup restore application If you selected Number as the Tape Pool Label Type enter a hex number for the tape pool This number must match the...

Page 935: ...set of encryption engines that encrypt the same target storage device DEK Clusters do not display in the Management application they are an internal implementation feature and have no user configurabl...

Page 936: ...if it is part of an HA cluster Encryption related acronyms in log messages Fabric OS log messages related to encryption components and features may have acronyms embedded that require interpretation T...

Page 937: ...vers and storage do not interact with your UNIX servers and storage You can use zones to logically consolidate equipment for efficiency or to facilitate time sensitive functions for example you can cr...

Page 938: ...standard zones Unless otherwise specified all references to zones refer to these standard zones Frame redirection zones Reroute frames between an initiator and target through a Virtual Initiator and...

Page 939: ...able only for Enterprise and Professional Plus editions Offline zoning enables you to copy a fabric zone database and edit it offline The benefits to offline zoning include the following You want to m...

Page 940: ...ing to zone Zoning and FICON Session based hardware enforcement is in effect if the zone has a mix of WWN and Domain Port members Session based hardware enforcement is also in effect if a port is in m...

Page 941: ...elect a fabric from the Zoning Scope list This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning database for the selected entity 4 If you want to show all the dis...

Page 942: ...Zone_Name where X is the priority level H High M Medium or L Low and Zone_Name is the name you entered for the zone The new empty zone is created You cannot save an empty zone Refer to Adding members...

Page 943: ...otential Members list displays valid members using the following rules If you select the WWN type the valid members display by the Attached Ports If you select the WWN Fabric Assigned type the valid m...

Page 944: ...s SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone name to select more than one zone 5 Click New Member The Add Zone Member dialog box displays 6 Select an option from the Member Type list The fields in the dialog b...

Page 945: ...ove multiple zone members select the members to be removed from the zone and click the left arrow between the Potential Members list and the Zones list When successful the zone member is removed from...

Page 946: ...Cancel on the Zoning dialog box to exit without saving changes When you reopen the dialog box the zone is restored 6 Click OK or Apply to save your changes Any zones or zone configurations you have c...

Page 947: ...arget entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning database for the selected entity 4 Click the plus sign by the appropriate zone in the Zones list to expand the listing and show t...

Page 948: ...box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed 3 Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list 4 Select Alias from the Type list 5 Click New Alias The New Alias dialog bo...

Page 949: ...ber to select more than one member You can also add WWNs not listed in the Potential Members list by entering the WWN in the Detached WWN field and clicking Add d Click the right arrow between the Pot...

Page 950: ...ype list 5 Click Export The Export Alias dialog box displays 6 Browse to the location to which you want to export the zone alias data 7 Enter a name for the export file in the File Name field 8 Click...

Page 951: ...er to Renaming a zone alias on page 898 7 Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes Creating a zone configuration 1 Select Configure Zoning Fabric The Zoning dialog box displays...

Page 952: ...ne Configuration Properties dialog box Adding zones to a zone configuration 1 Select Configure Zoning Fabric The Zoning dialog box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically dis...

Page 953: ...onfigurations list When successful the zone is removed from the Zone Configurations list 6 Click OK or Apply to save your changes Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zon...

Page 954: ...nfiguration and any TI zones in the offline zone database are saved to the switch and are added to the existing online zone database 8 Click OK to activate the zone configuration A message displays in...

Page 955: ...zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database Renaming a zone configuration 1 Select Configure Zoning Fabric The Zoning dialog box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if t...

Page 956: ...tion When you duplicate a zone configuration you make a copy of it in the same zone database The first time a zone configuration is duplicated the duplicate is automatically given the name zonesetlabe...

Page 957: ...This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning database for the selected entity If you want to show all discovered fabrics in the Potential Members list ri...

Page 958: ...saved in the zone database Refreshing a zone database 1 Select Configure Zoning Fabric The Zoning dialog box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed 3 Select a zone...

Page 959: ...e zone database b Add the active zones to the zone configuration that is the active configuration on the other fabric c Rename the inactive configuration Merging two zone databases If a zone or zone c...

Page 960: ...ts only with similar elements You cannot merge a zone with a zone configuration for example 6 Optional Merge all elements by clicking Merge All 7 Optional Add elements aliases zones and zone configura...

Page 961: ...uration from the Reference Zone DB area b Select the name of the active zone configuration in the Editable Zone DB area c Click Merge All of the active zones from both fabrics are now in one zone conf...

Page 962: ...e Zoning dialog box displays 2 Select an offline zone database from the Zone DB list 3 Select Import from the Zone DB Operation list The Import Zone DB dialog box displays 4 Browse to the zone databas...

Page 963: ...vides an overview of the steps you must perform to configure LSAN zoning 1 Select a backbone fabric from the Connectivity Map or Product List 2 Select Configure Zoning LSAN Zoning Device Sharing The Z...

Page 964: ...from the Connectivity Map or Product List 2 Select Configure Zoning LSAN Zoning Device Sharing The Zoning dialog box displays with the LSAN scope 3 Click New Zone The prefix LSAN_ is automatically add...

Page 965: ...s configured If you select the Alias type the valid members display by the device alias Only aliases with WWN member types are displayed Aliases that contain any Domain Port members are not displayed...

Page 966: ...the Zones list Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone name to select more than one zone 4 Click New Member The Add Zone Member dialog box displays 5 Select an option from the Member Type list The fie...

Page 967: ...ming you about the effects of LSAN zone activation and asking whether you want to proceed Click Yes to confirm the activation or click No to cancel the activation 6 Click OK to close the Zoning dialog...

Page 968: ...or disabled Disable failover if you want to guarantee that TI zone traffic uses only the dedicated path and that no other traffic can use the dedicated path Enable failover if you want traffic to have...

Page 969: ...figuring Traffic Isolation zoning The following procedure provides an overview of the steps you must perform to configure Traffic Isolation zoning Note that for any zoning related procedure changes to...

Page 970: ...Zone from the New Zone list 6 Enter a name for the zone For zone name requirements and limitations refer to Zoning naming conventions on page 888 7 Press Enter 8 Click OK or Apply to save your changes...

Page 971: ...to add the selected ports to the zone 9 Click OK or Apply to save your changes The TI zone is saved but is not activated Traffic Isolation zones are activated when you activate a zone configuration in...

Page 972: ...check box 5 Click OK or Apply to save your changes The Traffic Isolation zone is not disabled until you activate a zone configuration in the same zone database Enabling failover on a Traffic Isolatio...

Page 973: ...cally displayed 3 Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning database for the selected entity 4 Right click...

Page 974: ...to save your changes The Boot LUN zone is saved to the Active Zone DB To activate the Boot LUN zone you must move it to a zone configuration and activate the configuration Modifying a Boot LUN zone On...

Page 975: ...ons Comparing zone databases You can compare zone databases against one another to identify any and all differences between their memberships prior to sending them to the switch Once the two databases...

Page 976: ...the two databases 5 Set the display for the database areas by selecting one of the following from the Comparison View list Storage to Host Connectivity Displays only storage and host devices Host to S...

Page 977: ...wing steps 1 After successfully activating a zone configuration click the Active Zone Configuration tab in the Zoning dialog box 2 Select Turn off the comparison alerts between the active zone configu...

Page 978: ...ATTENTION Clearing the zone database removes all zoning configuration information including all aliases zones and zone configurations in the fabric Clearing the fabric zone database is disruptive to...

Page 979: ...and displays the zoning database for the selected entity 4 If you want to show all fabrics discovered in the Potential Members list right click in the Potential Members list and select Display All 5...

Page 980: ...on the Zone DB tab 1 Select Configure Zoning Fabric The Zoning dialog box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed 3 Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list This...

Page 981: ...alog box displays 2 Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed 3 Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions an...

Page 982: ...tity 4 Right click the zone member you want to replace in the Zones list and select one of the following options from the shortcut menu that displays Replace To replace the zone member in a selected z...

Page 983: ...elected zone DB 8 Click OK on the message 9 Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database Replacing a...

Page 984: ...t dialog box A warning message displays informing you that the selected zone members will be removed from all zones and aliases in the selected zone DB 9 Click OK on the message 10 Click OK or Apply o...

Page 985: ...L2CoS to prioritize FC traffic 964 Configuring FCIP tunnel advanced settings 967 Viewing FCIP connection properties 971 Viewing General FCIP properties 972 Viewing FCIP port properties 974 Editing FCI...

Page 986: ...an IP network to a partner Fabric OS Extension Switch or Extension Blade When the IP packets are received the Fibre Channel frames are reconstructed FCIP uses a TCP transport that guarantees in order...

Page 987: ...latform TABLE 70 FCIP capabilities Capabilities 8 Gbps Extension Switch 8 Gbps Extension blade FCIP trunking Yes Yes Adaptive Rate Limiting Yes Yes 10 GbE ports No Yes FC ports up to 8 Gbps Yes Yes Co...

Page 988: ...at are associated with source and destination endpoints of an FCIP tunnel as shown in Figure 424 Each circuit represents a portion of the available Ethernet bandwidth provided by the GbE ports that ar...

Page 989: ...TI Zones or LS LF configurations FCIP Trunk configuration considerations There are several points to consider when configuring an FCIP trunk Each FCIP circuit is assigned a pair of IP addresses one so...

Page 990: ...ric FIGURE 426 Failover to a higher metric standby circuit You can configure a tunnel with standby metric 1 circuits that operate when all circuits configured with metric 0 fail However these configur...

Page 991: ...m of the tunnel operating in a degraded mode with less than the defined circuits before multiple metric 0 circuits fail Configure failover groups using the Add FCIP Circuit dialog box Refer to Adding...

Page 992: ...ilover groups each with two circuits All data through the tunnel is initially load balanced over Circuits 1 and 2 The following occurs during circuit failover If circuit 1 fails circuit 3 becomes acti...

Page 993: ...uit 4 and 5 only become active when circuits 3 or 1 fail If circuit 2 and circuit 3 fail circuit 5 becomes active and data is load balanced over circuit 1 and circuit 5 Reason Ungrouped circuits 2 and...

Page 994: ...ost is equal to the sum of maximum traffic rates of all established currently active low metric circuits in the tunnel The following formulas are used If the bandwidth is greater than or equal to 2 Gb...

Page 995: ...ered fabrics with Extension Switches are listed under devices and all existing FCIP tunnels are displayed 2 Select the switch you want to configure under Products 3 Click the Add button or right click...

Page 996: ...and IKE implementation over FCIP Internet Protocol security IPsec uses cryptographic security to ensure private secure communications over Internet Protocol networks IPsec supports network level data...

Page 997: ...ncryption Standard is the older encryption algorithm that uses a 56 bit key to encrypt blocks of 64 bit plain text Because of the relatively shorter key length it is not a secured algorithm and no lon...

Page 998: ...he length of time a key is used When the SA lifetime expires a new key is generated limiting the amount of time an attacker has to decipher a key Depending on the length of time expired or the length...

Page 999: ...her A VLAN is a virtual LAN network A VLAN may reside within a single physical network or it may span several physical networks Related devices and applications that are separated by physical LAN boun...

Page 1000: ...tching configurations for these features to work FCIP Fastwrite and Tape Acceleration are enabled by turning them on during the tunnel configuration process They are enabled on a per FCIP tunnel basis...

Page 1001: ...troduced by greater distance creates delays in anticipated responses to certain commands The FICON pacing mechanism may interpret delays as an indication of a large data transfer that could monopolize...

Page 1002: ...he read processing on the device side credits the pipeline and requests more data from the tape If exception status is received from the device the reading of data and emulation is terminated The FICO...

Page 1003: ...e to current I O operations in both fabrics as it needs to disable and enable the switches in both fabrics The merge process will not make any configuration changes on the primary production fabric th...

Page 1004: ...ics If using TI zones determine if zones should have failover disabled or enabled The FICON acceleration feature emulates the device it for which it is enabled Although it effectively acts like the co...

Page 1005: ...g is native FCP even if the front side ports are FICON If sharing FICON and FCP on the same tunnel you can enable Fast Write Enabling Fast Write depends on the application being extended over FCIP Ref...

Page 1006: ...he primary fabric so any zone configurations involving ports on the secondary fabric must be redone after fabric merge If the configuration wizard was used previously the fabrics they will not merge T...

Page 1007: ...sable trunking on the port portcfgtrunkport slot port 0 6 Enter the following command to display port settings portcfgshow Extending RDR applications over FCIP This section provides considerations for...

Page 1008: ...default the circuit keep alive is 10 seconds 10000 ms and 1 second 1000 ms for FICON Set this to 6 seconds 6000 ms for IBM peer to peer remote copy PPRC All other applications should use the default...

Page 1009: ...et routers firewalls and common carrier equipment A network diagram is very helpful Support engineers may ask you to provide a network diagram when troubleshooting problems Routers and firewalls must...

Page 1010: ...d an FCIP tunnel and circuits between switches follow these steps a Select the switch you want to configure under the Products tree b Click the Add button or right click on the switch and select Add T...

Page 1011: ...sign a Tunnel ID until at least one circuit is configured The Add Circuit dialog box returns you to the Add FCIP Tunnel dialog box to allow you to select the Tunnel ID In Brocade 7840 you must select...

Page 1012: ...d bandwidth and the bandwidth of all tunnels in the system NOTE The compression modes will differ for the Brocade 7840 The default option is Off The Fast Deflate compression is handled by the FPGA tha...

Page 1013: ...6 To add a circuit click Add to the right of the Circuits properties table at the bottom of the dialog box The Add FCIP Circuit dialog box is displayed Continue with Adding an FCIP circuit Logical swi...

Page 1014: ...ialog box and select Edit Tunnel or select a tunnel and click the Edit button For details refer to Configuring an FCIP tunnel on page 958 FIGURE 434 Add FCIP Circuit dialog box Use the following steps...

Page 1015: ...e most efficient Enter a value from 1260 through 2348 for the 4 Gbps platforms and from 1260 through 1500 for the 8 Gbps platforms MTU rates must match on both ends of the tunnel NOTE For the Brocade...

Page 1016: ...OS v7 2 and later 10 Select values for bandwidth settings An uncommitted bandwidth is not allowed on an FCIP circuit You must select Committed bandwidth If you want to use ARL set Minimum and Maximum...

Page 1017: ...00000 Enter a value in the Min Retransmission Time ms field to override the default value of 100 ms As shown the range is from 20 through 2000 Enter a value in the Max Retransmits field to override th...

Page 1018: ...is discovered and the default logical switch is not discovered On adding a circuit only the GigE ports present in the logical switch will display You cannot display or edit shared circuits of the def...

Page 1019: ...uce delays caused by latency Both sides of an FCIP tunnel must have matching configurations for these features to work OSTP may be configured by selecting Advanced Settings on the Add FCIP Tunnel dial...

Page 1020: ...the Advanced Settings dialog box 2 From the Transmission tab click the up and down arrows by the QoS High QoS Medium and QoS Low percentage values to increase and decrease values Configuring IPsec and...

Page 1021: ...tch If no matching policy is found you must manually configure the policy on the remote switch NOTE For the Brocade 7840 select a name from the Policy Name list The list displays all the predefined po...

Page 1022: ...tion to default values This option is not be enabled if existing values are configured for the tunnel 5 Select individual operational parameters for FICON emulation FICON Tape Write Max Pipe defines a...

Page 1023: ...hat can be contained in a single CCW chain If this value is exceeded emulation is suspended The range is 1 000 000 to 5 000 000 ms FICON Oxid Base defines the base value of an entry pool of 256 OXIDs...

Page 1024: ...nnection properties default switch not discovered Viewing General FCIP properties Use the following steps to view general FCIP properties for a switch or blade 1 Right click an Extension Blade or Swit...

Page 1025: ...erties tab Extension Switch or Blade Use the following steps to view the properties of a chassis where an Extension Blade is installed 1 Right click the chassis in the Switch group in Fabric Tree stru...

Page 1026: ...hassis Viewing FCIP port properties Take the following steps to view FCIP FC VE VEX and GbE port properties 1 Right click an Extension Blade or Switch from the Fabric Tree structure or on the Connecti...

Page 1027: ...rt properties 22 FIGURE 442 FC ports properties 4 To view VE and VEX port information select the VE VEx from the Type drop down list Figure 443 FIGURE 443 VE VEx port properties 5 To view GbE Ethernet...

Page 1028: ...it is edited as part of the tunnel For 4 Gbps platforms the Delete Enable and Disable buttons do not display In addition the Edit operation is only supported for cached circuits The 8 Gbps Extension S...

Page 1029: ...Fields and parameters are as described in Adding an FCIP circuit You can edit all editable fields and parameters Disabling FCIP tunnels 1 From the FCIP Tunnels dialog box select the tunnel you want to...

Page 1030: ...lect additional circuits from the table to disable and select Disable after each selection 6 Click OK to disable the circuit s Enabling FCIP circuits 1 From the FCIP Tunnels dialog box select the tunn...

Page 1031: ...isplay performance graphs from Properties as described in the following sections Displaying performance graphs for FC ports 1 Right click a blade an Extension Blade or Switch from the Fabric Tree stru...

Page 1032: ...ialog box 22 Displaying tunnel properties from the FCIP tunnels dialog box Tunnel properties can be displayed from the FCIP Tunnels dialog box 1 Select a tunnel from the FCIP tunnels dialog box 2 Sele...

Page 1033: ...g FCIP circuit properties from the FCIP tunnels dialog box Tunnel properties can be displayed from the FCIP Tunnels dialog box using the following procedure 1 Select a tunnel from the FCIP tunnels dia...

Page 1034: ...tch properties from the FCIP Tunnels dialog box 22 Displaying switch properties from the FCIP Tunnels dialog box Switch properties are displayed on the FCIP Tunnels dialog box when you select a switch...

Page 1035: ...Tunnels dialog box Troubleshooting FCIP Ethernet connections 1 Right click a blade an Extension Blade or Switch from the Fabric Tree structure or Connectivity Map and select Properties 2 Select the Po...

Page 1036: ...984 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Troubleshooting FCIP Ethernet connections 22...

Page 1037: ...al fabric merges and potential fabric disruption when fabrics become segmented because they cannot merge Enabling Fabric Binding activates Switch Connection Control SCC policy and sets Fabric Wide Con...

Page 1038: ...on page 987 and Disabling fabric binding on page 988 Action Displays any actions on the fabric Available Switches table Lists the switches available to add to the fabric binding membership list For s...

Page 1039: ...within nodes For many devices the 64 bit WWNs are fixed and their assignment follows conventions established by the IEEE For other devices the WWNs may be set or modified by the user World wide names...

Page 1040: ...Fabric OS Administrator s Guide for detailed information Disabling fabric binding Fabric binding cannot be disabled while High Integrity Fabric HIF is active if the switch is offline This disables fab...

Page 1041: ...to move the switches to the Membership List table 4 Click OK on the Fabric Binding dialog box Adding detached devices to the fabric binding membership list To add a switch that does not have a physic...

Page 1042: ...ity related features including Fabric Binding Switch Binding Insistent Domain IDs and Domain Register for State Change Notifications RSCNs HIF activates the Switch Connection Control SCC policy sets t...

Page 1043: ...ine again This process may result in dropped frames NOTE Port binding is a security method for restricting devices that connect to particular switch ports Port binding should never be used in FICON en...

Page 1044: ...mplete the following steps 1 Select Configure High Integrity Fabric The High Integrity Fabric dialog box displays Figure 451 2 Select the fabric on which you want to deactivate HIF from the Fabric Nam...

Page 1045: ...ices refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch Administrator s Guide Port Fencing objects include the SAN Fabrics Directors Switches physical Virtual Switches Ports as well as Port Types E_port F_port an...

Page 1046: ...es refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch Administrator s Guide 1 Select Monitor Fabric Watch Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays Figure 453 FIGURE 452 Port Fencing dialog box The Port F...

Page 1047: ...to add an ISL protocol threshold refer to Adding thresholds on page 999 Edit button Click to edit an ISL protocol threshold refer to Editing thresholds on page 1009 Delete button Click to delete an I...

Page 1048: ...ect a blocked port in the Ports table 2 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Thresholds You can create thresholds which you can then assign to available objects in the tree Port Fencing threshold t...

Page 1049: ...tch 4 Gbps Router Extension Switch 4 Gbps Extension Switch 4 Gbps 32 port Switch 8 Gbps 32 port Switch 8 Gbps 40 port Switch 8 Gbps 24 port Embedded Switch 8 Gbps 16 port Embedded Switch 8 Gbps 8 FC p...

Page 1050: ...ld to block a port when the link timeout errors meet the threshold Protocol error threshold Use Protocol Error thresholds to block a port when one of the following protocol errors meet the threshold I...

Page 1051: ...ic OS devices running 6 3 or later Use to block a port when a C3 Discard Frames violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold For default threshold values for Fabric OS devices refer to Chapter...

Page 1052: ...mber of C3 discarded frames allowed is met Second the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames allowed is reached within a second Minute the port is blocked as soon as th...

Page 1053: ...lid CRCs Threshold dialog box 4 Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field 5 Select one of the following options Default Uses device defaults Go to step 8 Custom Uses your selections Continue wi...

Page 1054: ...dd an Invalid Words threshold complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Fabric Watch Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select Invalid Words Fabric OS only from the Violation Type...

Page 1055: ...This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices NOTE This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version Use to block a port when the Link Reset violation type meets the Fabric OS switch thresho...

Page 1056: ...k Resets threshold to the table and close the Add Link Reset Threshold dialog box To assign this threshold to fabrics switches or switch ports refer to Assigning thresholds on page 1007 9 Click OK on...

Page 1057: ...as soon as the specified number of protocol errors allowed is met Second the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors allowed is reached within a second Minute the port is bl...

Page 1058: ...Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select State Change Fabric OS only from the Violation Type list 3 Click Add The Add State Change Threshold dialog box displays FIGURE 459 Add State Change Threshold...

Page 1059: ...her object above it in the hierarchy you cannot remove that inherited threshold directly from the subordinate object You must either remove the threshold from the higher object to which it was directl...

Page 1060: ...signed thresholds You cannot remove an inherited threshold from a subordinate object However the Management application allows you to effectively avoid inheritance for individual subordinate objects w...

Page 1061: ...Edit C3 Discard Frames dialog box displays 4 Complete step 4 through step 7 in Adding a C3 Discard Frames threshold on page 999 5 Click OK on the Edit C3 Discard Frames Threshold dialog box If the thr...

Page 1062: ...s NOTE This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version Use to block a port when the Invalid Word Threshold violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold To edit an Invalid Words threshold comp...

Page 1063: ...eshold has already been assigned to ports an Are you sure you want to make the requested changes to this threshold on X ports message displays Click OK to close To assign this threshold to fabrics swi...

Page 1064: ...TE This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version Use to block a port when a state change violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold For 4 Gbps Router Extension Switches and Blades only wh...

Page 1065: ...table 6 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Viewing thresholds 1 Select Monitor Fabric Watch Port Fencing The Port Fencing dialog box displays 2 Select a threshold type from the Violation Type li...

Page 1066: ...on also allows you to remove thresholds from an individual Fabric Switch or Switch Port from all Fabrics Switches and Switch Ports at once as well as from the Threshold table Removing thresholds from...

Page 1067: ...orts in all Fabrics except for a Chassis group You must remove repeat the procedure for the Chassis group 5 Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box Removing thresholds from the thresholds table To rem...

Page 1068: ...1016 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Removing thresholds 24...

Page 1069: ...rized into three types based on complexity Point to point configurations that do not use a switch Switched point to point configurations also called single switch configurations connect a host channel...

Page 1070: ...ric configuration 2 Obtain all required license keys for the switch and Management application features Licenses must be converted from transaction codes delivered with the switch Access to a public i...

Page 1071: ...nters Fabric ID FID Configure a FID if you are enabling a virtual fabric A FID can be any number between 1 128 and all switches in the same fabric must have the same FID Note that FMS cannot be enable...

Page 1072: ...steps to configure a switch for FICON operation 1 Launch the Management application and select the SAN tab NOTE The recommended best practice is to run the application client from a server other than...

Page 1073: ...then select the SNMP tab Fill out the fields as required FIGURE 463 Add Fabric Discovery dialog box SNMP tab Refer to the SAN discovery overview section in Chapter 3 Discovery for more information on...

Page 1074: ...swords or perform other steps to manage switch users NOTE If you change the password for a user that was used for Management application discovery you must delete the switch from the Discover Fabrics...

Page 1075: ...efault switch skip to step 15 As an option at this point you can configure virtual fabrics by referring to procedures in the following sections under Configuring Virtual Fabrics in the Virtual Fabrics...

Page 1076: ...steps under Enabling or disabling the default zone for fabrics in Chapter 21 Zoning The recommended policy is to disable the default zone No Access Although enabling the default zone All Access can b...

Page 1077: ...l Vendor Port Type and WWN For instructions refer to Setting your FICON display on page 85 Configuring an Allow Prohibit Matrix The Allow Prohibit Matrix is a FICON port attribute that can be used to...

Page 1078: ...tion and do not want to search the matrix for the exact port intersection point use the procedure in Configuring an Allow Prohibit Matrix manually on page 1027 5 Repeat step 4 as needed to create the...

Page 1079: ...The switch ports are displayed on both the vertical axis and horizontal axis An Allow icon indicates communication is allowed between the ports 4 Click Manual Allow Prohibit The Manual Allow Prohibit...

Page 1080: ...tch for port zoning only The table cells display in the red background if the two ports are not in the same zone in an active zone configuration 13 Click Close on the Configure Allow Prohibit Matrix d...

Page 1081: ...rix 3 Click Duplicate The Save As Duplicate dialog box displays as shown in Figure 468 on page 1029 FIGURE 468 Save As Duplicate dialog box 4 Enter a name for the configuration 5 Enter a description f...

Page 1082: ...low Prohibit Matrix 3 Click Save As The Save As Duplicate dialog box displays as shown in Figure 469 on page 1030 FIGURE 469 Save As Duplicate dialog box 4 Enter a name for the configuration 5 Enter a...

Page 1083: ...1031 FIGURE 470 Activate Matrix Confirmation message 4 Select the Active Saved check box to save the active configuration as the startup configuration IPL 5 Click OK to confirm If you select the Activ...

Page 1084: ...using the Window Arrangement list above the matrix display or the Clear all port names option below the display Changing window arrangement There are three options for the Allow Prohibit Matrix displa...

Page 1085: ...bric Enables port based routing on all switches Enables In Order Delivery IOD on all switches Enables Dynamic Load Sharing DLS based on user selection and the firmware level NOTE To enable DLS all swi...

Page 1086: ...es only All switches in a fabric must be running Fabric OS version 5 3 or later If a Fabric OS version earlier than version 5 3 is present in the topology the fabric is not listed 3 Select the FMS Mod...

Page 1087: ...message displays listing the switches of the selected fabric that are to be disabled and re enabled in order to enable the desired routing policy and IDID 8 Click Yes to continue If configuration is...

Page 1088: ...n the primary fabric are enabled for EBR Note that EBR requires that switches operate at 8 Gbps or greater with Fabric OS 6 4 or later If all the EBR enabled switches in the primary fabric are found t...

Page 1089: ...ches will not be disturbed for disruptive operations such as IDID and APT Instead all primary fabric switches will be validated for current routing policies and the same policies will be enabled on al...

Page 1090: ...creen displays 3 Select the two fabrics you want to merge under Available Fabrics and click the right arrow to move them to Selected Fabrics You may do this one fabric at a time or select both by pres...

Page 1091: ...link and the need for more BB credits FICON may require more BB credits than the algorithm provides and it is a good practice to specify a distance that is longer than the actual distance to be sure e...

Page 1092: ...ll be reenabled after the configuration changes are applied Please confirm to proceed warning message displays 3 Click OK on the warning message The values of the fabric chosen on the Set up merge opt...

Page 1093: ...bric the Allow Prohibit Matrix is at the switch level Therefore when you view the Allow Prohibit Matrix for a port group with ports from multiple switches the matrix only shows the ports for the selec...

Page 1094: ...in the Description field 5 Select one or more ports to add to the group in the Group Type FC Ports list A port group must have at least one port in the Membership List All ports must be from switches...

Page 1095: ...f a fabric or device is added to the topology while the Port Groups dialog box is open it does not display in the Group Type FC Ports tree until you close and reopen the Port Groups dialog box 2 Edit...

Page 1096: ...e 8 Gbps 24 port blade You can swap all of the ports from one blade to another blade During this operation all ports in the selected blades are swapped This operation disrupts the traffic on all ports...

Page 1097: ...automatically filters out the selected blade and any blade types that do not match the selected blade 4 Select the blade with which you want to replace the first blade from the second Swap Blades list...

Page 1098: ...1046 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Swapping blades 25...

Page 1099: ...ows you to view edit duplicate delete deploy and generate reports for the following types of deployment configurations DCB VLAN STP Security You cannot create configurations using the Deployment Manag...

Page 1100: ...displays as shown in Figure 473 FIGURE 473 Task Scheduler dialog box 2 Select a deployment configuration in the Saved or Scheduled tab Policy based routing configurations cannot be edited 3 Click Edit...

Page 1101: ...For example if the original name is test the new name is test copy1 If you duplicate test again the name of the second duplicate is test copy2 Deleting a deployment configuration 1 Select Configure T...

Page 1102: ...ct Configure Task Scheduler The Task Scheduler dialog box displays 2 Select a deployment in the Saved or Scheduled tab 3 Click Deploy The Deployment Status dialog box displays 4 Click Snapshot Report...

Page 1103: ...n the Available Targets list and click the right arrow to move the target to the Selected Targets list 5 Define search criteria You can specify whether the targets should contain or not contain specif...

Page 1104: ...1052 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Searching the configuration snapshots 26...

Page 1105: ...different fabrics shared through FC Routers Device Connectivity Troubleshooting Use to identify any problems that might be preventing communication between the two selected device ports The device por...

Page 1106: ...dialog box displays 2 Choose from one of the following options Select a fabric from the Fabric list Select a router from the Routing list Requires Fabric OS 6 2 or later 3 Select the source and desti...

Page 1107: ...s Out Port Slot Port Bandwidth Gb sec Cost Fabric OS only Reverse Route This tab shows the path from the destination port to the source port This tab contains the same path details as the Forward Rout...

Page 1108: ...e Ports table and select Expand All b Select the ports source and destination for which you want to confirm device sharing from the Available Device Ports table To add a detached device to troubleshoo...

Page 1109: ...lowing steps 1 Select Monitor Troubleshooting FC Fabric Device Sharing The Fabric Device Sharing Diagnosis dialog box displays 2 Select the fabrics two or more for which you want to confirm device sha...

Page 1110: ...e Diagnostic Port Test dialog box displays 2 Select the ports for which you want to run a diagnostic port test from the Available Ports table You can only run 10 diagnostic port tests at a time If you...

Page 1111: ...e tests fail the Management application does not rollback to already executed operations When the test successfully completes the Management application performs the following operations to change the...

Page 1112: ...rt slot_number port_number of the switch switch_IP_address Reason CAL_error_message Disable the diagnostic mode on source or destination D ports Disabled diagnostic mode on port slot_number port_numbe...

Page 1113: ...Reverse Optical Loopback Test Reverse Optical Loopback Test failed Roundtrip link latency Roundtrip link latency numerical_value nano seconds Buffers required Buffers required numerical_value Link Tra...

Page 1114: ...credit recovery CR during the D Port test Clear to disable default 7 Click OK on the Link Traffic Test Configuration dialog box The Diagnostic Port Test dialog box displays Return to step 5 of Troubl...

Page 1115: ...ckets Received The number of received responses Packets Lost Equal to the number of packets sent minus the number of packets received Packet Lost percentage The number of packets lost expressed as a p...

Page 1116: ...field 6 Click OK The IP Traceroute Result dialog box displays Traceroute sends three ICMP Ping packets to the destination address with a time to live TTL of one hop and expects a TTL Expired error bac...

Page 1117: ...ult dialog box displays TABLE 83 IP Trace Details Field or Component Description Hop Number The TTL inserted in the transmitted probe packet IP Address 1 The IP address of the system that responded to...

Page 1118: ...Close on the IP Performance Result dialog box 8 Click Cancel on the IP Performance dialog box Field Component Description Available Bandwidth The average bytes per second sent during the sample inter...

Page 1119: ...ice with a feature called Top Talkers Gather and display real time performance data Switch Ports FC Switch Ports GE Switch Ports 10 GE ISL Ports E_Port Trunks end to end Monitors FCIP Tunnels device P...

Page 1120: ...installed SFPs Rx Power Available in dBm for installed SFPs Tx Power Available in dBm for installed SFPs Temperature Available in Centigrade for installed SFPs Voltage Available in mVolts for installe...

Page 1121: ...ly Window Size RTT Available for FCIP tunnels only TCP Out of Order Segments Available for FCIP tunnels only Slow Start Status Available for FCIP tunnels only Uncompressed Tx Rx MB sec Available for F...

Page 1122: ...ded in access control list FCRRouter admin snmpconfig show accesscontrol SNMP access list configuration Entry 0 Access host subnet area 172 26 1 86 rw Entry 1 No access host configured yet Entry 2 No...

Page 1123: ...rigEquipMfr Trap Recipient s IP address 172 26 24 26 Trap recipient Severity level 0 5 4 Trap recipient Port 0 65535 162 Community rw custom Trap Recipient s IP address 172 26 1 158 Trap recipient Sev...

Page 1124: ...mpuser1 Auth Protocol MD5 1 SHA 2 noAuth 3 1 3 3 Priv Protocol DES 1 noPriv 2 3DES 3 AES128 4 AES2 5 AES256 6 2 2 2 User ro snmpuser2 Auth Protocol MD5 1 SHA 2 noAuth 3 1 3 3 Priv Protocol DES 1 noPri...

Page 1125: ...P security level snmpconfig set secLevel 0 Select SNMP GET Security Level 0 No security 1 Authentication only 2 Authentication and Privacy 3 No Access 0 3 0 To collect performance data for GE ports an...

Page 1126: ...trunks 10GE_Ports and FCIP tunnels You can use real time performance monitoring to configure the following options Select the polling rate from 10 seconds up to 1 minute Select up to 100 ports total f...

Page 1127: ...nce data on page 1076 If you selected a fabric or a device the Realtime Port Selector dialog box displays as shown in Figure 474 Continue with step 2 FIGURE 474 Realtime Port Selector dialog box NOTE...

Page 1128: ...og box displays Filtering real time performance data To filter real time performance data from the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box complete the following steps 1 Open the Real Time Performance...

Page 1129: ...Additional Measures area Measures A list for each selected measure in the Measures list or Additional Measures area Granularity The selected granularity for collecting data Source Fabric The source fa...

Page 1130: ...e data Performance monitoring should be enabled constantly to receive the necessary historical data required for a meaningful report The following options and features are available for obtaining hist...

Page 1131: ...e collection for selected fabrics To enable historical performance collection for selected fabrics complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Performance Historical Data Collection The Fabric Selec...

Page 1132: ...newly discovered fabrics to the Selected list 6 Click OK Historical performance data collection is enabled for all selected fabrics NOTE After enabling historical data collection information for swit...

Page 1133: ...the SAN Generating and saving a historical performance graph The Historical Performance Graph is available through the SAN tab or through the IP tab if you select SAN devices If selecting through the...

Page 1134: ...a favorite If you select Custom refer to Filtering data by time on page 1084 d Select the granularity at which you want to gather performance data from the Granularity list 5 minutes for last 8 days 3...

Page 1135: ...e graph display right click in the graph and select the following options Select Zoom In to zoom in on the graph Select Zoom Out to zoom out on the graph Select Fit in window to fit the graph in the w...

Page 1136: ...ess Ctrl or Shift and then click to select multiple ports from which you want to gather performance data from the Available list and click the right arrow button NOTE For E_Port trunks the port node c...

Page 1137: ...box displays as shown in Figure 479 on page 1085 Perform one of the following steps Select the Last option and enter the number of minutes hours or days that you want to monitor Select the From option...

Page 1138: ...ile location where you want to save the performance data 4 Enter a name for the file and click Save Deleting a favorite graph configuration To delete a favorite historical performance graph configurat...

Page 1139: ...ing EE_MONITOR_STATS and TE_PORT_STATS view names are used to extract data similar to the 11 3 0 database schema from the server with the version greater than or equal to 12 0 0 Refer to Appendix H Da...

Page 1140: ...erval2 RX FC SNMP 1 3 6 1 3 94 4 5 1 7 RX delta value1 1000 1000 polling interval2 TX GE SNMP 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 10 TX delta value1 1000 1000 polling interval2 RX GE SNMP 1 3 6 1 2 1 31 1 1 1 6 RX d...

Page 1141: ...etrieved between two consecutive polling cycles 2 The duration between two polling cycle in seconds 3 Additional performance counters are detailed in Table 84 TABLE 84 Performance statistic counters C...

Page 1142: ...End to end monitoring requires a Fabric OS device An end to end monitor and a Top Talker monitor cannot be configured on the same fabric or external F_Port application specific integrated circuit ASI...

Page 1143: ...nced Performance Monitor license Performance monitoring enables you to provision end to end monitors of selected target and initiator pairs These monitors are persisted in the database and are enabled...

Page 1144: ...se the legacy End to End Monitor feature you must deactivate existing flows defined for the switch for Flow Vision NOTE Either the initiator device or the target device must have an Advanced Performan...

Page 1145: ...tions To use Flow Vision delete existing monitors then use the Add Flow Definition dialog box to define an initiator and target port pair for monitoring Refer to Chapter 29 Flow Vision for more inform...

Page 1146: ...low Vision to provide End to End monitoring You have these options To use Flow Vision delete existing monitors then use the Add Flow Definition dialog box to define an initiator and target port pair f...

Page 1147: ...oring Refer to Chapter 29 Flow Vision for more information Clicking OK opens the legacy Top Talkers dialog box To use the legacy Top Talkers feature you must deactivate existing flows defined for the...

Page 1148: ...Vision for more information Clicking OK opens the legacy Top Talkers dialog box To use the legacy Top Talkers feature you must deactivate existing flows defined for the switch for Flow Vision Here ar...

Page 1149: ...ay list 7 Select how often you want the Top Talker to refresh 10 20 30 40 or 50 seconds or 1 minute from the Refresh Interval list 8 Click Apply The top 20 conversations display in the Current Top Tal...

Page 1150: ...e configured on the same fabric or external F_Port application specific integrated circuit ASIC You must delete the end to end monitor before you configure the Top Talker monitor Launching a fabric mo...

Page 1151: ...s dialog box To use the legacy Top Talkers feature you must deactivate existing flows defined for the switch for Flow Vision To delete Top Talker monitors use the following steps 1 Select the dialog b...

Page 1152: ...or device port and then select Monitor Performance Top Talkers a message displays that you can use Flow Vision to provide Top Talkers monitoring You have these options To use Flow Vision delete exist...

Page 1153: ...r the fabric Using the zone setup and Top Talkers you can also determine which flows are destined to any affected F_Ports You configure bottleneck detection on a per fabric or per switch basis with pe...

Page 1154: ...o the DCB side and does not monitor traffic going in the reverse direction Enabling bottleneck alerts and configuring alert parameters Bottleneck detection is enabled on a switch or fabric basis It en...

Page 1155: ...Window value you should use a setting that is 300 seconds or higher If you change the alert parameters for a port you can later cancel these settings and inherit the settings from the switch Refer to...

Page 1156: ...1 year 7 Select one or more fabrics switches or ports from the Products Ports list You can select fabrics or switches or ports but you cannot select a mix of fabrics switches and ports 8 Click the ri...

Page 1157: ...From Switch 4 Select the Alerts check box to enable alerts Clear this check box to disable alerts The bottleneck parameters that are specified for the switch are applied to the port 5 Click OK or Appl...

Page 1158: ...last 150 minutes with display intervals of 10 60 and 300 seconds Click Refresh to update the displayed data with fresh data If you change the display interval or display range you must click Refresh...

Page 1159: ...ly to save your changes Thresholds and event notification Performance monitoring allows you to apply thresholds and event notification to real time performance data A performance monitor process threa...

Page 1160: ...atch Performance Thresholds The Set Threshold Policies dialog box displays as shown in Figure 485 on page 1108 FIGURE 485 Set Threshold Policies dialog box NOTE Policies set for switches enabled for M...

Page 1161: ...ort and FL_Ports 5 Select a measure from the Measure list You can only define policies for the Tx Utilization and Rx Utilization measures You cannot add the same measure more than once If you try to a...

Page 1162: ...s table with an added icon 13 Click OK on the Set Threshold Policies dialog box The Confirm Threshold Changes dialog box displays as shown in Figure 488 on page 1110 FIGURE 488 Confirm Threshold Chang...

Page 1163: ...licy to a fabric and a M EOS logical switch is present in the fabric the policy is not assigned to the M EOS logical switch You must directly assign a policy to a M EOS physical chassis When you direc...

Page 1164: ...esholds check box To overwrite all existing thresholds on all fabrics and devices select the Overwrite all thresholds currently set on all switches check box 7 Click OK on the Confirm Threshold Change...

Page 1165: ...d historical data collection the Utilization Legend displays in the main interface window If you have not already enabled historical data collection a message appears informing you that you must enabl...

Page 1166: ...ain window There is a 5 minute delay before the values are displayed Disabling connection utilization To turn off the connection utilization choose one of the following options while connection utiliz...

Page 1167: ...lect Zoom Out to zoom out on the graph Select Fit in window to fit the graph in the window Select Go to Latest to go to the latest data point on the graph Select the Use Logarithmic Axis check box to...

Page 1168: ...val granularity 6 Historical graphs and monitors only Select one of the following options from the Granularity list to set the granularity of the data point to display on the graph 5 minutes 30 minute...

Page 1169: ...or non logarithmic axis Each unit in a non logarithmic axis presents the data in equal segments However logarithmic axis units are not equal and can increase exponentially by 10 Therefore use a logar...

Page 1170: ...nts received during the chart time range and master log events logged on the same product as the measure being plotted Each event will be represented by the same severity icon that is shown in the mas...

Page 1171: ...last 30 minutes to the last 6 hours Historical options are incremental from the last 30 minutes to the last 24 hours Historical graphs and monitors only Select Absolute time to get a snapshot of data...

Page 1172: ...and the graph area 3 Use the Show selector to toggle the tree structure display in the left panel between Products and Collectibles Select Products and the left panel displays the tree structure of de...

Page 1173: ...page 1747 Enabling a historical data collector on page 1749 Adding or editing a historical data collector on page 1749 5 Optional To configure the look and feel of the performance graph from the Hist...

Page 1174: ...nt and messages Collector The data collector name Status The status field uses the following icons Last Value The last most current value collected Last Time Polled The time that the collector was las...

Page 1175: ...mouse to the left or right to the other edge of the area The area you selected changes color Release the right mouse button to zoom the selected area Highlighting Place the mouse over a data point Inf...

Page 1176: ...1124 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 SAN connection utilization 28...

Page 1177: ...n capability is also useful for testing the internal connections on a switch before deploying the switch into a production environment NOTE You cannot run Flow Vision and Advanced Performance Monitor...

Page 1178: ...sk for the source and destination end devices which enables Flow Vision to learn all of the source and destination device pairs passing through the switch through a specified ingress or egress port wi...

Page 1179: ...w Monitor flow on page 1149 Flow Generator Flow Generator simulates and generates test load traffic in specific flows this allows you to validate hardware components connectivity and verify performanc...

Page 1180: ...meters These include the following parameters source device identifier port ID or WWN destination device identifier port address or WWN LUN or frame type At least one frame parameter must be present t...

Page 1181: ...n Table 88 identify the parameters that can be used to define a flow Flow frame type parameters Frame monitoring can be performed for a variety of frames using predefined frame type parameters To acce...

Page 1182: ...meter is valid only for Flow Mirror It implicitly assumes bidirectional flow and looks for both SCSI command and status frames scsigoodstatus Only SCSI status frames with status marked as good all 0s...

Page 1183: ...any one port In addition there are individual limits for each Flow Vision feature Table 92 lists these limits When you create a flow Flow Vision verifies that there is no identical active flow Refer...

Page 1184: ...ow and then reactivate it to use the new zone values Flow Generator allocates the first four flows per source ID to zoned destination IDs The rest of the destination IDs are not tested For learned flo...

Page 1185: ...ed in the Flow Definitions table For more information refer to Monitoring a Flow Monitor flow on page 1149 Monitoring a Flow Generator flow on page 1184 or Monitoring a Flow Mirror flow on page 1194 M...

Page 1186: ...over the selected time duration This field updates dynamically every 5 minutes with the violation count received from MAPS Target Switch The switch on which you created the flow definition Frame Type...

Page 1187: ...ructions refer to Customizing Flow Generator flows on page 1183 Destination The port number of the destination device defined in the flow definition An asterisk indicates learned flows Destination Inf...

Page 1188: ...ck the right arrow button to display the selected flow in the Flows table For more information about the summary data that displays for each flow type refer to Monitoring a Flow Monitor flow on page 1...

Page 1189: ...Select the device on which you defined the flow and select Monitor Fabric Vision Flow Monitor The Flow Vision dialog box displays pre populated with a list of all defined flows in the Flow Definitions...

Page 1190: ...ed on the host you can monitor Virtual Machine VM to LUN level performance Capturing statistics for specified flows which provides insights into application performance These statistics include transm...

Page 1191: ...s You cannot use the LUN and Bidirectional parameters in a flow definition You cannot use the Frame Type LUN and Bidirectional parameters for learned flows Flow creation is not allowed if Advanced Per...

Page 1192: ...port Initiator port Target port Switch that supports Flow Vision 2 Select Monitor Fabric Vision Flow Add NOTE You can also right click on any of these objects in the Connectivity Map or Product List a...

Page 1193: ...ion Source to Destination Select to define the flow direction from an ingress port to an egress port or a source device in traffic to a destination device out traffic Bidirectional Select to define th...

Page 1194: ...an asterisk to use any port To select the destination port from a list refer to Selecting an end device port from a list of available device ports on page 1144 12 Optional If you want to swap source...

Page 1195: ...e fabric ID or virtual fabric ID in the Destination field Enter an asterisk to use any port To select the destination from a list refer to Selecting a fabric or virtual fabric ID from a list of availa...

Page 1196: ...ches list and click the right arrow to move to the Selected Switch list Move the switch back to the Available Switches list by clicking the left arrow 4 Click OK on the Select Switch dialog box The se...

Page 1197: ...Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 1145 53 1003154 01 Flow Monitor 29 FIGURE 498 Select Device Ports dialog box Products and Ports selected FIGURE 499 Select Device Port dialog box Zones selected...

Page 1198: ...eld Selecting an ingress or egress port from a list of available switch ports To select the ingress or egress port for the switch complete the following steps 1 Click the ellipses button to the right...

Page 1199: ...anded to display all supported fabrics in the Available Products list Unsupported products do not display in the Available Products list FIGURE 500 Select Fabric ID dialog box 2 Select a fabric or vir...

Page 1200: ...field The Select Mirror Port dialog box displays expanded to display all unoccupied loopback and mirror ports for the target switch in the Available list Unsupported ports do not display in the Avail...

Page 1201: ...he left arrow 3 Click OK on the Select LUN dialog box The selected LUN ID displays in the LUN field Monitoring a Flow Monitor flow To view the summary data for a Flow Monitor flow complete the followi...

Page 1202: ...uct List or Topology Map by right clicking a sub flow in the Flows table and selecting Locate port_type where port_type is Ingress port Egress port Source device or Destination device Highlights inact...

Page 1203: ...ated the flow definition Frame Type All frame types defined in the flow definition Flow Name The user defined name for the flow definition Source The source identifiers defined in the flow definition...

Page 1204: ...in the last data point for the flow Receive Frame Rate f s The receive frame rate in frames per second as reported in the last data point for the flow Transmit Word Count MB The transmitted word coun...

Page 1205: ...using virtual port IDs on page 1166 Monitoring LUN level statistics A common use of flow monitors is to monitor traffic flowing from a particular ingress port to a specified LUN The following example...

Page 1206: ...WN of the source port in the Destination field 6 Enter the LUN identifier 4 in the LUN field 7 Click OK The Flow Vision dialog box displays with the new flow definition highlighted 8 Select OK to save...

Page 1207: ...ed in the Flow Definitions table To review the sub flow data for the selected flow refer to Monitoring a Flow Monitor flow on page 1149 Configuring a learned flow The following example illustrates usi...

Page 1208: ...Vision Flow Add The Add Flow Definition dialog box displays with the following criteria and flow identifiers pre populated Feature Monitor Direction Bidirectional Source Device Source identifier 02d8...

Page 1209: ...name cannot be over 20 characters and can only include alphanumeric characters or underscores NOTE For a physical switch the name must be unique However for logical switches the name does not have to...

Page 1210: ...l Source Device Source identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 41 2 Enter a name ingresstt for the flow definition in the Name field The name cann...

Page 1211: ...ur flows one for each member of the trunk group 1 Right click the trunk master or slave port on which you want to monitor a flow and select Fabric Vision Flow Add The Add Flow Definition dialog box di...

Page 1212: ...ata for the entire trunk group is stored on the master port If the master port changes the data is transferred to the new master port You cannot display Flow statistics for slave trunk ports To review...

Page 1213: ...present the flow definitions with the End Device mode set to WWN In Figure 505 the physical devices are A B and C and have the port WWNs a b and c respectively FIGURE 505 FC router fabric example In F...

Page 1214: ...vice an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2e_src_dcx_wwn for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only inc...

Page 1215: ...evice an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2e_dst_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only includ...

Page 1216: ...n asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name b2e_dst_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only include alpha...

Page 1217: ...an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2b_src_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only include alph...

Page 1218: ...vices are Device A B C A B and C representing the physical devices A B and C respectively FIGURE 507 FC router fabric Figure 508 provides the physical port address PID fabric identifier FID and virtua...

Page 1219: ...ice Source identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2e_src_dcx_pid for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be...

Page 1220: ...vice Source identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Egress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2e_src_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be ove...

Page 1221: ...ce identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Egress port port number 219 2 Enter a name b2e_dst_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 char...

Page 1222: ...ource identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port port number 219 2 Enter a name e2b_src_dcx for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20...

Page 1223: ...er 219 2 Enter a name e2b_src_dcx_fid for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only include alphanumeric characters or underscores NOTE For a physical sw...

Page 1224: ...Enter a name e2e_src_dcx_fid for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only include alphanumeric characters or underscores NOTE For a physical switch the...

Page 1225: ...ic characters or underscores NOTE For a physical switch the name must be unique However for logical switches the name does not have to be unique 3 Select the Source to Destination option for Direction...

Page 1226: ...ion dialog box displays with the following default criteria and flow identifiers pre populated Feature Monitor Direction Bidirectional Source Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Destination...

Page 1227: ...1 Right click the XISL E_Port on which you want to monitor the flow and select Fabric Vision Flow Add The Add Flow Definition dialog box displays with the following default criteria and flow identifi...

Page 1228: ...asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress Egress port XISL E_Port number 2 Enter a name learned_dcx_xisl for the flow definition in the Name field The name cannot be over 20 characters and can only...

Page 1229: ...his use case CAUTION You should not use Flow Generator in an active production environment as the Flow Generator traffic can saturate the links and will impact the production traffic sharing the same...

Page 1230: ...ngress port and egress port must all be local The destination device can be local or remote however if you define the destination device and egress port both must refer to the same destination and mus...

Page 1231: ...llows you to enable Enabling SIM Port mode on page 1180 and disable Disabling SIM Port mode on page 1181 SIM Ports that are on the same ASIC as those active ports Flow Generator generates traffic matc...

Page 1232: ...a port is configured with CSCTL_mode enabled you cannot configure it as a SIM Port If a port has an Ingress Rate Limit set you can configure it as a SIM Port Enabling SIM Port mode Prior to creating a...

Page 1233: ...rection Bidirectional Source Device Source identifier Destination Device an asterisk allows you to use any port Ingress port SIM Port number 3 Enter a name for the flow definition in the Name field Th...

Page 1234: ...evice port from a list of available device ports on page 1144 13 Optional If you want to swap source and destination device port information click swap 14 Select one of the following format options fo...

Page 1235: ...fabric ID from a list of available products on page 1147 20 Enter a LUN ID in the LUN field or click the ellipsis button to select a LUN ID from the list LUN IDs can be from 0 through 65535 To select...

Page 1236: ...h produces a random pattern of alphanumeric ASCII characters with a variable string length 6 Click OK to save your changes and return to the Flow Vision dialog box Monitoring a Flow Generator flow To...

Page 1237: ...and selecting Locate port_type where port_type is Ingress port Egress port Source device or Destination device Highlight inactive sub flows in gray by selecting the Show inactive flows check box Inact...

Page 1238: ...me for the source device The device name is a hyperlink Click to launch the device s property sheet This field is empty if the source device is not defined in the flow definition Destination The port...

Page 1239: ...flow Generator Percent Complete of the Curent run percentage The percentage completion of the current run reported in the last data point received for the flow Ingress Port The ingress port defined in...

Page 1240: ...finition activates the Flow Vision dialog box displays with the new flow selected highlighted in the Flow Definitions table To review the sub flow data for the selected flow refer to Monitoring a Flow...

Page 1241: ...ghlighted in the Flow Definitions table To review the sub flow data for the selected flow refer to Monitoring a Flow Generator flow on page 1184 To configure the frame payload size and pattern for the...

Page 1242: ...you to mirror a flow to a specific port which is present on the same physical switch on which you defined the flow You can create a Flow Mirror flow by creating a copy of the flow you want to examine...

Page 1243: ...creation is not allowed if Advanced Performance Monitor APM or Port Mirroring is enabled Similarly APM and Port Mirroring related operations are not be allowed if any flow active or defined is presen...

Page 1244: ...ld The Select Switch dialog box displays To manually set the Target Switch refer to Selecting the target switch from a list of Fabric Vision capable switches on page 1144 9 Select one of the following...

Page 1245: ...switch When you enter a value in the Ingress or Egress fields a port information field displays beneath with the port label based on your topology layout settings refer to Changing the port label on p...

Page 1246: ...ect a frame type from a list refer to Selecting a mirror port from a list of available ports on page 1148 21 Enter a LUN ID in the LUN field or click the ellipsis button to select a LUN ID from the li...

Page 1247: ...the selected flows The Flows table has the following general characteristics and functions Data updates dynamically every 5 minutes Sort the table by clicking any column head You can reverse the sort...

Page 1248: ...The sub flow database identifier Target Switch The switch on which you created the flow definition Frame Type All frame types defined in the flow definition Flow Name The user defined name for the flo...

Page 1249: ...r 1 20 Mirrored Frames Count frames The number of mirrored frames as reported in the last data point received for the flow Mirrored Transmit Frames frames The number of transmitted mirrored frames as...

Page 1250: ...st click the ellipsis button Refer to Flow frame type parameters on page 1129 for a list of the supported frame type parameters 10 Click OK to save the flow definition When the flow definition activat...

Page 1251: ...reation 8 Enter an asterisk in the Destination field 9 Enter the frame type abts in the Frame Type field To select a frame type from a list click the ellipsis button Refer to Flow frame type parameter...

Page 1252: ...tures check box to immediately activate the flow after creation 8 Enter the port address 0x010200 in the Source field 9 Enter the port address 0x040500 in the Destination field 10 Click OK to save the...

Page 1253: ...ame Type field To select a frame type from a list click the ellipsis button Refer to Flow frame type parameters on page 1129 for a list of the supported frame type parameters 10 Click OK to save the f...

Page 1254: ...Frame Type field To select a frame type from a list click the ellipsis button Refer to Flow frame type parameters on page 1129 for a list of the supported frame type parameters 11 Click OK to save th...

Page 1255: ...ld or click the ellipsis button to select a port from the list Only supported on 16 Gbps capable ports on devices running Fabric OS 7 3 or later To select a port from a list refer to Selecting a mirro...

Page 1256: ...0 or later Storage Port Learn Flows to Storage Supported Not Supported v7 2 0 or later Monitor All Flows to Storage Supported Supported v7 2 0 or later Learn Flows on Port Supported Not Supported v7...

Page 1257: ...FIGURE 516 List of preconfigured flow templates The Add Flow predefined_flow dialog box displays as shown in Figure 517 F_Ports connected to an initiator or target Learn Flows from Host Supported Not...

Page 1258: ...any port To select the source port from a list refer to Selecting an end device port from a list of available device ports on page 1144 6 Enter the port ID or WWN of the destination port in the Destin...

Page 1259: ...ys in the Details area To review the sub flow data for the selected flow refer to Monitoring flows on page 1133 TABLE 99 Flows Definitions table fields and components Field and components Description...

Page 1260: ...e predefined monitor type Static Flow Use this Add Flow Definition Static Flow dialog box to define bidirectiornal Monitor flow between a source and a destination device Refer to Configuring Static Fl...

Page 1261: ...ed flow name and the format is portname _ last 4 digits of the source device WWN _ last 4 digits of the destination device WWN 2 Select one of the following format options for Device View list Port Ad...

Page 1262: ...alog box 5 Click Start to deploy the flow definitions 6 View additional details for a deployed flow definition by selecting the flow defintion in the Flow Definitions Status table The reason for suces...

Page 1263: ...on device details as shown in Figure 522 FIGURE 522 Add Flow Definition Aggregated Flow template dialog box Perfom the following steps in the Add Flow Definition Aggregated Flow dialog box The default...

Page 1264: ...ame Type Monitoring template dialog box Perfom the following steps in the Add Flow Definition Frame Type Monitoring dialog box The default Device View is Port Address 1 The Flow Name field is filled w...

Page 1265: ...st 4 digits of the source device WWN _ last 4 digits of the destination device WWN 2 Click the ellipsis button next to the LUN Monitoring field to configure LUN ID Continue from step 2 through step 6...

Page 1266: ...on a 16 Gbps capable FC device otherwise empty Direction Bidirectional 4 Complete the flow definition using one of the following procedures Creating a Flow Monitor flow definition on page 1140 Creati...

Page 1267: ...lected Options and fields populated E_Port Target Switch Selected switch Source Device if port is on a 16 Gbps switch otherwise empty Destination Device if port is on a 16 Gbps switch otherwise empty...

Page 1268: ...flow definition on page 1140 Creating a Flow Generator flow definition on page 1181 Creating a Flow Mirror flow definition on page 1191 TABLE 101 Add Flow Definition dialog box options populated per...

Page 1269: ...e Route row selection Row selected Options populated First row where In Port Address is the destination device port s connected switch port address Target Switch Switch of selected row Source Device i...

Page 1270: ...ith Flow Vision You can create a flow definition based on port connectivity data For more information about port connectivity refer to Viewing port connectivity on page 701 Creating a port connectivit...

Page 1271: ...defined performance monitor Configuring a user defined traffic flow performance monitor on page 434 Figure 525 shows a flow performance monitor FIGURE 525 Flow performance monitor Target Target Switc...

Page 1272: ...cut menu right click a device or port and select Fabric Vision Flow Historical Graph or Real Time Graph If you select Real Time Graph using a port that does not have any flows the following message di...

Page 1273: ...e column in Additional Measures table and click Add Flow button to launch Add flow dialog box to define flows Refer to Creating a Flow Monitor flow definition on page 1140 for more information Replaci...

Page 1274: ...SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Flow Vision interoperability with other features 29 To continue using the legacy End to End feature you must deactivate existing flows defined for the switch refer to Dea...

Page 1275: ...itted through a port Each frame monitor keeps a timestamp of its last refresh It also keeps a generation count which is incremented each time the monitor is cleared Frame monitors generate alerts when...

Page 1276: ...up to four values to compare against each offset If more than one offset is required to properly define a filter the bytes found at each offset must match one of the given values for the filter to in...

Page 1277: ...oring license is required to configure frame monitors The monitoring functionality requires the Fabric Watch license The maximum number of frame monitors and offsets per port is platform specific Refe...

Page 1278: ...Products Ports list The Monitors list displays all of the frame monitors defined for that switch 7 Select one or more ports You must select only ports belonging to the same switch 8 Select one or more...

Page 1279: ...one or more switches in the Products Monitors list and click the right arrow button to assign the frame monitor to those switches If the frame monitor already exists on the switches the frame monitor...

Page 1280: ...assigned 1 Select Monitor Fabric Watch Frame Monitor The Frame Monitor dialog box displays 2 Select the Port option 3 Select a switch in the Products Ports list The Monitors list displays all of the...

Page 1281: ...types 1 Select Monitor Fabric Watch Frame Monitor The Frame Monitor dialog box displays 2 Select the Switch option The Products Monitors list displays the switches that support Frame Monitoring 3 Exp...

Page 1282: ...1230 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Removing a frame monitor from a switch 30...

Page 1283: ...ing a configuration policy manager report 1249 Viewing historical reports for all configuration policy managers 1253 Viewing historical reports for a configuration policy manager 1253 Policy monitor o...

Page 1284: ...zone database and complicate other ongoing administrative tasks Rule Violation Fix If the policy monitor report shows a violation the Administrator can use the Zoning dialog box Configure Zoning Fabri...

Page 1285: ...ation policy managers Switch and router configuration policy managers enable you to set the following configuration policy managers on switches and routers Check connections redundant connections to n...

Page 1286: ...c or device If a fabric or switch fails the Management application cannot provide notification log or support data Therefore you may not realize that there is an inconsistency between the physical dev...

Page 1287: ...e device Remove SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 settings on the device if configured Check for MAPS actions enabled SAN only This switch and router configuration policy manager enables you to determine whether the...

Page 1288: ...Brocade HBAs on the host Make sure you discover the associated fabrics Rule Violation Fix If the configuration policy manager report shows a violation the Administrator can add a host connection to ad...

Page 1289: ...he server backup is enabled and working This management configuration policy manager enables you to determine if backup is enabled for the Management application server and if the backup output direct...

Page 1290: ...tus at a glance by providing a configuration policy manager status icon on the status bar Table 105 illustrates and describes the icons that indicate the current status of the configuration policy man...

Page 1291: ...status icon display in the status bar when the monitor fails or partially fails Frequency The frequency one time hourly daily weekly or monthly at which the policy is scheduled Next Run The time the...

Page 1292: ...on page 1249 8 To view the report history for all configuration policy managers click History refer to Viewing historical reports for a configuration policy manager on page 1253 9 To view the report...

Page 1293: ...ld The name must be unique It cannot be over 64 characters nor can the field be empty It cannot include asterisks 4 Enter a description of the policy in the Description field The description cannot be...

Page 1294: ...tions refer to Fabric policy monitors on page 1232 b Select the Check that all zones belong to at least one zone config check box to determine if there are orphaned zones in the fabric zone database F...

Page 1295: ...ents to this server to determine if the Management application server is registered as an SNMP recipient and syslog recipient Select the Check for redundant connections to neighboring switches SAN onl...

Page 1296: ...nnections allowed between a switch pair in the Minimum Connections field The default recommended is 2 Valid values are from 2 through 512 d If you selected the Check for MAPS action parameter dialog c...

Page 1297: ...Hosts list and click the right arrow button NOTE You can use the All Host target in the Available Hosts list for future provisioning Select All Hosts and click the right arrow button to apply this po...

Page 1298: ...e is from 00 through 59 and the day or night value is AM or PM 3 Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar 4 Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box To finish configuring the confi...

Page 1299: ...e the following steps 1 Select Monthly from the Frequency list 2 Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time hh mm lists Where the hour value is from 1 through 12 the minute value...

Page 1300: ...Configuration Policy Manager The Configuration Policy Manager dialog box displays 2 Select the policy you want to delete in the Monitors list 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes on the confirmation message 5...

Page 1301: ...ng SAN reports on page 1404 5 Click the close button X on the Policy_Name Configuration Policy Manager Report browser window 6 Click Close on the Configuration Policy Manager dialog box Viewing a conf...

Page 1302: ...information is included in the report data for each policy check Management Check Displays the status of the management check The management check provides the following information Name Name of the...

Page 1303: ...tional detail for this check SSH Status Whether SSH is enabled or disabled on the product Telnet Status Whether Telnet is enabled or disabled on the product Switch Check for SNMPv3 secure SNMP configu...

Page 1304: ...d Unknown Displays the Host name and status of the policy check for the following option Host Check for at least Configured_Minimum_Value connections to attached fabrics Host Check for connections thr...

Page 1305: ...49 4 Click the close button X on the Policy_Name Configuration Policy Manager Report browser window 5 Click Close on the Report History dialog box Viewing historical reports for a configuration policy...

Page 1306: ...1254 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Viewing historical reports for a configuration policy manager 31...

Page 1307: ...ou to monitor your managed SAN and IP networks using the following methods Listen forward and process SNMP traps for SAN and IP devices which eliminates the need to poll devices for events Receive and...

Page 1308: ...nt notification The Management application records the SAN and IP events in the Master Log You can configure the application to send event notifications to e mail addresses at certain time intervals T...

Page 1309: ...server in the SMTP Password field NOTE The SMTP Password field is optional unless the SMTP server enables authentication 8 Enter the sender s e mail address in the Reply Address field 9 Enter the leng...

Page 1310: ...on the selected events for a user complete the following steps 1 Select Server Users The Users dialog box displays 2 Select a user in the Users list and click Edit The Edit User dialog box displays 3...

Page 1311: ...ed Event Category and Severity to be displayed list You can move any or all event categories 8 Select at least one severity for each event Severity options include Emergency Alert Critical Error Warni...

Page 1312: ...pe you want to include from the Event Category list All event types are listed in alphabetical order b Select the event column for the event from the Event Column list All event columns are listed in...

Page 1313: ...h even events that were filtered using advanced filtering criteria To view events for a selected device complete the following steps 1 Right click a switch from the device tree or connectivity map 2 S...

Page 1314: ...switches complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor SNMP Setup Product Trap Recipients The SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box shown in Figure 538 displays FIGURE 538 SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box 2...

Page 1315: ...ipient from one or more switches complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor SNMP Setup Product Trap Recipients The SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box shown in Figure 538 displays 2 Click Remove from t...

Page 1316: ...igure destinations for forwarding SNMP traps To add a trap destination complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor SNMP Setup Trap Forwarding The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box shown in Figure 539...

Page 1317: ...elected the Open View Source Name is added to the variable binding varbind value to the trap before forwarding 7 Select a supported SNMP type from the Trap Forwarding Type list Supported SNMP types ar...

Page 1318: ...ion of the trap filter in the Description field 5 Select the Forward Application Messages check box to forward application events 6 Select the Forward pseudo events check box to forward pseudo events...

Page 1319: ...After limiting the list of available traps expand the MIB folder to which the trap you want belongs under the Available Trap Type list and select that trap Click the right arrow button to move it to...

Page 1320: ...ed the Management application will not receive any SNMP v1 and v2c traps Accept SNMP v1 v2c traps with any community string Use this option to turn on receiving SNMP v1 and v2c traps with any communit...

Page 1321: ...For configurations that do not have authentication or privacy the Management application uses the user name to match for authentication TABLE 106 SNMP security and authentication SNMP credential type...

Page 1322: ...Password field and re type the password in the Confirm Priv Password field 9 Click OK Adding an SNMP v1 or v2c community string The SNMP v1 2 Community String dialog box allows you to add the SNMP v1...

Page 1323: ...and add the MIB information to the document When adding the MIB information be aware of the following rules MIBs are compiled in the order that they are listed in the mibs_to_compile txt file You can...

Page 1324: ...following steps 1 Select Monitor SNMP Setup Event Reception 2 Click the Trap Configuration tab The Trap Configuration tab of the Event Reception dialog box shown in Figure 545 displays The Registered...

Page 1325: ...er to indicate the varbind You must enter a message c Enter an alias string that serves as a second name for the trap in the MIB Alias field This string might be more understandable to users This para...

Page 1326: ...If the trap has been customized a button labeled Default is available Click Default to revert the previous changes to its default SNMP informs The SNMP Informs dialog box allows you to enable or disab...

Page 1327: ...lication server as the syslog recipient on all managed SAN and IP products The syslog listening port number is 514 by default If you change the port number from 514 auto registration is disabled NOTE...

Page 1328: ...cannot be registered 5 Select the fabric or switches from the Available list and click the right arrow button to move it to the Selected list You can select multiple products 6 Click OK The Management...

Page 1329: ...og forwarding destination The Add Syslog Destination dialog box allows you to configure destinations for forwarding syslog events To add a syslog destination complete the following steps 1 Select Moni...

Page 1330: ...d all syslogs whether the source is managed or unmanaged If the Syslog Repeater check box is unselected syslogs from the managed products are sent to the server If no filter is selected then syslogs f...

Page 1331: ...sage that contains abc 7 Select a severity level from the Severity pulldown menu The severity level can be one of the following and appear in descending order of severity Emergency Alert Critical Erro...

Page 1332: ...ducts they are to be monitored how often they are to be monitored and what to do when the monitored events are generated This information can be defined by creating an event action definition For exam...

Page 1333: ...e to the Events pane Selecting an event for an event action To select an event for an event action complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Event Processing Event Actions The Event Actions dialog...

Page 1334: ...lias if you want the aliases for the traps to be displayed Use the Trap Filter tool to limit the trap list to the trap severities you want To use this tool click the Filter button to display the Trap...

Page 1335: ...vents pane of the Add Event Action dialog box This enables you to configure filters on varbind values for this event action NOTE Varbind filter configuration is only available if you selected Traps in...

Page 1336: ...f the Add Event Action dialog box displays Proceed to Selecting source address products and ports Selecting source address products and ports The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box shown...

Page 1337: ...t of a product otherwise the filter is applied globally on a product 6 If the Use IfIndex in source matching check box is selected select the varbind to be used from the Trap Varbind IfIndex list 7 Se...

Page 1338: ...during the specified duration For example if you want the action to be applied when 10 link down traps occur during a one minute interval then the specified action will be applied as soon as 10 link...

Page 1339: ...gn to the generated event 7 Click Next 8 The Actions Group Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays Proceed to Editing event actions To directly launch the Actions Group Actions pane r...

Page 1340: ...ster Log Select Drop to not log the occurrence in the Management application database or Master Log NOTE If the policy specifies Act as specified on the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box...

Page 1341: ...Broadcast Message dialog box displays a Select a severity level from the list b Type a message in the Message Content field c Click OK 7 The Mark as Special Events check box is unselected by default...

Page 1342: ...owing steps 1 Click the special events icon to launch the Special Events dialog box shown in Figure 557 The Special Events dialog box shown in Figure 557 lists the most recent 1000 events that have be...

Page 1343: ...NOTE Make sure the user you select has an e mail address defined in a user account 2 Optional Add additional e mail recipient addresses in the Other Recipients field Separate multiple e mail addresses...

Page 1344: ...want an epilogue to be placed at the end of the e mail message enter up to 255 characters in the Body Epilogue field NOTE The prologue the event action message and the epilogue form the body of the e...

Page 1345: ...the definition You can perform this action in any of the panes of the Add Event Action dialog box 5 Click Finish to save your definition Deleting an event action definition To delete an event action d...

Page 1346: ...pane 6 Select the Deploy CLI Configuration check box and click Configure if you want to deploy a configuration from CLI Configuration Manager to products if the policy criteria have been met You can...

Page 1347: ...mple there are two separate SNMP traps for link up and link down occurrences You might decide that these two occurrences should be just one event Displaying pseudo event definitions To display the pro...

Page 1348: ...solve and flapping policies for the pseudo event and then specify the time duration for each of these policies in minutes or seconds FIGURE 562 Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box To create...

Page 1349: ...page 1304 for complete instructions 4 Enter a description in the Message field This description is displayed in the event log for this pseudo event The event log displays the exact text you enter in...

Page 1350: ...ht arrow button 5 You can change the text associated with the selected trap by doing either of the following Select one of the following options MIB Information if you want the default SNMP name for t...

Page 1351: ...eudo Events list 3 Click the Edit button to display the Edit Pseudo Event dialog box 4 Make the changes you want to make to the definition Refer to Creating pseudo event definitions on page 1295 for d...

Page 1352: ...the escalation policy To add a pseudo event definition to the escalation policy complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Event Processing Pseudo Events The Pseudo Events dialog box shown in Figu...

Page 1353: ...u created and click Next The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays 7 Select the source that you will use to monitor this event from the Selected Sources list 8 Click Next to advance...

Page 1354: ...urs a resolving policy waits for a specified duration to see if the event remains in that state by checking if an up event occurs If an up event occurs a resolving pseudo event is generated by the Eve...

Page 1355: ...that you will use to monitor this event from the Selected Sources list 8 Click Next to advance to the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box...

Page 1356: ...o event Specify the number of flapping times in minutes or seconds 6 Click Next The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays 7 Select a critical event such as LinkDown and click the rig...

Page 1357: ...figuration is displayed in the Selected Configuration field Has Parameters Displays Yes if the CLI configuration has parameters that require values to be entered before it can be deployed and displays...

Page 1358: ...dialog box allows you to manage customized event filter definitions and schedule when the definitions are run To access the dialog box select Reports Event Custom Reports The Event Custom Reports dia...

Page 1359: ...2 Click the Add button 3 The Add Edit Report Definition dialog box Product tab shown in Figure 565 displays 4 Click the Result Settings tab The Add Edit Report Definition dialog box Result Settings t...

Page 1360: ...Sort by Columns list select the entry then click the left arrow button 7 Click OK to save the definition Run to launch the report or click the Identification tab to display the parameters that you us...

Page 1361: ...view copy and run the definition 10 Select the roles that will have view and run access to this definition then press the right arrow button to move the role in the Selected Roles list All Management...

Page 1362: ...t Reports Event Custom Reports The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays 2 Click the Add button 3 The Add Edit Report Definition dialog box Product tab shown in Figure 567 displays FIGURE 567 Add E...

Page 1363: ...and entering a description of Port Login Logout History for that particular switch The Port Login Logout history trap will be listed under the Available traps list of the Add Trap Filter dialog box an...

Page 1364: ...b on the Add Edit Report Definition dialog box if you want to filter the events by date and time Filtering report events by date and time The Event Custom Reports dialog box Time Settings tab allows y...

Page 1365: ...t Custom Reports dialog box 2 Click Duplicate The name of the definition is the name of the selected definition with the word copy appended For example SelectedPortName becomes SelectedPortName copy 3...

Page 1366: ...eport definition but only if it belongs to you To delete a report definition complete the following steps 1 To access the dialog box select Reports Event Custom Reports The Event Custom Reports dialog...

Page 1367: ...chedule Delete Deletes the selected schedule from the Schedules list Enable Enables the selected schedule Disable Disables the selected schedule Adding or editing an event report schedule The Add Sche...

Page 1368: ...hen the report will be generated Indicate the hour minute and whether it is AM or PM This parameter appears if you selected any schedule type except Hourly 10 Select the E mail check box if you want t...

Page 1369: ...Product Audit type events for all discovered fabrics FICON Log Displays all the RLIR and LRIR type events for example link incident type events Product Status Log SAN only Displays events which indic...

Page 1370: ...5 Click where you want to paste the data 6 Press CTRL V or select Edit Paste from the other application All data and column headings are pasted 7 Click Close to close the dialog box Copying an entire...

Page 1371: ...Master Log 2 Select E mail All The E mail dialog box displays 3 Enter the e mail address of the person to receive the e mail notifications in the To field 4 Enter your e mail address in the From fiel...

Page 1372: ...dress of the product on which the event occurred Audit Information regarding the audit Category One of the following event categories which are detailed in Event Categories on page 1443 Product Event...

Page 1373: ...ant to copy press Shift and click the contiguous row or rows you want to copy To select non contiguous rows select the first row you want to copy press CTRL and click the additional row or rows you wa...

Page 1374: ...the text file 6 Click Close to close the dialog box Filtering events in the Master Log You can filter the events that display in the Master Log on the main window By default all event types display i...

Page 1375: ...list and click the left arrow To include all products select the Allow All Products check box 4 Select from the following to include or exclude event types To include an event type in the filter selec...

Page 1376: ...unnamed filter If the unnamed filter was the default filter for you in the previous release it will be set as the default filter for you in the current release The none filter The filter named none i...

Page 1377: ...aded to reflect the changes to that filter This affects all your client sessions If the currently selected filter is deleted the Master Log is reloaded and changes the selected filter to none for all...

Page 1378: ...1326 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Event logs 32...

Page 1379: ...long before they become costly failures MAPS tracks a variety of SAN fabric measures and events Monitoring fabric wide events ports and environmental parameters enables early fault detection and isol...

Page 1380: ...tion user as well as privileges roles and areas of responsibility AORs assigned to the user Privileges provide access to the features in the Management application A role is a group of selected privil...

Page 1381: ...ough MAPS 1 Select Monitor Fabric Vision MAPS Enable The Enable MAPS dialog box displays Figure 574 FIGURE 574 Enable MAPS dialog box Select one or more devices on which you want to enable MAPS in the...

Page 1382: ...les High availability MAPS configuration is maintained across a failover or reboot however MAPS statistics collected are lost Admin Domains MAPS is not supported with Admin Domains If MAPS is enabled...

Page 1383: ...splays switches that do not have MAPs enabled A None of the Fabric Watch specific operations can be performed on this switch because the MAPS Monitoring and Alerting Policy Suite are enabled error mes...

Page 1384: ...ts 1038 1039 TXP SFP transceiver transmit power microWatts 1042 1043 VOLTAGE SFP transceiver voltage mV 1050 1051 SFP_TEMP SFP transceiver temperature Degrees celsius 1034 1035 PWR_HRS1 SFP transceive...

Page 1385: ...4 BLADE_STATE Blade state changes N A 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 SFP_STATE SFP transceiver state changes N A 1337 WWN WWN card state changes N A 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 Security Health SEC_DCC Device c...

Page 1386: ...lash usage 1402 CPU CPU usage 1404 MEMORY_USAGE Memory usage 1404 1406 ETH_MGMT_PORT_STATE Ethernet management port state N A FCIP CIR_STATE FCIP circuit state changes N A 3020 CIR_UTIL FCIP circuit u...

Page 1387: ...ports SFP transceivers local switch flow and other values For more information refer to MAPS categories measures and actions on page 1335 Group A collection of similar objects that you can monitor as...

Page 1388: ...guration size BB_FCR_CNT FCR count RAS Log Event SNMP Trap E mail FRU Health Power Supply PS_STATE Power supply state RAS Log Event SNMP Trap E mail Fan FAN_STATE Fan state Blade BLADE_STATE Blade sta...

Page 1389: ...describes each measure FCIP Circuit CIR_STATE FCIP circuit state changes CIR_UTIL FCIP circuit utilization CIR_PKTLOSS FCIP packet loss PKTLOSS FCIP tunnel packet loss3 RTT Round trip time of the circ...

Page 1390: ...ly indicates a hardware problem Protocol error PE The number of times a protocol error occurs on a port Invalid state due to link reset response sequence LRR on an online link Occasionally these error...

Page 1391: ...supplies that are not in the correct slot for redundancy Temperatures BAD_TEMP Temperature thresholds faulty temperature sensors Fans BAD_FAN Fan thresholds faulty fans WWN WWN_DOWN Faulty WWN card a...

Page 1392: ...Segmentation of the principal link between two switches Zone changes ZONE_CHG Tracks the number of zone changes Because zoning is a security provision frequent zone changes might indicate a security...

Page 1393: ...de has changed SFPs SFP_STATE State of the SFP has changed WWN State of a world wide name WWN card has changed TABLE 115 Security measures Measure Description DCC violations SEC_DCC An unauthorized de...

Page 1394: ...iolations SEC_TELNET Telnet violations that occur when a Telnet connection request reaches a secure switch from an unauthorized IP address TS out of sync SEC_TS Time Server TS violations that occur wh...

Page 1395: ...ge of received word frames that exceeds the configured thresholds Transmit bandwidth usage percentage TX The percentage of transmitted word frames that exceeds the configured thresholds Trunk utilizat...

Page 1396: ...You can only change the active policy by enabling a different policy Preconfigured policies MAPS provides three preconfigured policies You cannot modify or delete these policies The preconfigured poli...

Page 1397: ...ased on the default thresholds configured in Fabric Watch fw_active_policy Contains all of the monitoring rules based on the active thresholds in Fabric Watch at the time of the migration The followin...

Page 1398: ...s A condition includes a time base and a threshold If the condition is evaluated as true the rule is triggered The condition depends on the element that is to be monitored Consider the following rule...

Page 1399: ...con Critical status displays with a red icon SFP Marginal NOTE SFP Marginal is available for SFP transceiver measures in the Port category When a threshold is triggered the SFP transceiver status chan...

Page 1400: ...o each switch individually as you would have to do for error log notifications SNMP performs an operation called a trap that notifies a management station using SNMP when events occur Log entries can...

Page 1401: ...Select All Fabrics to configure actions for all policy rules on all MAPS enabled devices in all fabrics Select one or more fabrics to configure actions for all policy rules on all MAPS enabled devices...

Page 1402: ...ules for all MAPS enabled devices in all fabrics Select one or more fabrics to configure e mail notification for all policy rules on all MAPS enabled devices in the selected fabrics Select one or more...

Page 1403: ...Map and select Fabric Vision MAPS Configure The MAPS Configuration dialog box displays Figure 575 Sort the contents by clicking the column header Click the same column header again to reverse the sor...

Page 1404: ...or disabling policy actions for all policies on page 1349 E mail Setup button Select to configure e mail notification For more information refer to Configuring e mail notification on page 1350 Activat...

Page 1405: ...formation refer to Editing multiple groups on page 1373 Compare button Click to compare two policies across the fabric For more information refer to Comparing MAPS policies on page 1363 3 Click Close...

Page 1406: ...on this tab measure thresholds on the performance of the fabric 5 Select one of the following options to name the rule in the Rule Name area Select the Auto option default to auto generate the rule n...

Page 1407: ...es select the check box for each action you want to occur when a threshold is crossed Not all actions are available for all objects Options include Status Critical Status Marginal RAS Log Event Port D...

Page 1408: ...once you edit the rule you must add it back to the group refer to Configuring a MAPS policy on page 1353 and complete step 5 through step 11 4 To edit groups refer to Editing a group on page 1369 5 C...

Page 1409: ...t to import in the Available Flow list and click the right arrow button The selected flow moves from the Available Flow list to the Selected Flow list The Available Flow and Selected Flow lists contai...

Page 1410: ...ich the Monitor feature is enabled 6 Click OK on the Import Flow Definitions dialog box The imported flow displays in the Imported Flows group in the Rules area You can now configure a rule and add it...

Page 1411: ...a policy from one device to another overwrites any policy with a matching name on the target devices 1 Right click a device in the Product List or Connectivity Map and select Fabric Vision MAPS Confi...

Page 1412: ...n the Product List or Connectivity Map and select Fabric Vision MAPS Configure The MAPS Configuration dialog box displays 2 Select the policy you want to export in the list and click Export 3 Browse t...

Page 1413: ...or more policies from the same switch or multiple switches A confirmation message displays 3 Click Yes on the confirmation message 4 Click Close on the MAPS Configuration dialog box Viewing MAPS poli...

Page 1414: ...at the switch level to detect out of range fabric wide changes FRU tab Rules defined on this tab measure thresholds on fans power supplies SFPs blades or WWN cards to detect out of range FRU changes...

Page 1415: ...A combination of the measure time base and threshold expression for the rule Time Base The duration by which to monitor the measure Actions check boxes Actions configured for the rule Each action has...

Page 1416: ...ected policy Change Navigator buttons These buttons help to navigate between the differences in the policy contents Differences Legend Displays the color legend for differences in policy contents Chan...

Page 1417: ...ce connected on this port is a target port and adds it to this set ALL_HOST_PORTS FC Port All ports in the logical switch connected to hosts MAPS automatically detects if a device connected on this po...

Page 1418: ...hat behave in a similar manner and monitor these ports using the same rules and thresholds NOTE You can create up to 64 groups for each logical switch 1 Right click a device in the Product List or Con...

Page 1419: ...row button The selected objects move from the Available Ports Circuits list to the Force Exclude list iv To remove ports from Force Include list select the ports in the Force Include list and click th...

Page 1420: ...the Available Ports Circuits list to the Selected Ports Circuits list iii Remove objects from the group by selecting the object port or circuit in the Selected Ports Circuits list and clicking the lef...

Page 1421: ...ox displays 2 Select the policy associated with the group you want to edit and click Edit The Edit Policy dialog box displays 3 Port FCIP or FPI tab only Select the group you want to edit in the Rules...

Page 1422: ...t The Edit Policy dialog box displays 3 Select the Port or FCIP tab depending on the type of group you want to delete 4 Select the custom group you want to delete in the Rules area and click Delete in...

Page 1423: ...list of all configured Port groups on the selected fabric or device in the Groups area FIGURE 583 Fabric Device_Name Manage MAPS Groups dialog box 3 Review the group details Sort the contents by click...

Page 1424: ...elected group from the Groups list Deleting a group on page 1373 4 Click OK on the Fabric Device _Name Manage MAPS Groups dialog box 5 Click Close on the MAPS Configuration dialog box Creating multipl...

Page 1425: ...its list and the Selected Ports Circuits list 4 Add objects to the group by selecting the object port SFP or circuit in the Available Ports Circuits list and clicking the right arrow button The select...

Page 1426: ...ata over 30 days every night at 12 00 AM The system also purges violations from deleted or unmonitored devices Viewing MAPS violations 1 Right click a device in the Product List or Connectivity Map an...

Page 1427: ...abric Watch support The object name such as switch name port name FRU name and so on Category MAPS and Fabric Watch support The category of the measure violated corresponding to the Dashboard tab and...

Page 1428: ...og and the historical graphs and monitors the same as any other events The event processor also receives dashboard change events in the form of traps from the switch for all rule violations whether yo...

Page 1429: ...ons dialog box is displayed 1 Day Displays data for the previous day beginning when the Violations dialog box is displayed 3 Days Displays data for the previous 3 days beginning when the Violations di...

Page 1430: ...the column header Click the same column header again to reverse the sort order 5 Click Close on the MAPS Violation Master Log Events dialog box Event field Description Severity The MAPS event severit...

Page 1431: ...MAPS events the same as any other events MAPS events display in the following format severity warning message Monitoring and Alerting System notification Rule rule_name violated Obj object_number name...

Page 1432: ...1380 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 MAPS integration with other features 33...

Page 1433: ...information Environment information Vital CPU memory network resources Agent and driver logs Install logs Core files Database partial or full Web Tools data Client Support save data includes Client Lo...

Page 1434: ...data from the products You cannot close the progress message and you cannot perform any other actions until the SupportSave is complete The application generates separate master logs to show the statu...

Page 1435: ...ng partial full database Capturing data from the products You cannot close the progress message and you cannot perform any other actions until the SupportSave is complete The application generates sep...

Page 1436: ...ortsave path in the CLI If the path has spaces enclose it in double quotes By default the capture location is one of the following Local client User_Home Management_Application_Name localhost Remote c...

Page 1437: ...OTE NOTE Technical SupportSave uses the built in FTP root if the switch is running Fabric OS 5 2 X or later Network OS 2 1 X or later and if the external FTP is configured with the Linux host IP addre...

Page 1438: ...ine Status The operational status of the switch for example unknown or marginal a Right click in the Available SAN Products table and select Expand All b Select the switches you want to collect data f...

Page 1439: ...s increase the time needed to collect supportSave data Starting immediate technical support information collection Technical SupportSave uses the built in FTP SCP or SFTP server configured on the Mana...

Page 1440: ...ststable and click the right arrow to move them to the Selected Products and Hosts table Technical SupportSave data for SAN devices is saved to the following directory FTP_Host ftproot technicalsuppor...

Page 1441: ...ftproot technicalsupport Supporinfo HostName Day mm dd yyyy hh mm ss Auto Trace Dump Install_Home data ftproot tracedump Field Component Description Available SupportSave and Upload Failure Data Capt...

Page 1442: ...TE You cannot e mail technical support information collected from the remote client To e mail technical support information complete the following steps 1 Select Monitor Technical Support View Reposit...

Page 1443: ...me of the external FTP server in the Network Address field 5 Enter your user name and password 6 Enter the destination directory where you want to copy the data on the external FTP server in the Desti...

Page 1444: ...more devices on which you want to enable automatic trace dump from the Available Switches with Upload Failure Data Capture Disabled table The Available Switches with Upload Failure Data Capture Disabl...

Page 1445: ...status of the FTP host configured on the switch FTP User The user for the current FTP host configured on the switch FTP Root The root location where failure data capture files are saved 4 Click OK on...

Page 1446: ...ht are not supported 1 Select Monitor Technical Support Upload Failure Data Capture The Upload Failure Data Capture dialog box displays 2 Select a device from the Available Switches with Upload Failur...

Page 1447: ...ture is only supported on Fabric OS devices 1 Select Monitor Technical Support View Repository The Repository dialog box displays 2 Select the Switches tab to view upload failure data capture informat...

Page 1448: ...1396 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Upload failure data capture 34...

Page 1449: ...enerating SAN performance reports 1405 Generating SAN zoning reports 1407 Reports overview Reports are available from the Reports menu You must have the Reports privilege to access the reports For mor...

Page 1450: ...pter Inventory Lists all Brocade adapters discovered through Host discovery Host Adapter Faulty SFP Lists all Brocade adapters with unsupported or faulty SFPs The following device specific reports are...

Page 1451: ...default browser window 5 Click Close to close the View Reports dialog box 6 Click Yes on the are you sure you want to close message Icon Description First Click to return to the first page in the rep...

Page 1452: ...rver The name of the Management application server IP Address The IP address of the Management application server Fabric Details table Fabric Name The name of the fabric Seed Switch WWN The world wide...

Page 1453: ...ator devices in the fabric Total number of Target Devices The number of target devices in the fabric Total number of Initiator cum Target Devices The number of initiator and target devices in the fabr...

Page 1454: ...4 describes the fields and components of the Fabric Ports Report Switch Name The name of the switch Domain ID The Domain ID of the switch Port The port number ISL Trunk Whether it is an ISL or Trunk T...

Page 1455: ...ch Switch Name The name of the switch Domain Port The domain ID and port number of the switch Zone Whether the zone is online or offline Connected Device Details about the connected device Device Name...

Page 1456: ...report and click Save 6 Click Close to close the View Reports dialog box 7 Click Yes on the are you sure you want to close message Printing SAN reports You can print reports through a web browser 1 S...

Page 1457: ...sion To generate a historical performance report for a device complete the following steps 1 Select the device for which you want to generate a performance report 2 Choose one of the following options...

Page 1458: ...ou want to gather performance data from the Measures list To select more than one measure click the Additional Measures expand arrows and select the check box for each additional measure f Save this c...

Page 1459: ...only if the source data is available To print the selected report refer to Printing SAN reports on page 1404 To export the selected report refer to Exporting SAN reports on page 1404 To delete the sel...

Page 1460: ...for example Microsoft Windows or Red Hat Linux Server Location The location of the server Server Contact The name of the person or group you should contact about the server Server Description A descri...

Page 1461: ...rame field size in bytes Media The type of media for example 8G sw 8 Gbps software FC Address The port s Fibre Channel address Fabric Name The name of the Fabric Zone Alias The alternate name of the z...

Page 1462: ...Vendor OUI The vendor s organizational unique identifier OUI Vendor Part The part number of the extended link Revision The revision level of the extended link Wavelength The wavelength translation wh...

Page 1463: ...Select to display the active Management application sessions Server Properties Select to display the Server properties Options Select to configure the Management application options Exit Select to clo...

Page 1464: ...s Menu Command Command Options Server Menu Users Select to configure users and user groups User Profile Select to configure user profiles Active Sessions Select to display the active Management applic...

Page 1465: ...Product Only or Ports Only Copy View Select to copy a view Delete View Select to delete a view Edit View Select to edit a view Zoom Select to configure the zoom percentage Show Select to determine wha...

Page 1466: ...Port Label Select to configure which port labels display Name Select to display the name as the port label Port Select to display the port number as the port label Port Address Select to display the p...

Page 1467: ...ted device Name Server Select to launch Web Tools Name Server for the selected device HCM HBA or CNA only Select to launch the HCM Agent for the selected device Enable Disable Select to enable or disa...

Page 1468: ...FCIP Tunnels Select to configure tunnels and circuits on FCIP capable devices FCoE Select to manage an FCoE port FICON Enterprise Licensed version Only Select to configure FICON Configure Fabric Selec...

Page 1469: ...on Only Select to configure logical switches for your SAN Enable Trial and Licensed version Only Select to enable virtual fabrics for your SAN Disable Trial and Licensed version Only Select to disable...

Page 1470: ...h Fabric Watch Port Fencing Trial and Licensed version Only Select to configure port fencing to protect your SAN from repeated operational or security problems experienced by ports Frame Monitor Selec...

Page 1471: ...elected device Event Notification Select to configure the Management application to send event notifications at specified time intervals E mail Select to configure the Management application to send e...

Page 1472: ...P Setup Select to configure SNMP traps Trap Forwarding Select to configure trap forwarding Product Trap Recipients Select to register a host as a trap recipient Event Reception Select to configure the...

Page 1473: ...o view IP performance between two devices Reports Menu Event Custom Reports Select to generate custom event reports Generate Select to determine which reports to run View Select to view reports throug...

Page 1474: ...ist Create View Automatically Port List Node List Fabric Binding Trial and Licensed version Only FCIP Tunnels Only launches the wizard when FCIP capable switches are in the selected fabric FICON Confi...

Page 1475: ...Only available from Product List Table Copy Fabric_Name Copy Row Copy Table Export Row Export Table Search Select All Size All Columns To Fit Expand All Collapse All Customize Only available from Prod...

Page 1476: ...Enable Persistent Disable Allow Prohibit Matrix Enterprise Edition Only Only available for Fabric OS devices Only enabled when the Fabric OS device is FICON capable and has the Enhanced Group Manageme...

Page 1477: ...ersion Only Real Time Graph Historical Graph Trial and Licensed version Only Historical Report Trial and Licensed version Only Bottleneck Graph Trial and Licensed version Only Events Accept Change Tri...

Page 1478: ...d Ports Switch to Switch Connections Only available from Product List Table Copy Device_Name Group Copy Row Copy Table Export Row Export Table Search Select All Size All Columns To Fit Expand All Coll...

Page 1479: ...oduct Ports Attached Ports Switch to Switch Connections Only available from Product List Table Copy Device_Name Group Copy Row Copy Table Export Row Export Table Search Select All Size All Columns To...

Page 1480: ...istorical Report Bottleneck Graph Fabric Watch Configure Port Fencing Frame Monitor Performance Thresholds Technical Support Product Host SupportSave Upload Failure Data Capture View Repository Events...

Page 1481: ...t Launches blank window for unmanaged Fabric OS HBAs Host Port Mapping Only available for Brocade Emulex and Qlogic HBAs and HBA enclosures Performance Real Time Graphs Disabled when all ports are off...

Page 1482: ...Properties Storage iSCSI Storage and Storage Enclosure Storage Port Mapping Trial and Licensed version Only Disabled for routed device User defined menu item Setup Tools Trial and Licensed version On...

Page 1483: ...ions Only available from Product List Table Copy Device_Name Group Copy Row Copy Table Export Row Export Table Search Select All Size All Columns To Fit Expand All Collapse All Customize Only availabl...

Page 1484: ...Mapping Only available for Brocade Emulex and Qlogic HBAs and HBA enclosures Performance Real Time Graphs Disabled when all ports are offline FC Security Protocol Only available for Managed JSON HBA...

Page 1485: ...Ports UnOccupied Product Ports Attached Ports Switch to Switch Connections Only available from Product List Expand All Only available from Product List Collapse All Only available from Product List P...

Page 1486: ...Persistent Enable Persistent Disable Modify Launches Element Manager IP Troubleshooting Ping Trace Route Performance Trial and Licensed version Only Port Display Occupied Product Ports UnOccupied Prod...

Page 1487: ...ly available from Product List Properties VE Port physical Enable Disable Enable Disable Persistent Enable Persistent Disable Decommission Port Recommission Port Zoning List Zone Members Performance R...

Page 1488: ...oduct List Properties White Area of the Connectivity Map Accept All Changes Zoom Zoom In Zoom Out Map Display Expand Collapse Export White Area of the Product List Port Display Occupied Product Ports...

Page 1489: ...menus A Product List Table Copy Component Copy Table Export Table Search Select All Size All Columns To Fit Expand All Collapse All Customize Some form of this shortcut menu is available for all tabl...

Page 1490: ...1438 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 SAN shortcut menus A...

Page 1491: ...code Event type Description Severity 504 DVP LIM HW Port module failure 3 506 DVP PORT Fibre Channel port failure 3 509 DVP PORT Fibre Channel path failure 0 511 LIM DVP LIM SPP failure 3 514 DVP LIM...

Page 1492: ...850 CTP HW System shutdown due to CTP thermal threshold violations 4 TABLE 129 Fabric OS Events Event reason code FRU code Event type Description Severity N A Ethernet Switch is not reachable 3 N A S...

Page 1493: ...y arrangement 3 1430 FW 1430 Faulty temperature sensors 3 1431 FW 1431 Faulty fans 3 1432 FW 1432 Faulty WWN cards 3 1433 FW 1433 Faulty CPs 3 1434 FW 1434 Faulty blades 3 1435 FW 1435 Flash usage is...

Page 1494: ...1442 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Call Home Event Tables B...

Page 1495: ...k listener added RLIR Link listener removed Link RLIR failure Traps that begin with OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 1588 2 1 1 50 are categorized as link incident events Product status events Product status events in...

Page 1496: ...5 FW 1426 FW 1427 FW 1428 FW 1429 FW 1430 FW 1431 FW 1432 FW 1433 FW 1434 FW 1435 FW 1436 FW 1437 FW 1438 FW 1439 FW 1440 FW 1441 FW 1442 FW 1443 FW 1444 Product audit events Events that are used to t...

Page 1497: ...Violation 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 0 78 snTrapPortSecurityShutdown 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 0 85 snTrapMacAuthEnable 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 0 86 snTrapMacAuthDisable 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 0 87 snTrapMacAuthMACAccepted 1 3 6 1 4...

Page 1498: ...6 1 4 1 1991 1 11 1 1 2 2 2 37 mwlAcctRadiusServerSwitchoverFailure 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 1 12 1 1 5 100 0 4 portSecurityViolation 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 1 12 1 1 5 109 0 1 portSECViolation 1 3 6 1 4 1 1991 1 12...

Page 1499: ...eshold TABLE 131 Configuration change events Event ID Type Description AG 1006 LOG Access Gateway mode has been enabled or disabled AG 1013 LOG N_port failover AG 1014 LOG N_port failback AG 1016 LOG...

Page 1500: ...ge area network LSAN zone was enabled in the edge fabric attached to the specified port The enabled LSAN zone configuration is listed FCR 1010 LOG Indicates that a logical storage area network LSAN zo...

Page 1501: ...APS 1101 LOG AUDIT Rule Rule name is deleted MAPS 1102 LOG AUDIT Rule Rule name is modified MAPS 1110 LOG AUDIT MAPS policy created MAPS 1111 LOG AUDIT MAPS policy deleted MAPS 1112 LOG AUDIT MAPS pol...

Page 1502: ...actory default SULB 1004 AUDIT LOG Firmware commit has completed XTUN 2007 LOG FCIP Tunnel Circuit created XTUN 2020 LOG FCIP Tunnel deleted XTUN 2021 LOG FCIP Tunnel Circuit deleted XTUN 2022 LOG FCI...

Page 1503: ...lege is the Management application s method of providing role based access control RBAC to the software s user administrator In the Management application privileges are assigned to roles and devices...

Page 1504: ...owever disables the OK and Apply buttons on the Call Home Call Home Event Filter and Configure Call Home Center dialog box boxes Enables the Call Home command on the Monitor Event Notification menu En...

Page 1505: ...CB devices Disables the DCB command from the Configure menu Enables the DCB command from the Configure menu Disables all commands and functions on the dialog box except the Close and Help Enables the...

Page 1506: ...triggers and actions Disables the Event Policies menu item Enables access to the Event Policies menu item and allows existing rules to be selected and viewed Disables all action buttons on the tab Ena...

Page 1507: ...slog configuration commands from the Monitor menu Enables the following functions from the dialog box boxes configure Management server registration configure TRAP or Syslog forwarding register other...

Page 1508: ...License dialog box from the Help menu Disables the License command on the Help menu Enables the License command on the Help menu however disables the Update and OK buttons Enables the License command...

Page 1509: ...m editable property fields Enables the Names command on the Configure menu however disables all edit functions in the dialog box Enables Properties command on Edit menu and right click menus Enables e...

Page 1510: ...s bar Enables all functions for Backup on the Options dialog box Server Software Configuration Allows you to configure some of the properties of the client and server of the management application Dis...

Page 1511: ...tool bar Enables the Users command on the Server menu and the Users button on the main tool bar however disables the Add Edit and Remove Users Add and Remove Groups and OK buttons on the Users dialog...

Page 1512: ...one Database DB tab of the Zoning dialog box Allows you to activate a zone configuration selected in the Zoning dialog box Disables the Activate Deactivate and Zoning Policies buttons in the Zoning di...

Page 1513: ...udes online and offline zones If you select an online zone the contents are loaded into the Zoning dialog box To launch offline zones you must have the Zoning Offline privilege Disables all online zon...

Page 1514: ...bles the Save To function on the Active Zone Config tab In Zoning dialog box the Zone DB list includes offline zones If you select an offline zone the contents are loaded into the Zoning dialog box Di...

Page 1515: ...ing dialog box Disables LSAN zone functions on all dialog box boxes Disables all online zone database editing activation and persisting functions In Zoning dialog box enables the Cancel and Help butto...

Page 1516: ...terfaces IP performance IP ping and IP trace route Disables the Configure FCIP Tunnel and Monitor Troubleshooting FCIP commands Disables the FCIP Tunnel command on the Fabric right click menu Enables...

Page 1517: ...l of the port details and connected devices Disables the Port Connectivity command from the Monitor menu and right click menu Enables the Port Connectivity command from the Monitor menu and right clic...

Page 1518: ...Configure menu and right click menu Enables the Routing Configuration and Routing Domain IDs commands from the Configure menu and right click menu Enables all functions in the dialog box boxes SAN SC...

Page 1519: ...g box SAN Storage Encryption Key Operation Allows you to configure storage encryption key operation including selecting storage devices and LUNs viewing switch group or engine properties viewing stora...

Page 1520: ...a switch to an existing group zeroizing an encryption engine backing up or restoring a master key enabling encryption functions after a power cycle changing key vaults for an encryption group create e...

Page 1521: ...n the View Manage View menu and the first tab header on the main desktop however disables the OK button in the Create View and Edit View dialog box boxes Disables the Copy View Delete View and Connect...

Page 1522: ...k Administrator Operator Security SAN System Administrator Security Administrator Security Officer Host Administrator Operator Server Backup SAN System Administrator Product Administrator Operator Ser...

Page 1523: ...Switch Configuration SAN System Administrator SAN Port Connectivity SAN System Administrator SAN Port Mapping Host SAN System Administrator Security Officer Host Administrator Operator SAN Port Mappin...

Page 1524: ...1472 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 About Roles and Access Levels D...

Page 1525: ...ork Advisor SAN User Manual 1473 53 1003154 01 Appendix E Device Properties In this appendix Viewing SAN device properties 1474 Viewing VC module properties 1487 Host properties 1489 Properties custom...

Page 1526: ...t Manager FID Fabric Name Enter a name for the fabric up to 128 characters Supported on seed switches running Fabric OS 7 0 or later Seed Switch The IP address of the seed switch AD Enabled Whether ad...

Page 1527: ...pression is on or off for the FCIP tunnel Connected Virtual FCoE Port The fabric name switch name and virtual FCoE port number of the connected virtual FCoE port Contact The primary contact at the cus...

Page 1528: ...nique number that identifies a specific hardware interface It is a 12 digit hexadecimal number Managed By The management program used to manage the fabric Master Port The master port of the trunk Memb...

Page 1529: ...t Type The unit type of the node Vendor The product vendor Virtual FCoE port count The number of virtual FCoE ports on the device There is a one to one mapping of TE ports to virtual FCoE ports Theref...

Page 1530: ...most cases there is also a number that represents the RAID type The possible RAID types are 0 1 5 or 10 and the number does not display if the RAID type is different from those The following are examp...

Page 1531: ...s assigned as host spares in addition to the disks that make up the LUN Label A user specified label The default value is the name of the label as specified in the storage product Loop IBM ESS product...

Page 1532: ...blocks 6 Independent data disks with two independent distributed parity schemes 7 Optimized asynchrony for high I O rates as well as high data transfer rates 10 Very high reliability combined with hi...

Page 1533: ...The type of initiator such as HBA or Software Interface The name of the interface IP Address The product s IP address iSCSI Alias The name of the alias target iSCSI Node Name The node name of the prod...

Page 1534: ...splays Figure 589 To add user defined property labels refer to Adding a property field on page 1492 Fields containing a green triangle in the lower right corner are editable Sessions button Select to...

Page 1535: ...ls The number of active tunnels Area ID hex Port Index hex The area identifier in hexadecimal of the switch to product connection Associated GE Port The port number of the associated GE port Attached...

Page 1536: ...ddressing hierarchy of the domain Encryption Whether encryption is enabled or disabled Fabric The fabric s IP address Fabric Name The name of the fabric Fabric Watch Whether Fabric Watch is up or down...

Page 1537: ...ce MAC Address The Media Access Control address assigned to a network adapters or network interface cards NICs Managed By The management program used to manage the fabric Manufacturer Plant The name o...

Page 1538: ...Remote Member Ports The remote member ports of the trunk Routing Policy The routing policy configured on the switch Sequence number The sequence number of the switch Serial The hardware serial number...

Page 1539: ...r the control connection of the FCIP tunnel VLAN Class of Service for Data Connection The VLAN class of service for the data connection of the FCIP tunnel VLAN ID The VLAN identification number WWN Th...

Page 1540: ...abric Switch The name of the VC module Port The port number Type The port type Status The status of the port For example LOGGED IN or NOT LOGGED IN Port Speed Gb s The speed of the port in gigabits pe...

Page 1541: ...alog box displays Table 31 details the properties of the selected port TABLE 31 Adapter port properties Field Description Port Attributes Port The port number 0 or 1 Name The name that is manually ass...

Page 1542: ...icates whether the port is enabled or disabled Max Bandwidth The maximum allowable bandwidth output for the selected port Operating State Indicates whether the port is online or offline Configured Spe...

Page 1543: ...buffer credits Priority Levels Lists the available priorities High Medium Low QoS Percentage The value represents the bandwidth in percentage for each of the priorities high medium and low and the th...

Page 1544: ...Product List Property fields containing a green triangle in the lower right corner are editable To edit a field with a green triangle click in the field and make your changes Adding a property field Y...

Page 1545: ...n which you want to edit a property if necessary 3 Click Edit Property_Label The Edit Property dialog box displays 4 Change the label and description for the property as needed The label must be uniqu...

Page 1546: ...triangle in the lower right corner To edit a field complete the following steps 1 Right click any product icon and select Properties The Properties dialog box displays 2 Select the tab on which you wa...

Page 1547: ...matches 1497 Greedy quantifiers 1498 Reluctant quantifiers 1498 Possessive quantifiers 1498 Logical operators 1498 Back references 1499 Special constructs non capturing 1499 TABLE 1 Characters Constr...

Page 1548: ...3 Predefined character classes Construct Matches Any character may or may not match line terminators d A digit 0 9 D A non digit 0 9 s A whitespace character t n x0B f r S A non whitespace character s...

Page 1549: ...p javaMirrored Equivalent to java lang Character isMirrored TABLE 6 Classes for Unicode blocks and categories Construct Matches p InGreek A character in the Greek block simple block p Lu An uppercase...

Page 1550: ...quantifiers Construct Matches X X once or not at all X X zero or more times X X one or more times X n X exactly n times X n X at least n times X n m X at least n but not more than m times TABLE 10 Pos...

Page 1551: ...E Nothing but ends quoting started by Q TABLE 13 Special constructs non capturing Construct Matches X X as a non capturing group idmsux idmsux Nothing but turns match flags on off idmsux idmsux X X a...

Page 1552: ...1500 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Regular Expressions F...

Page 1553: ...ing 1504 Firmware download troubleshooting 1505 Launch Client troubleshooting 1506 Names troubleshooting 1508 Patch troubleshooting 1508 Performance troubleshooting 1509 Port Fencing troubleshooting 1...

Page 1554: ...nd runs the disable UAC command When the command is complete close the window 6 Close the System Configuration Utility 7 Restart the computer to apply changes NOTE You can re enable UAC using the abov...

Page 1555: ...orer Browser over HTTPS If the JNLP file does not launch automatically use one of the following options Complete the following steps 1 Save the JNLP file to the local host 2 Launch the JNLP file manua...

Page 1556: ...th the new node WWN Choose from one of the following options Turn fabric tracking off while the switch is replaced This causes the old switch to be removed and the new switch added After the switch is...

Page 1557: ...nstalled on same machine or vice versa Clear the SSH SCP SFTP server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of the device For Fabric OS devices use the following command sw0 FID128 admin ss...

Page 1558: ...Panel dialog box 2 Launch the remote client a Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Management application server in the Address bar If the web server port number does not use the defaul...

Page 1559: ...Select Start Settings Control Panel Java The Java Control Panel dialog box displays b Click View on the General tab The Java Cache Viewer dialog box displays c Right click the application and select...

Page 1560: ...can disable UAC in vista Disable using msconfig by completing the following steps 1 Select Start Run 2 Type msconfig on the Run dialog box and click OK 3 Click the Tools tab on the System Configurati...

Page 1561: ...snmpconfig show accesscontrol SNMP access list configuration Entry 0 No access host configured yet Entry 1 No access host configured yet Entry 2 No access host configured yet Entry 3 No access host co...

Page 1562: ...witch admin snmpconfig show snmpv3 To set the switch SNMP value use one of the following commands from the switch CLI HCLSwitch admin snmpconfig set snmpv1 HCLSwitch admin snmpconfig set snmpv3 Exampl...

Page 1563: ...yes y no n yes FCIP MIB yes y no n yes ISCSI MIB yes y no n yes 4 To collect FCIP or GE statistics you must configure SNMPv3 credentials in the Address Properties dialog box SNMP tab Verify that the...

Page 1564: ...g in the switch To view the statistics in the switch use one of the following command FC Ports command from the switch CLI portperfshow interval Example Sprint 65 root portperfshow 5 FCIP tunnels comm...

Page 1565: ...bled Right click on the fabric that the segmented switch with red minus icon is part of and select Accept Changes TABLE 14 Professional edition login troubleshooting Problem Resolution Login Failed On...

Page 1566: ...Click Launch A command window displays and runs the disable UAC command When the command is complete close the window 6 Close the System Configuration Utility 7 Restart the computer to apply changes...

Page 1567: ...roperties 10 Select the Disabled option and click OK 11 Close the Group Policy editor 12 Restart the computer to apply changes To disable using the Active Directory based GPO editor complete the follo...

Page 1568: ...the following command sw0 clear ssh key SSH_server_IP_address where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to delete For Network OS devices running firmware version 2 1 1b...

Page 1569: ...ler sends syslog messages to secondary or ternary recipients only if primary recipient is not reachable Therefore even though the Management application is registered as a syslog recipient it may not...

Page 1570: ...improve speed open the Discover Setup dialog box Discover Setup and add the IP address for the device to the Selected Individual Addresses list Out of memory error caused by running a zoning report fo...

Page 1571: ...varchar 256 TABLE 17 ACH_CALL_CENTER_CONFIG Field Definition Format Size KEY_ Key to identify the specific configuration of the Call Center varchar 256 CALL_CENTER_ID ID of the Call Center int VALUE V...

Page 1572: ...tifier int NAME Name of the event filter varchar 256 DESCRIPTION Description of the event filter varchar 256 TABLE 21 ACH_INFO Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int...

Page 1573: ...Release date of the driver file timestamp with time zone LOCATION Location of the adapter driver file in the repository varchar 1024 TABLE 24 ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS Field Definition Format Size...

Page 1574: ...int PORT_GROUP_ID IP of port group int TABLE 31 AOR_VIP_SERVER_MAP Field Definition Format Size AOR_ID The column holds ID of an AOR It is Foreign Key and refers to ID column of AOR table int VIP_SER...

Page 1575: ...fault list smallint TABLE 34 BIRTREPORT_PARAMETER Field Definition Format Size ID The primary key of the table int RUN_ID References the ID column in the BIRTREPORT_RUN_TEMPLATE table int PARAMETER TY...

Page 1576: ...create a new folder in the store location with timestamp to ensure that output of all the runs will be archived int FORMAT_TYPE Possible values are 0 1 and 2 0 indicates output will be in HTML 1 indi...

Page 1577: ...Field Definition Format Size ID The primary key of the table int REPORT_TEMPLATE_ID Id of report_template table int PARAM_NAME Name of the parameter varchar 128 PARAM_REQUIRED Indicates if the report...

Page 1578: ...Boot Image file location in Management application Repository varchar 1024 TABLE 42 BOOT_LUN_SEQUENCE Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int NAME Name of the Boot LU...

Page 1579: ...t with intelligent blade char 64 SUBNET_MASK Mask of first Ethernet man agement port for a given slot with intelligent blade varchar 64 DEFAULT_GATEWAY Gateway IP address Ethernet management for a giv...

Page 1580: ...on the card varchar 256 ENABLED 1 the capability is enabled on the card Default value is 0 int TABLE 47 CED_APPLICATION Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int NAME N...

Page 1581: ...port varchar 64 NET_MASK Netmask of the IPAddress of the port varchar 128 PROTOCOL_DOWN_REAS ON Reason for the port s operational state being down varchar 512 QOS_TYPE QoS Type Cee Map TrafficClass Ma...

Page 1582: ...al configuration data of the IP or DCB product txt CONFIG_TYPE Configuration Type DCB_RUNNING 1 DCB_STARTUP 2 IP_STARTUP 3 IP_RUNNING 4 smallint DRIFT_STATUS Indicates whether this config backup is de...

Page 1583: ...ed not example template 1 Example Template smallint VALIDATE_CLI_RESPONSE The flag to indicate whether or not if the CLI responses for each of the CLI commands are to be validated for this template 0...

Page 1584: ...mallint EDITABLE Indicates whether the columns are editable 0 Not Editable 1 Editable smallint TABLE 56 CLIENT_VIEW_MEMBER Field Definition Format Size CLIENT_VIEW_ID Foreign key to CLIENT_VIEW table...

Page 1585: ...amp CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS User definable Mac address which is by default same as built in Mac address varchar 64 MAX_BANDWIDTH Maximum bandwidth varchar 64 PCIF_INDEX Pci function Iidex varchar 64 MAX_P...

Page 1586: ...ICAL_PORT_TYPE Port type CNA FC varchar 32 NAME Name of the port varchar 256 MAC_ADDRESS MAC address of the port varchar 64 MEDIA Media of the port varchar 64 CEE_STATE State of the port varchar 64 HB...

Page 1587: ...ce level collector it will use deviceId and for port level it will use interfaceId int PROP_STR Property string of the PERF_COLLECTOR varchar 8192 COLLECTOR_TARGET_ENTR Y_TYPE Target type of the SNMP...

Page 1588: ...ed in the config or block 0 Lines order check is not required 1 Lines order should be matched smallint CATEGORY Category of the Condition 0 User defined 1 Predefined smallint TABLE 70 CORE_SWITCH Fiel...

Page 1589: ...McDATA Switches This column is used to store the IP address which user provides for those M model switches for which seed switch is unable to return IP address VCS clusters This column is used to sto...

Page 1590: ...P will be used varchar 128 MAC_ADDRESS Stores the VCS Mac Address The value will be populated by the FabricCollector Default value is empty string The management interface Mac Address will be stored h...

Page 1591: ...00 Brocade VDX 6710 varchar 256 MANUFACTURER Manufacturer for the switch varchar 32 PLANT_OF_MANUFACTURE R Plant of the manufacturer for the switch varchar 32 SWITCH_SERIAL_NUMBER This is the factory...

Page 1592: ...ng the type of chassis int DOMAIN_NAME Denotes the domain name configured in switch varchar 64 IP_ADDRESS_PREFIX Required to populate the prefix of IPv6 address Applicable only for IPv6 address DOMAIN...

Page 1593: ...be generated timestamp LAST_REKEY_STATUS The success or failure of the most recent re keying operation if any This field is not currently used but is left in the hope that FOS will support it in the...

Page 1594: ...various reasons For possible values see the enum definition in CryptoClientConstants The default value is 0 int LUN_FLAGS Bitmap of LUN options The only option currently used is bit 0 least significa...

Page 1595: ...rent CAL implementation will get only last_rekey_date when rekey is in progress Otherwise it will be 0 CAL is providing time left for auto rekey attribute and this value is stored in DB bigint THIN_PR...

Page 1596: ...d for firmware versions 7 1 0 and above it will be in p12 format encoded varchar 8192 PRIMARY_VAULT_ CONNECTIVITY_STATUS The status of the network connection between this switch and the primary key va...

Page 1597: ...The Node WWN of the physical target storage device associated with this container char 23 CONTAINER_FIELD_DATA Container metadata information varchar 256 CONFIGURATION_STATUS Configuration status Def...

Page 1598: ...FK USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE ID This value will be populated when user selects the predefined scope int SCOPE_TYPE FK SCOPE_TYPE ID This value will be populated when user select user defined network...

Page 1599: ...the mapping between widget and the summary provider Fully qualified class name of the summary provider implementation for the widget The class should implement SummaryProvider interface varchar 128 U...

Page 1600: ...f box widget defined but not shown int COLUMN_INDEX Column position of the widget 1 for an out of box widget defined but not shown int CANVAS_ID Foreign Key to DASHBOARD_CANVAS ID int TABLE 86 DEFAULT...

Page 1601: ...d int width Width of the widget int height Height of the widget int row_index Row position of the widget 1 for an out of box widget defined but not shown int column_index Column position of the widget...

Page 1602: ...E 89 DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier serial MODULE Identifies the unique deployment module varchar 64 SUB_MODULE Identifies sub module varchar 6...

Page 1603: ...could be plain text or HTML or XML text FOOTER Stores the footer content of deployment report This could be plain text or HTML or XML text TABLE 92 DEPLOYMENT_STATUS Field Definition Format Size ID U...

Page 1604: ...btained through the device IP address varchar 512 SYS_NAME An administratively assigned name for this device varchar 255 SYS_CONTACT The textual identification of the contact person for this device to...

Page 1605: ...ASSWORD SNMP V3 read only privacy password varchar 512 SNMPV3_RW_AUTH_TYPE SNMP V3 read write authentication type varchar 1 SNMPV3_RW_AUTH_USERNAME SNMP V3 read write authentication user name varchar...

Page 1606: ...any change int ADMIN_STATUS_LAST_UPDATED Time when the admin status updated last bigint MEMO_LAST_UPDATED Time when the memo got updated last bigint MEMO Memo updated by the user for this device varch...

Page 1607: ...ndicates unknown state for catching all 1 indicates not applicable if the IP Product is not XMR MLX it will be set to this value 2 indicates MPLS unmanaged state in PP or PPE edition XMR MLX product w...

Page 1608: ...device smallint CLUSTER_MODE This column is used to determine whether VCS Cluster is in Standalone mode or Cluster mode The values will be populated by the VCS collector during the discovery of the VC...

Page 1609: ...hat this not a Principal switch The values will be populated by the VCS collector during the discovery of the VCS switch The default value of 0 means that its a principal switch smallint IS_NETCONF_RE...

Page 1610: ...IOS device and NOS firmware version less than 4 1 The value 0 will be set if the device supports VCS VF and its disabled The value 1 will be set if its enabled on the device int TABLE 95 DEVICE_CONNE...

Page 1611: ...archar 128 VENDOR Vendor name varchar 256 MODEL Device enclosure Model varchar 256 SERIAL_NUMBER Serial Number given for the entity varchar 256 FIRMWARE Firmware running on the device which is not app...

Page 1612: ...manually created does not represent a managed host then the field is null Also a foreign key reference to the MANAGED_ELEMENT table int MANAGED_BY 1 Manual user created not managed condition Default...

Page 1613: ...le via FDMI ex Brocade 825 varchar 64 NODE_NAME Holds the node name of the device available via FDMI ex 20 00 00 05 1e 7c 64 94 varchar 64 TABLE 99 DEVICE_GROUP Field Definition Format Size DEVICE_GRO...

Page 1614: ...TABLE_SUBTYPE Table subtype defined by BizObject framework varchar 32 IS_AP_GROUP Flag to identify whether this group is access point device group num 1 0 IS_SENSOR_GROUP Flag to identify whether this...

Page 1615: ...ated domain That device port is set as the Proxy Device and this Device Node is treated as virtual by assigning a value of 1 to this field Default value is 0 smallint AG 1 the device node is actually...

Page 1616: ...pt in the case of devices behind the AG This field will be updated by the name server info collector added for the feature support of AG WWN N port mapping This is a null able field It is used to dete...

Page 1617: ...found to have crossed the threshold both low to high and vice versa timestamp MEMORY_UTILIZATION Holds the disk usage as a percentage Value varies from 0 to 100 double precision THRESHOLD_TYPE Denote...

Page 1618: ...E Administrative state for this engine 0 disabled 1 enabled The default value is 0 smallint SP_CERTIFICATE The public key certificate in PEM format for the Security Processor within the Encryption Eng...

Page 1619: ...ric int LEADER_SWITCH_WWN The Node WWN of the current group leader switch Each encryption group has one group leader switch char 23 DEPLOYMENT_MODE Indicates Transparent 0 or NonTransparent 1 deployme...

Page 1620: ...f cards is now specified when the backup is created and not persisted in the database The default value is 0 smallint KEY_VAULT_TYPE Indicates the type of key vault used by switches in this Encryption...

Page 1621: ...lity mode for the encryption group Possible values are noHA opaque transparent and NA varchar 32 AUTHENTICATION_MODE Indicates the configured User Authentication mode for the encryption group Possible...

Page 1622: ...iated to int TABLE 114 ETHERNET_ISL Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int SOURCE_PORT_ID The unique id of the source port int DEST_PORT_ID The unique id of the desti...

Page 1623: ...estamp when this event occurred last timestamp EVENT_COUNT Indicates the number of occurrences of the event Count indicates the number of times the same event occurred in a given ten minute window int...

Page 1624: ...7 varchar 50 TABLE 118 EVENT_DESCRIPTION Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int DESCRIPTION Holds the description of the Event varchar 1024 TABLE 119 EVENT_DETAILS F...

Page 1625: ...oint from which this event is received If the event is received from the wireless controller or any other products this will be empty varchar 64 TABLE 120 EVENT_FWD_FILTER Field Definition Format Size...

Page 1626: ...nce that s specific to the policy The default value is 0 smallint MSG_IDS Stores the Message ID s configured for Custom Event Type varchar 512 TABLE 122 EVENT_MODULE Field Definition Format Size ID Th...

Page 1627: ...Definition Format Size ID int TYPE Even Policy Type 0 Pseudo Event 1 Event Action smallint NAME The Name of the Event Policy varchar 256 DESCRIPTION The Description of the Event Policy varchar 1024 S...

Page 1628: ...D A reference key to the Device Group Do not maintain it as a foreign key constraints The default value is 0 int PORT_GROUP_ID A reference key to the Port Group Do not maintain it as a foreign key con...

Page 1629: ...e rule varchar 12 IP_ADDRESS Source IP Address varchar 1024 OPERATOR4 AND operator used to append the rule varchar 12 WWN Source WWN varchar 1024 OPERATOR5 AND operator used to append the rule varchar...

Page 1630: ...table usually 1 since there is only one SAN int SEED_SWITCH_WWN WWN of the virtual switch used as seed switch to discover the fabric char 23 NAME User assigned fabric name varchar 256 CONTACT User ass...

Page 1631: ...t a ZONE_TRANSACTION can be idle Default value is 180 int FABRIC_MODEL Default value is 1 smallint LAST_FAILURE_TIMESTAM P Denotes the last failure timestamp timestamp LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIME STAMP Dento...

Page 1632: ...tual checksum value varchar 16 TABLE 132 FABRIC_COLLECTION Field Definition Format Size FABRIC_ID Fabric ID foreign key to the FABRIC table int COLLECTOR_NAME Name of the collector e g NameServerInfoC...

Page 1633: ...and 0 means include Default is to include smallint CREATION_TIME timestamp LAST_UPDATE_TIME timestamp TABLE 135 FABRIC_MEMBER Field Definition Format Size FABRIC_ID Fabric ID foreign key to FABRIC tab...

Page 1634: ...application user credentials varchar 128 TOP_N The top number of ports 5 10 15 20 varchar 40 SELECTION_FILTER Types of ports FC FCIP GE and End Monitors varchar 40 FROM_TIME The time interval in whic...

Page 1635: ...d will be 1 for non Skybolt switches or if DP1 ip address not configured in Skybolt circuit int TABLE 141 FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP Field Definition Format Size SWITCHPORT_ID Switch Port ID int TUNNEL_ID F...

Page 1636: ...FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_PI PE The Value for FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_PIPE on the tunnel Default value is 1 int FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_ OPS The Value for FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_OPS on the tunnel Default value is 1...

Page 1637: ...The number of circuits configured on the tunnel Default value is 1 smallint MISMATCHED_CONFIG_DET AILS Details of the reasons as to why the tunnel is down varchar 2048 LAST_UPDATE Last update time te...

Page 1638: ...A_STATUS int TABLE 143 FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int TUNNEL_ID Tunnel ID to which the circuit belongs to int CIRCUIT_NUMBER Circuit Numbe...

Page 1639: ...default value is 0 smallint METRIC Circuit metric to set priority The default value is 1 int DATA_L2_COS Class of service as defined by IEEE 802 1p for circuit The default value is 1 int DSCP_DATA Dif...

Page 1640: ...DSCP_LOW The default value is 0 smallint FAILOVER_CIRCUIT Whether the circuit is configured as failover or not smallint FAILOVER_GROUP_ID Represents the failover group id for the circuit 0 Default Fai...

Page 1641: ...f the port This value is saved and compared with the next polled value to compute net throughput Note for Fibre Channel ordered sets are not included in the count double precision TX_UTILIZATION The c...

Page 1642: ...t FCRP_COST Route parameter int EX_PORT_WWN Ex_port WWN varchar 128 TABLE 147 FEATURE Field Definition Format Size FEATURE_ID ID used to uniquely identify the feature int 6 NAME Name of the feature va...

Page 1643: ...ar 16 TABLE 151 FIRMWARE_FILE_DETAIL Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int FIRMWARE_NAME Name of the firmware file varchar 64 MAJOR_VERSION Major version bit from th...

Page 1644: ...represent a feature and if the feature available then bit value would be 1 and 0 otherwise Refer snAgSoftwareFeature MIB in foundry MIB for various features supported and its corresponding details byt...

Page 1645: ...instance int CONNECTOR_TYPE The type of connector that the port offers Refer snSwPortInfoConnectorType of foundry mib for more details and possible values smallint MEDIA_TYPE The media type for the p...

Page 1646: ...ial number of this package requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector varchar 64 CAN_BE_FRUED provides whether this element can be removed from the switch requested by SMIA and v...

Page 1647: ...PREVIOUS_OP_STATUS provides the previous operational status of FRU element requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector Helps identify the operational status transitions The defau...

Page 1648: ...0 bigint MAX_SPEED Port maximum speed supported bigint MAC_ADDRESS MAC Address of that port varchar 64 PORT_NAME GigE Port Name varchar 64 OPERATIONAL_STATUS LED status int LED_STATE LED status small...

Page 1649: ...bytes double precision TX_UTILIZATION Transmit utilization TX value in percentage double precision RX_UTILIZATION Receive utilization RX value in percentage double precision DROPPED_PACKETS Number of...

Page 1650: ...ER_MODE Power mode of the HBA varchar 256 MODEL Model code of the HBA varchar 256 MODEL_DESCRIPTION Model description for the HBA varchar 256 OPERATING_STATUS Current operating status of the HBA 1 Ena...

Page 1651: ...s untrusted and 1 is for trusted smallint CREATION_TIME HBA record creation time This tells us when this HBA was first discovered timestamp MISSING Denotes whether HBA is missing or not 0 denotes pres...

Page 1652: ...E It is the same as card type but uses new values applicable for 3 0 and later driver versions Deprecates the card type field Possible values are HBA CNA AnyIO Mezzanine HBA Mezzanine CNA Mezzanine An...

Page 1653: ...States the missing time of the this port timestamp OPERATING_SPEED Operating speed of the hba port The default value is 0 varchar 64 CNA_PORT_ID Nullable foreign key related FC pot with the CNA port i...

Page 1654: ...int BOOT_TOPOLOGY Boot topology for the port Possible values are 0 Point to Point 1 Loop The default value is 1 int BOOTUP_DELAY On starting system how long system needs to wait for user action Config...

Page 1655: ...TH_STATE Indicates whether FC SP authentication is on or off The default value is 0 smallint FCSP_STATUS The status of FC SP authentication The default value is Disabled varchar 32 FCSP_ALGORITHM The...

Page 1656: ...ues are Online Offline and Not Supported Note Not Supported on PORT_MEDIA_MEZZANINE_CARD varchar 128 BB_CREDIT_RECOVERY_ST ATUS Status of Buffer to Buffer Credit Recovery Supported on FC ports Applica...

Page 1657: ...the adapter port level as with the IO throttle value Not setting the queue depth to the optimal level can result in poor performance where outstanding IO queuing can cause bottlenecks For optimum perf...

Page 1658: ...he target device The default value is 0 int ROLE The role of the device target or initiator varchar 64 VENDOR The vendor of the device varchar 256 PRODUCT_ID The device s identifier varchar 256 PRODUC...

Page 1659: ...5 HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN Field Definition Format size ID Auto generated primary key int HBA_REMOTE_PORT_ID Primary key of owner row in Remote Port int FCP_LUN The logical unit number of Fibre Channel Pro...

Page 1660: ...reported by each HBA port The default value is 0 int TABLE 177 HEALTH_STATUS Field Definition Format Size ID serial DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_ID Identifies the execution cycle for the deployment int RULE_ID P...

Page 1661: ...gent The default value is 34568 int VM_PORT Port Number used for the VM agent The default value is 443 int Application_Name_USER_N AME Management application User Name of the user who generated the la...

Page 1662: ...the request group table Null allowed int HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTI ON_ID This id is a foreign key to the id in the host_discovery_option table The default value is 1 int VM_MANAGEMENT_STAT E The status of...

Page 1663: ...atus of the request 0 Completed 1 Add Pending 2 Edit Pending 4 Delete Pending 8 Inactive deleted request 16 Redundant request 32 Collection submission failed 63 Request internal error 128 Request DB U...

Page 1664: ...int EDGE_PORT_WWN Edge switch port wwn of this IFL link varchar 128 BB_FABRIC_ID Backbone fabric ID of this IFL link int BB_PORT_WWN Backbone fabric switch port wwn of this IFL link varchar 128 BB_RA...

Page 1665: ...allint IF_INDEX This column is used to store the ifIndex of the interface The value will be populated by the DCB collector during the discovery of the DCB switch Since this value is not populated by I...

Page 1666: ...ON Represents the binding direction 0 1 corresponds to IN OUT direction smallint TABLE 190 IP_DEVICE_LICENSE Field Definition Format Size ID Primary Key field for the DEVICE_LICENSE int DEVICE_ID This...

Page 1667: ...4 GIGE_PORT_TYPE Whether the IP interface is created on a 10G cross port or not Non zero value denotes a cross port smallint VLAN_ID Vlan id for the Skybolt IP interfaces For non Skybolt ip interfaces...

Page 1668: ...varchar 40 SUBNET_MASK Subnet Mask of the IP subnet varchar 40 TABLE 195 IPX_NETWORK_VLAN Field Definition Format Size VLAN_DB_ID Database ID of the VLAN instance which is associated with the IPX net...

Page 1669: ...NNECTION Field Definition Format Size ID The primary key of the table int FABRIC_ID This is the fabric ID int SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID The Switch port ID of the Source Switch local end of the ISL Maintai...

Page 1670: ...value 1 int TARGET_MASTER_PORT This column will hold the trunk master port for the target port if the connection is trunked For the master connection it will have its target port s port number For no...

Page 1671: ...for trusted smallint MISSING Denotes whether ISL trunk member is missing or not 0 denotes present and 1 states that ISL trunk member is missing smallint MISSING_TIME We could change this as States th...

Page 1672: ...abled or not 1 Enabled 0 Not Enabled smallint SOURCE_TYPE Indicates the source MAC type any host or mac for DCB Switch L2 ACL entry varchar 24 DEST_TYPE Indicates the destination MAC type any host or...

Page 1673: ...Key for L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST table int INBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE 1 0 corresponding to Write to device not write to device for inbound traffic smallint OUTBOUND_L2_ACL_ID L2 Access control List ID of t...

Page 1674: ...ice for outbound traffic smallint TABLE 208 LAG Field Definition Format Size ID DB ID of LAG Port Channel int VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID FK to owning VIRTUAL_SWITCH int LAG_ID LAG ID int IF_INDEX Interface ind...

Page 1675: ...PDATE_TIME Timestamp returned by the device for this particular xpath bigint TABLE 211 LAUNCH_IN_CONTEXT_MODULE Field Definition Format Size NAME Unique dialog name used as a module name when launchin...

Page 1676: ...OPTIONAL_PARAMS_DESC Comma separated descriptions for the above optional parameters varchar 1024 TABLE 212 LICENSE Field Definition Format Size ID Unique Number assigned for the license information i...

Page 1677: ...ield Definition Format Size LICENSE_ID Foreign Key SWITCH_LICENSE ID and is part of the primary key int FEATURE_ID Foreign Key LICENSED_FEATURE ID and is part of the primary int TABLE 215 LICENSE_RULE...

Page 1678: ...odified Might be useful for debugging someday timestamp TABLE 219 LSAN_DEVICE Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int BB_FABRIC_ID Backbone fabric DB ID int FCR_FABRIC...

Page 1679: ...backbone lsan zone Default value is 0 smallint TABLE 223 LSAN_ZONE_DB_CONFIG Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier serial BB_FABRIC_ID Backbone fabric db ID int EDGE_FA...

Page 1680: ...he Ethernet Type This field can take 0 not used 1 etype 2 llc 3 snap smallint OPERARTOR This column specifies the operator This field can take 0 1 2 3 smallint FRAME_NUMBER This column specifies the F...

Page 1681: ...CUSTOM MAC GROUP ID Reserved for future usage if Network Advisor provides an option through UI to create MAC GROUPs Int TYPE This indicates if the mac group is internal to BNA or mapped to device 0 i...

Page 1682: ...ected i e PS 1 Fan 2 As this FRU object name is only provided for one category of events making the column nullable varchar 32 VM_ID Nullable foreign key The VM for which the event occurred This will...

Page 1683: ...UAL_SWITCH_ID The id of the virtual switch int NAME The name of the MAPS policy varchar 32 IS_ACTIVE Indicates if the policy is the active policy on the switch 0 No 1 Yes int IS_DEFAULT Indicates if t...

Page 1684: ...in measure for system expressions user cannot delete it smallint TABLE 238 MESSAGE_RECIPIENT Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int DESCRIPTION Description about rec...

Page 1685: ...Identifies the module is present or not Not Present 0 Present 1 num 1 0 IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE Identifies the module is management module or not Other module 0 Management module 1 num 1 0 NUM_CPUS The...

Page 1686: ...TATE_DOWN CARD_STATE_POWERED_OFF CARD_STATE_RECOVERY CARD_STATE_REBOOT CARD_STATE_SYNC_FID Empty string indicates module has not been inserted to the chassis or not applicable for this product varchar...

Page 1687: ...status of this tunnel which is typically but not limited to a function of the state of individual segments of this tunnel Up 1 Down 2 Testing 3 Unknown 4 Dormant 5 Not present 6 Lower Layer Down 7 sm...

Page 1688: ...after the primary or selected path comes up before traffic reverts to that path A value of 0 indicates that it will switch immediately after the current working path goes down The range of values supp...

Page 1689: ..._ID Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS instance int MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMET ERS_DB_ID Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMETERS instance int TABLE 251 MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMETERS Fie...

Page 1690: ...epted range is 0 255 num 3 0 IS_CSPF Specifies whether the Constrained Shortest Path First CSPF calculation is enabled Possible values are Disabled 0 Enabled 1 num 1 0 MTU Specifies the Maximum IP Pac...

Page 1691: ...inition Format Size MPLS_SERVICE_DB_ID Unique database generated identifier int NAME Specifies the name of the MPLS Service varchar 255 VCID Virtual Circuit Identifier of the MPLS Service bigint MPLS_...

Page 1692: ...lation Possible values are VLL_ENDPOINT_RELATION and VPLS_ENDPOINT_RELATION varchar 32 TAG_MODE This value indicates the vlan mode for this endpoint Possible values are Tagged 1 Untagged 2 smallint VL...

Page 1693: ...ICE_DB_ID Auto generated database ID for device in MRP Ring int MRP_RING_ID Database ID of MRP ring int DEVICE_ID Database ID of member device int PORT_VLAN_DB_ID The database ID of the port VLAN The...

Page 1694: ..._RC The number of RHP packets received on the interface bigint STATE_CHANGED The number of MRP interface state changes that have occurred int TC_BPDU_RC The number of Topology Change RHPs received on...

Page 1695: ...t DEVICE_PORT_WWN Device Port which is mapped to the N port This device could be offline device as well char 23 TABLE 266 NP_FLOW_DEFINITION Field Definition Format Size ID The primary key of the tabl...

Page 1696: ...varchar 32 LAST_UPDATED_TIME Last updated time timestamp MONITOR_FEATURE Flow Monitor feature state 0 not selected 1 deactivated 2 selected and activated int GENERATOR_FEATURE Flow generator feature s...

Page 1697: ...hange ID for the frame int CS_CTL Frame header CS_CTL int SIZE Size of the frame payload Range 64 bytes to max 2112 bytes 0 for random size int PATTERN String to specify the pattern of the payload var...

Page 1698: ...ates IPv4 policy Value 2 indicates IPv6 policy int ALLOW_VLAN Indicates if the packets arriving at the ingress ports allow all VLANs or not smallint TABLE 272 PERF_COLLECTOR Field Definition Format Si...

Page 1699: ...pbr policy varchar 81 IP_POLICY_TYPE Defines the ip type of the policy v4 v6 or both v4 and v6 Type v4 will have a value 1 type v6 will have a value 2 both will have a value 3 smallint OPERATION_TYPE...

Page 1700: ...efault value is 0 int TYPE The portType of the phantom port The default value is Unknown varchar 16 REMOTE_NODE_WWN The remote node wwn for E ports only Attached port device info must be retrieved fro...

Page 1701: ...port 0 indicates non stacking 1 indicates stacking interface 2 indicates peri port num 1 0 IS_PORT_PRESENT This flag is to indicate whether the port is presented in the device 0 Unknown 1 Present 2 N...

Page 1702: ...dule which this port is present int IS_PORT_PRESENT This flag is to indicate whether the port is presented in the device Unknown 0 Present 1 and Not present 2 smallint TABLE_SUBTYPE PHYSICAL_PORT tabl...

Page 1703: ...o user int MEASURE_TYPE TYPE of the user selection measure int CREATE_USER_ID ID of the user who created the widget definition int CREATE_TIME Widget definition created server time timestamp MODIFY_US...

Page 1704: ...he fifth percentage band In case of Top N Top Flow widgets only three percentage band s are available This value is not applicable Default is 0 double precision LEVEL5_COLOR RGB color for the fifth pe...

Page 1705: ...ar 10 IS_REARM_ABS Whether or not the rearm Default 0 smallint THRESHOLD_SEVERITY The severity for the threshold event smallint REARM_SEVERITY The severity for the rearm event smallint IS_SYSTEM Indic...

Page 1706: ...nt NAME Storing the NAME of the measure varchar 64 TABLE 289 PM_WIDGET_MEASURE_TYPE_ENTRY Field Definition Format Size WIDGET_ID The id of the widget definition int MEASURE_TYPE stores measure type id...

Page 1707: ...d Definition Format Size WIDGET_ID The ID of the widget definition int USER_ID ID of the user who is using the widget definition int TABLE 295 POE_THRESHOLD Field Definition Format Size ID Unique gene...

Page 1708: ...was triggered double precision TABLE 297 POLICY_RULE Field Definition Format Size ID Primary key for the table int NAME Rule name varchar 255 DESCRIPTION Rule description varchar 1024 TYPE Policy Mon...

Page 1709: ...ed by latency bottlenecking Range 0 to 1 double precision WINDOW_ Value of bottleneck detection latency window in millisecond The default value is 0 int QUIET_TIME Value of bottleneck detection quiet...

Page 1710: ...d be 62 because M Model switch supports only maximum 62 characters varchar 62 TYPE 0 ISL Protocol 1 Link 2 Security smallint THRESHOLD_LIMIT Threshold Limits for M Model Switch int THRESHOLD_DURATION...

Page 1711: ...TE Profile state 0 created 1 activate smallint ACL_PROFILE If port Profile has an acl profile or not 0 NO 1 YES smallint QOS_PROFILE If port Profile has an qos profile or not 0 NO 1 YES smallint VLAN_...

Page 1712: ...ERFACE_ID ID of the interface table int SWITCH_PORT_ID Db id of the Switch port with matching interface int TABLE 308 PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP Field Definition Format Size ID Auto generated ID for the cre...

Page 1713: ...field 0 NO 1 YES smallint COS3_TX TX setting for this cos field 0 NO 1 YES smallint COS3_RX RX setting for this cos field 0 NO 1 YES smallint COS4_TX TX setting for this cos field 0 NO 1 YES smallint...

Page 1714: ...es are 0 Disabled 1 STP 2 RSTP 3 MSTP 4 PVST and 5 RPVST num 1 0 TVF 0 means Disabled 1 means Enabled When TVF is enabled packets are allowed to be forwarded without any form of CPU intervention inclu...

Page 1715: ...NAME Privilege Name varchar 128 AREA Privilege Area 0 Application 1 SAN 2 IP smallint TABLE 314 PRODUCT_APP Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int MENU_TEXT Name of...

Page 1716: ...Calendar object bytea SCHED_NAME DCMScheduler varchar 120 TABLE 318 QRTZ_CRON_TRIGGERS Field Definition Format Size TRIGGER_NAME Name of the trigger varchar 200 TRIGGER_GROUP Name of the trigger group...

Page 1717: ...VOLATILE Whether the job should not be persisted in the JobStore for re use after program restarts boolean IS_STATEFUL Whether the job implements the interface StatefulJob boolean REQUESTS_RECOVERY In...

Page 1718: ...TABLE 325 QRTZ_SIMPLE_TRIGGERS Field Definition Format size TRIGGER_NAME Name of the trigger varchar 200 TRIGGER_GROUP name of the trigger group varchar 200 REPEAT_COUNT number of times to repeat bigi...

Page 1719: ...may be useful for remembering displaying the purpose of the trigger though the description has no meaning to Quartz varchar 250 NEXT_FIRE_TIME The next fire time in milliseconds bigint PREV_FIRE_TIME...

Page 1720: ...char 45 TABLE 332 RECIPIENT_TYPE Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int TYPE Type of the recipient Syslog or SNMP varchar 20 TABLE 333 RECOVERY_CARD_GROUP_MAPPING Fie...

Page 1721: ...ot Editable report but can be deleted int REPORT_DEFINITION XML representation of the report text PARAMETERIZED int CATEGORY Indicates the report template category 0 SAN domain 1 IP domain Default val...

Page 1722: ...the resource group int TABLE 341 ROLE Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int NAME Role name varchar 128 DESCRIPTION Role description varchar 512 HIDDEN Field to ident...

Page 1723: ...wise 0 Default value is 0 smallint CREATION_TIME time at which this record was created Default value is now timestamp LAST_UPDATE_TIME time when this was last updated Default value is now timestamp TA...

Page 1724: ...char 64 VERSION The version of SCOM Default is 6 1 7221 0 which is SCOM 2007 R2 The default value is 6 1 7221 0 varchar 32 TOKEN_ID Unique ID for each SCOM host varchar 32 STATUS Status of Plug in reg...

Page 1725: ...age The default value is 1 int CURRENT_READING Identifies the current temperature reading sensor requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector Maps to value field in the html page T...

Page 1726: ...er of the sensor requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector will be available only from FOS 6 4 switches and above This the gives the index of the unit For SLOT FRU this will be...

Page 1727: ...IP_TOS Type of service id in the received sFlow packet smallint L4_PROTOCOL L4 protocol value in the received sFlow packet For example IGP smallint L4_SRC_PORT L4 source port number in the received s...

Page 1728: ...ing information in the received sFlow packet int LAST_USED_TIME Last used time of the routing information int DST_AS_PATH Routing path information in the received sFlow packet varchar 2048 COMMUNITIES...

Page 1729: ...Format Size SLNUM This column is used to store a counter value to identify the total row count bigserial TIME_IN_SECONDS Data collection time in seconds int DEVICE_ID ID of the product which sends th...

Page 1730: ...nt DEVICE_ID ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic int FRAMES Number of frames transmitted through the sflow sample collected bigint BYTES Number of bytes transmitted through the sflow sampl...

Page 1731: ...SFLOW_REPORT_L3_SOURCE Field Definition Format Size SFLOW_REPORT_L3_SOURCE_ID Primary key autogenerated ID int REPORT_DEFINITION_ID Report definition ID int ADDRESS_GROUP_ID ACL network group IDs mapp...

Page 1732: ...ed sFlow packet bytea L3_DEST_ADDR L3 address of the destination in the received sFlow packet bytea L3_PROTOCOL L3 protocol value in the received sFlow packet For example ARP int IP_TOS Type of servic...

Page 1733: ...tion Format Size MIN_SLNUM Maximum row count bigint TABLE 367 SMART_CARD Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int CARD_TYPE Indicates how this smart card is configured...

Page 1734: ...e 1 and other fabric entries within the same SAN will have value as 0 int TABLE 369 SNAPSHOT_PRODUCT_STATUS Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier serial DEPLOYMENT_STATU...

Page 1735: ...s applicable if the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv3 varchar 128 AUTH_PROTOCOL An indication of whether messages sent or received on behalf of this user can be authenticated and if so which au...

Page 1736: ...type can be device 0 or interface or ports 1 num 2 0 TARGET_ID DB ID of the target which can be device or interface int VALUE Aggregated value inserted during the aging process double precision TIME_I...

Page 1737: ...EXPRESSION_ID MIB object ID int TARGET_TYPE Target type of the SNMP collector data Th target type for device level collector is 0 for port level collector is 1 smallint TARGET_ID Target ID of the SNMP...

Page 1738: ...of the expression varchar 64 DESCRIPTION Description of the expression varchar 512 EQUATION Equation of the expression varchar 1024 UNIT Unit that is used for displaying the chart varchar 64 IS_TRANS...

Page 1739: ...v3 varchar 128 AUTH_PROTOCOL An indication of whether or not messages sent or received on behalf of this user can be authenticated and if so which authentication protocol to use The supported values f...

Page 1740: ...of credentials to authenticate v1 v2c or v3 traps int TABLE 381 SNMP_V3_FORWARDING_CREDENTIAL Field Definition Format Size ID int USER_NAME USM user name varchar 64 CONTEXT_NAME USM context name VARC...

Page 1741: ...3 num 2 0 CERTIFICATE The content of the ssl certificate txt USER_ID This field will be populated when the Management application user creates certificate or import certificates from file User can vi...

Page 1742: ...ID Unique generated database identifier int FIVE_MIN_VALUE Configured maximum samples value for the five minute table int THIRTY_MIN_VALUE Configured maximum samples value for the thirty minute table...

Page 1743: ...numeric 1 0 EDGE_PORT Edge port 0 Disabled 1 Enabled numeric 1 0 AUTO_EDGE Auto edge 0 Disabled 1 Enabled numeric 1 0 ROOT_GUARD Root guard 0 Disabled 1 Enabled numeric 1 0 HELLO_TIME Number of second...

Page 1744: ...d or not smallint ALERTS_ENABLED Flag indicates if bottleneck detection alerts is enabled or not smallint CONGESTION_THRESHOLD Value of bottleneck detection congestion threshold in percent double prec...

Page 1745: ...value helps to figure out who triggered the configuration upload operation varchar 64 CONFIG_TYPE Configuration Type FC 0 CEE_RUNNING 1 CEE_STARTUP 2 INVALID 1 Default value is 0 smallint COMMENTS Br...

Page 1746: ...n module implementation smallint SUBTYPE Switch subtype At present no subtypes for existing model records are defined Default value is 0 smallint DESCRIPTION Model description such as FC link speed po...

Page 1747: ...rchar 16 FULL_TYPE Refers to the full type of the port U Port F Port etc varchar 128 STATUS Refers to the Status of the port Eg No Light No Module Mod_inv Online etc varchar 64 HEALTH Refers to the He...

Page 1748: ...ic PDCM varchar 1024 PROHIBIT_PORT_COUNT The count of prohibited ports smallint NPIV Whether NPIV mode is enabled smallint NPIV_CAPABLE Instance NPIV mode capability 1 indicates port has NPIV capabili...

Page 1749: ...port Default value is 1 smallint LOGICAL_PORT_WWN Logical port WWN of F Port trunk group char 23 PREVIOUS_TYPE This fields copies the old state of the port type The field could be used to track the s...

Page 1750: ...n None 0 Decommission In Progress 1 Decommissioned 2 Recommission In Progress 3 Recommissioned 4 If the decommission is performed through CLI or other Management application server then the state woul...

Page 1751: ...ouble precision TX_UTILIZATION The computed value of TX based on speed of port double precision RX_UTILIZATION The computed value of RX based on speed of port double precision LINK_FAILURE Count of li...

Page 1752: ...speed type of the port It will contain one of the following values 1 indicates speed is in Mbps 2 indicates speed is in Gbps int TABLE 397 SWITCH_THRESHOLD_SETTING Field Definition Format Size SWITCH_...

Page 1753: ...URE_ID References the ID In PM_MEASURE table where all measures are defined int HIGH_BOUNDARY Configured high boundary threshold value for measure ID int LOW_BOUNDARY Configured low boundary threshold...

Page 1754: ...data For device level collector it will use deviceId for port level it will use interfaceId int COLLECTOR_ID ID of the data_collector int MEASURE_INDEX Stores the index_map value in case of an express...

Page 1755: ...of the measure retrieved from the corresponding target int TARGET_TYPE Target type of the PM collector data For IP_DEVICE 0 IP_PORT 1 IP_TRUNK 2 FOS_DEVICE 3 FC_PORT 4 GE_PORT 5 TE_PORT 6 HBA_PORT 7 C...

Page 1756: ...ME_ID ME_ID of the target int VALUE Stores One day aggregated data double precision MIN_VALUE Minimum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1 day data double precision MAX_VALUE Maximum value in 2...

Page 1757: ...llector it will use deviceId virtualSwitchId for port level it will use interfaceId switchPortId fcipTunnelId devicePortId int COLLECTOR_ID DB ID of the pm_data_collector int MEASURE_INDEX Stores the...

Page 1758: ...retrieved from the corresponding target int TARGET_TYPE Target type of the PM collector data For IP_DEVICE 0 IP_PORT 1 IP_TRUNK 2 FOS_DEVICE 3 FC_PORT 4 GE_PORT 5 TE_PORT 6 HBA_PORT 7 CNA_PORT 8 VIRTU...

Page 1759: ...ME_ID of the target int VALUE Stores the 2 hours aggregated data double precision MIN_VALUE Minimum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2 hours of data double precision MAX_VALUE Maximum value in...

Page 1760: ...ue in case of an expression varchar 256 ME_ID ME_ID of the target int VALUE Stores the raw data received from the device double precision SUM_VALUE Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with column n...

Page 1761: ...SwitchId for port level it will use interfaceId switchPortId fcipTunnelId devicePortId int COLLECTOR_ID DB ID of the pm_data_collector int MEASURE_INDEX Stores the index_map value in case of an expres...

Page 1762: ...o samples only used for counter values 0 for all other types of measures double precision TABLE 420 TIME_SERIES_DATA_4 Field Definition Format Size TIME_IN_SECONDS Time when value of the measure retri...

Page 1763: ...e in 2 hour table while aggregating 1 day data double precision SUM_VALUE Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with column names in aggregated data tables Stores the delta changes for counter values...

Page 1764: ...s the index_map value in case of an expression varchar 256 ME_ID ME_ID of the target int VALUE Stores the 30 minutes aggregated data double precision MIN_VALUE Minimum value in raw performance statist...

Page 1765: ...target int TARGET_TYPE Target type of the PM collector data For IP_DEVICE 0 IP_PORT 1 IP_TRUNK 2 FOS_DEVICE 3 FC_PORT 4 GE_PORT 5 TE_PORT 6 HBA_PORT 7 CNA_PORT 8 VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT 9 FCIP_TUNNEL 10 EE_...

Page 1766: ...tifier int NAME Image name in the foo png format varchar 256 IMAGE_OBJECT Image Object BLOB bytea TABLE 429 TRILL Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int CLUSTER_ME_ID...

Page 1767: ...niquely generated by DB int ME_ID The Management Element ID of the VCS member in the VirtualSwitch int MASTER_PORT_NUMBER The master port represented as a tuple of member slot port varchar 30 TABLE 43...

Page 1768: ...ot locked out because of exceeding max number of invalid login attempts timestamp STATUS User s account status 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Default value is 1 smallint SOURCE_OF_CREATION To identify the sourc...

Page 1769: ...28 USER_ID Foreign Key USER_ ID ID of the user who created the Custom Dashboard int TABLE 438 USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE_MEMBERSHIP Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier...

Page 1770: ...EASURE_TYPE This identifies the collectible type 0 for MIBs and 1 for Expressions int TABLE 441 USER_REALTIME_MEASURE_SETTING Field Definition Format Size ID Primary Key field for the user_realtime_me...

Page 1771: ...itiator varchar 256 SWITCH_IP IP of the switch the V port is connected to varchar 128 VF_ID VF ID for the V port smallint TABLE 446 VCN_ICL Field Definition Format Size VCN_ICL_ID Virtual Cluster Node...

Page 1772: ...varchar 256 PEER_OPER_STATE Cluster Peer operational state smallint PEER_DOWN_REASON Cluster Peer down reason int PEER_UP_TIME Cluster Peer up time int VCN_MEMBER_ID Virtual Cluster Node member id fo...

Page 1773: ...PI port number on the VCEM server int USERNAME The username to be used to logon to the VCEM server varchar 512 PASSWORD The password to be used to logon to the VCEM server Will be store encrypted varc...

Page 1774: ...EAL_SERVER_PORT The Port Number for the Real Server int TABLE 453 VIRTUAL_CIRCUIT_INTERFACE Field Definition Format Size INTERFACE_ID int TABLE 454 VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT Field Definition Format Size ID Un...

Page 1775: ...int TX The number of valid frames sent from the port double precision RX The number of valid frames received at this port double precision TX_UTILIZATION The computed value of TX based on speed of po...

Page 1776: ...ue smallint TYPE Active WWN 0 Auto is the switch created VPWWN and User is user defined VPWWN 1 User smallint STATUS Enable or disable the VPWWN feature on switch port or AG port 1 Enabled 0 disabled...

Page 1777: ...o login to the switch varchar 128 MANAGEMENT_STATE Management state of the switch This is a bit mask that indicates the switches manageability state like switch not reachable credentials invalid not r...

Page 1778: ...1 is capable 0 is not capable smallint PORT_BASED_ROUTING Indicates whether the port based routing is present 1 is present 0 is absent smallint IN_ORDER_DELIVERY Indicates whether in order delivery i...

Page 1779: ...TATE This fields copies the old state of the switch The field could be used to track the state change information for the switch These values to be populated by FCS during Fabric Refresh task SMIA req...

Page 1780: ...W Marginal int FABRIC_STATUS Stores the fabric level status of the node like Unknown and Online Status is Unknown when A node is going through a reboot or ISLs have not formed yet A node is not part o...

Page 1781: ...rtual switch int COLLECTOR_NAME Collector name varchar 256 LAST_VIRTUAL_SW_ MODIFICATION Last modified time on switch timestamp TABLE 462 VLAN Field Definition Format Size VLAN_DB_ID Unique database g...

Page 1782: ...rence to VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION table int C_TAG_ID This as an Incoming customer tag c tag associated with a GVLAN and its applicable only for trunk mode If the TLS Transparent LAN Service is enabled...

Page 1783: ...the source host at the time of the vmotion varchar 128 SOURCE_HOST_UUID The uuid assigned by the hypervisor to the source host varchar 64 DEST_HOST_NAME The name of the destination host at the time o...

Page 1784: ...smallint PNIC_MAC Physical Nic mac addresse of the connected Pnic on the host varchar 256 PORT_PROFILES Comma separated PP Name SwitchName for all the port profiles associated with the vNics that are...

Page 1785: ...ppings can be created on this datastore 0 no 1 yes smallint PERFILE_THIN_PROVISIONING_S UPPORTED Flag indicating whether or not the per file thin provisioning is supported or not 0 no 1 yes When thin...

Page 1786: ...ortgroup or port level will raise exception int MAC_ADDRESS The mac address that is used at this port varchar 64 RUNTIME_LINK_UP_STA TE Whether the port is in linkUp status varchar 128 RUNTIME_LINK_PE...

Page 1787: ...in the switch Standalone ports are ports that don t belong to any portgroup int ADMIN_NAME The name of the person that is responsible for the switch varchar 256 ADMIN_CONTACT The contact information f...

Page 1788: ...discovery protocol 0 CDP else 1 which is LLDP smallint DISCOVERY_OPERATION Discovery operation default is 0 listen 1 advertise 2 both 3 none smallint CDP_ENABLED Whether CDP is enabled on the dvswitc...

Page 1789: ...s associated with int MOR_ID The managed object reference number assigned by the hypervisor int TABLE 481 VM_FC_HBA_DEVICE_PORT_MAP Field Definition Format Size DEVICE_PORT_ID A foreign key referencin...

Page 1790: ...in the host component is not the same as the configuration in VirtualCenter server 4 pending The host component is waiting to be initialized 5 up The host component is up and running 6 warning The hos...

Page 1791: ...T_GROUP_ KEY The key of the portgroup to be connected to the physical NIC varchar 256 UPLINK_PORT_KEY The key of the port to be connected to the physical NICs varchar 256 UPLINK_PORT_NAME The name of...

Page 1792: ..._GROUP_ID ID of standard vSwitch port group int VM_STANDARD_VIRTUA L_SWITCH_ID ID of standard vSwitch int VM_DV_SWITCH_ID ID of distributed vSwitch int VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_I D ID of distributed vSwitch p...

Page 1793: ...cy for this network adapter team The bridge must be BondBridge for this property to be valid The flag to indicate whether or not to enable this property to enable beacon probing as a method to validat...

Page 1794: ...h is used whenever available when the path pol icy is Fixed The default value is 0 smallint USAGE Identifies how a VMware VM uses this LUN 0 NA used for Hyper V 1 VMFS datastores 2 RDM Raw Device Mapp...

Page 1795: ...ied using the same notation varchar 64 SUBNET_MASK Subnet mask for the Physical NIC varchar 64 VM_HOST_ID A foreign key referencing VM_HOST ID int VM_STANDARD_VIRTUA L_SWITCH_ID A foreign key referenc...

Page 1796: ...le Bridge 2 smallint VM_HOST_ID References the ESX host in which this switch exists int MOR_ID The managed object reference number assigned by the hypervisor int TABLE 493 VM_STANDARD_VSWITCH_PORT Fie...

Page 1797: ...CITY For disks the disk capacity in GB double precision STATUS The status reported by the host 0 offline 1 online smallint PATH_POLICY Determines how multiple paths to this LUN are used 0 fixed 1 Most...

Page 1798: ...ype of traffic shaping policy whether ingress or egress 0 is ingress 1 is egress traffic shaping policy smallint TABLE 498 VM_VCENTER Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifi...

Page 1799: ...t 4 Disconnected 5 Not responding smallint REASON In case the status is 3 Conflict Existing host then this field will be used to persist the hostname for conflicting user defined host varchar 1024 VM_...

Page 1800: ...disable wake on LAN smallint VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID Foreign Key to the vm_virtual_machine table References the VM to which this vnic is attached int ADAPTER_TYPE One of E1000 Vmxnet Pcnet32 smallint VM_ST...

Page 1801: ...archar 64 IP_ADDRESS The primary IPv4 or IPv6 IP address used by the VM on the management LAN if any Primary is defined by the VM vendor varchar 32 HOSTNAME The primary hostname assigned to this VM va...

Page 1802: ...ual machine bigint USED_STORAGE Storage space in bytes on this datastore that is actually being used by the virtual machine It includes space actually occupied by disks logs snapshots configuration fi...

Page 1803: ...VERSION varchar 128 CREATION_TIME timestamp LAST_UPDATE_TIME timestamp TABLE 506 VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier serial VCEM_PROFILE_ID Foreig...

Page 1804: ...tus of the module varchar 256 IO_BAY The bay number of the module int VENDOR Subject to chnage May not be able to differentiate module maker Maker of the module 0 unknown 1 Brocade 2 QLogic int CREATI...

Page 1805: ...e the bay object inside the server profile The value matches the domain GUID varchar 512 TABLE 511 VR_CONN_WWN Field Definition Format Size ID Unique generated database identifier int VR_CONN_FC_CONNE...

Page 1806: ...ECTED_SWITCH_INTER FACE_ID The reference to the switch interface in interface table which connected to the AP int TABLE 514 WT_ARCHIVE Field Definition Format Size FIRMWARE_VERSION Firmware version fo...

Page 1807: ...nique generated database identifier int FABRIC_ID PK of the owning fabric int NAME Zone DB name for offline Zone DBs varchar 256 OFFLINE Offline Zone DB 1 offline smallint CREATED Created timestamp ti...

Page 1808: ...nt CONTENT Saved online content before offline was saved to switch text TI_CONTENT TI_CONTENT saved online TI zone content before offline was saved to switch text DEFINED text ACTIVE text TABLE 522 ZO...

Page 1809: ..._N_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID AG_N_PORT ID as SOURCE_PORT_ID AG_N_PORT WWN as SOURCE_PORT_WWN AG_N_PORT TYPE as SOURCE_PORT_TYPE AG_N_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER as SOURCE_USER_PORT_NUMBER E...

Page 1810: ...guration deploy_option deployment_configuration deployment_handler_id deployment_configuration schedule_enabled deployment_configuration snapshot_enabled deployment_configuration cli_template_id deplo...

Page 1811: ...LE_DETAILS IMPORTED_DATE BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS RELEASE_DATE BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS RELEASE_NOTES_LOCATION BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS LOCATION BOOT_IMAGE_DRIVER_MAP SUPPORTED_DRIVERS from BOOT_IMAGE_FI...

Page 1812: ..._ID CNA_ETH_PORT HARDWARE_PATH CNA_ETH_PORT STATUS CNA_ETH_PORT CREATION_TIME as ETH_PORT_CREATION_TIME CNA_ETH_PORT CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS as CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS CNA_ETH_PORT MAX_BANDWIDTH CNA_ETH_PORT...

Page 1813: ...ORE_SWITCH CREATION_TIME CORE_SWITCH LAST_SCAN_TIME CORE_SWITCH LAST_UPDATE_TIME CORE_SWITCH SYSLOG_REGISTERED CORE_SWITCH CALL_HOME_ENABLED CORE_SWITCH SNMP_REGISTERED CORE_SWITCH USER_IP_ADDRESS COR...

Page 1814: ..._SWITCH_DETAILS MAPS_ENABLED from CORE_SWITCH LEFT OUTER JOIN CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS on CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS CORE_SWITCH_ID CORE_SWITCH ID CRYPTO_HOST_LUN_INFO create or replace view CRYPTO_HOST_LUN_INFO...

Page 1815: ...US CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER FRONT_END_N_PORT_NUMBER ENCRYPTION_ENGINE STATUS ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_STATUS ENCRYPTION_ENGINE HA_CLUSTER_ID ENCRYPTION_ENGINE SYSTEM_CARD_STATUS ENCRYPTION_ENGINE WWN_POOLS_AV...

Page 1816: ...ATION CREATED_BY as CREATOR DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION SCHEDULE_ENABLED as SCHEDULE_ENABLED DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION SNAPSHOT_ENABLED as SNAPSHOT_ENABLED SCHEDULE_ENTRY TYPE as FREQUENCY DEPLOYMENT_CONF...

Page 1817: ...m DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION inner join DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER on DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER ID inner join DEPLOYMENT_STATUS on DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION ID DEPLOYMENT_...

Page 1818: ...with time zone epoch TIME_IN_SECONDS interval 1 second as CREATION_TIME sum case when MEASURE_ID 208 then value else 0 end as TX_UTILIZATION sum case when MEASURE_ID 209 then value else 0 end as RX_U...

Page 1819: ...16 group by ME_ID TARGET_TYPE TARGET_ID TIME_IN_SECONDS VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc TE_PORT_STATS_5MIN_INFO create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_5MIN_INFO as select VIRTUAL_SWITCH...

Page 1820: ...TARGET_ID TIME_IN_SECONDS VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc TE_PORT_STATS_2HOUR_INFO create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_2HOUR_INFO as select VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID ME_I...

Page 1821: ...RTUAL_SWITCH where ME_ID MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID 12 group by ME_ID TARGET_TYPE TARGET_ID TIME_IN_SECONDS VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc SWITCH_INFO create or replace view...

Page 1822: ...WITCH VIRTUAL_SWITCH FEATURES_SUPPORTED VIRTUAL_SWITCH FMS_MODE VIRTUAL_SWITCH DYNAMIC_LOAD_SHARING VIRTUAL_SWITCH PORT_BASED_ROUTING VIRTUAL_SWITCH IN_ORDER_DELIVERY VIRTUAL_SWITCH INSISTENT_DID_MODE...

Page 1823: ...t_private_ip_address core_switch alternate_ip_address core_switch mac_address virtual_switch id virtual_switch name virtual_switch operational_status virtual_switch switch_mode virtual_switch ad_capab...

Page 1824: ...xt OR switch_port type like LB Port AS switch_port_count SELECT count device_node id AS count FROM device_node device_port switch_port WHERE device_node id device_port node_id AND device_port switch_p...

Page 1825: ...rt character varying N Port character varying text OR switch_port type like LB Port AS unlicensed_switch_port_count FROM fabric fabric_member virtual_switch core_switch LEFT JOIN core_switch_details O...

Page 1826: ...YPE SWITCH_INFO IP_ADDRESS SWITCH_INFO PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN SWITCH_INFO FIRMWARE_VERSION SWITCH_INFO REACHABLE SWITCH_INFO SYSLOG_REGISTERED SWITCH_INFO SNMP_REGISTERED SWITCH_INFO ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH...

Page 1827: ...Y_ DEVICE_NODE TRUSTED DEVICE_NODE CREATION_TIME DEVICE_NODE MISSING DEVICE_NODE MISSING_TIME DEVICE_NODE PROXY_DEVICE DEVICE_NODE AG DEVICE_NODE PREVIOUS_MISSING_STATE USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL NAME...

Page 1828: ...REASON FICON_DEVICE_PORT TYPE_NUMBER FICON_DEVICE_PORT MODEL_NUMBER FICON_DEVICE_PORT MANUFACTURER FICON_DEVICE_PORT MANUFACTURER_PLANT FICON_DEVICE_PORT SEQUENCE_NUMBER FICON_DEVICE_PORT TAG FICON_DE...

Page 1829: ...DN SYMBOLIC_NAME as DEVICE_NODE_SYMBOLIC_NAME DN TYPE as DEVICE_NODE_TYPE DN FDMI_HOST_NAME DN VENDOR DN CAPABILITY_ DN TRUSTED as DEVICE_NODE_TRUSTED DN CREATION_TIME as DEVICE_NODE_CREATION_TIME DN...

Page 1830: ...ay 65 66 4 and SP LICENSED is null or SP LICENSED 1 and VS MONITORED is null or VS MONITORED 1 and VS SWITCH_MODE is null or VS SWITCH_MODE any array 0 2 DEV_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK_INFO create or replace...

Page 1831: ...CH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER DEST_SWITCH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as DEST_SWITCH_ID DEST_SWITCH_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER as...

Page 1832: ...ATE DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH MONITORED as DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MONITORED DEST_SWITCH_PORT ID as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_ID DEST_SWITCH_PORT WWN as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_WWN DEST_SWITCH_PORT NAME as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NAM...

Page 1833: ...PORT ID ETHERNET_ISL DEST_PORT_ID and DEST_GIGE_PORT SWITCH_PORT_ID DEST_SWITCH_PORT ID and DEST_SWITCH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID EVENT_DETAILS_INFO create or replace view EVENT_DE...

Page 1834: ...HOME FRU_POSITION as FRU_POSITION EVENT_DETAILS INTERFACE_TYPE as INTERFACE_TYPE EVENT_DETAILS PORT_NAME as PORT_NAME EVENT_DETAILS MAC_ADDRESS from EVENT left outer join EVENT_ORIGIN on EVENT EVENT_O...

Page 1835: ...ID and EVENT EVENT_MODULE_ID EVENT_MODULE ID and EVENT EVENT_DESCRIPTION_ID EVENT_DESCRIPTION ID FABRIC_INFO create or replace view FABRIC_INFO as select FABRIC ID FABRIC SAN_ID FABRIC SEED_SWITCH_WW...

Page 1836: ...KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT ADMIN_STATUS FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT METRIC FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT DATA_L2_COS FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT DSCP_DATA FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT MAX_RETRANSMISSIONS FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT...

Page 1837: ...TUNNEL FICON_DLA_EMUL_ENABLED FCIP_TUNNEL FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_PIPE FCIP_TUNNEL FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_PIPE FCIP_TUNNEL FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_OPS FCIP_TUNNEL FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_OPS FCIP_TUNNEL FICON_TAPE...

Page 1838: ...in FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP on FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP TUNNEL_ID FCIP_TUNNEL ID left outer join SWITCH_PORT PORT on FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP SWITCHPORT_ID PORT ID FCOE_DEVICE_INFO create or replace view FCOE_DEV...

Page 1839: ..._CLOUD_LINK SWITCH_PORT_ID as GIGE_PORT_ID GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK CLOUD_ID GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK TRUSTED GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK CREATION_TIME GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK MISSIN...

Page 1840: ...GIGE_PORT SLOT_NUMBER in 0 CARD SLOT_NUMBER GENERATED_BIRTREPORT_INFO CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW generated_birtreport_info AS SELECT generated_birtreport id AS generated_report_id generated_birtreport fil...

Page 1841: ...ail generated_birtreport scheduled generated_birtreport schedule_id birtreport_schedule_config name AS schedule_name birtreport_schedule_config report_store_location birtreport_schedule_config format_...

Page 1842: ...AIL INTERRUPT_CONTROL_COALESCE HBA_PORT_DETAIL INTERRUPT_CONTROL_LATENCY HBA_PORT_DETAIL INTERRUPT_CONTROL_DELAY HBA_PORT_DETAIL BEACON_STATE HBA_PORT_DETAIL LINK_BEACON_STATE HBA_PORT_DETAIL MPIO_MOD...

Page 1843: ..._DETAIL IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_MAX HBA_PORT_DETAIL IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_OPERATIONAL HBA_PORT_DETAIL IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_CONFIGURED HBA_PORT_DETAIL BOOTUP_DELAY HBA_PORT_DETAIL FEC_STATE HBA_PORT_DETAIL BB_CREDIT_R...

Page 1844: ...TRANSMISSION_SUPPORT HBA_REMOTE_PORT REC_SUPPORT HBA_REMOTE_PORT TASK_RENTRY_IDENT_SUPPORT HBA_REMOTE_PORT CONFIRMED_COMPLETIONS_SUPPORT from HBA_TARGET HBA_REMOTE_PORT HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN where HBA_T...

Page 1845: ...t null or HBA VPD_OEM_INFO then N A else HBA VPD_OEM_INFO end as ADAPTER_OEM_INFO case when ADAPTER_PORT PCIF_INDEX then ADAPTER_PORT PCIF_INDEX else ADAPTER_PORT PORT_NUMBER varchar end as ADAPTER_PO...

Page 1846: ...C_MAP sp_name ADAPTER_PORT_FABRIC_MAP sp_slot_number ADAPTER_PORT_FABRIC_MAP sp_port_number ADAPTER_PORT_FABRIC_MAP sp_port_id ADAPTER_PORT_FABRIC_MAP sp_port_index ADAPTER_PORT_FABRIC_MAP sp_area_id...

Page 1847: ...PORT_FABRIC_MAP ADAPTER_PORT_WWN DEVICE_PORT_INFO WWN select DEVICE_PORT_ID CONFIGURED_STATE CONFIGURED_SPEED CONFIGURED_TOPOLOGY MAX_SPEED_SUPPORTED OPERATING_STATE OPERATING_TOPOLOGY SUPPORTED_FC4_T...

Page 1848: ...OST_NAME AS REQUEST_HOST_NAME HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST REQUEST_GROUP_ID HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION_ID HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST VM_MANAGEMENT_ST...

Page 1849: ...ISCOVERY_REQUEST join HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION on HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION_ID HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION ID left outer join DEVICE_ENCLOSURE on HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID D...

Page 1850: ...IKE_POLICY_NUM FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT IPSEC_POLICY_NUM FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT PRESHARED_KEY FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT SOURCE_IP FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT DEST_IP FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT VLAN_TAG FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT DP1_SOU...

Page 1851: ...DP1_SWITCH_PORT ON DP1_GIGE_PORT SWITCH_PORT_ID DP1_SWITCH_PORT ID where FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT TUNNEL_ID FCIP_TUNNEL ID IFL_INFO create or replace view IFL_INFO as select IFL ID as IFL_ID IFL EDGE_FABRI...

Page 1852: ...status AS bb_switch_status bb_vs status_reason AS bb_switch_status_reason bb_vs core_switch_id AS bb_core_switch_id bb_vs base_switch AS bb_base_switch bb_vs management_state AS bb_virtual_switch_mana...

Page 1853: ...re_switch_smodel edge_cs ip_address AS edge_core_switch_ip_address edge_cs wwn AS edge_core_switch_physical_switch_wwn edge_cs operational_status AS edge_core_switch_operational_status edge_cs name AS...

Page 1854: ...s SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NAME SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT TYPE as PORT_TYPE SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT KIND as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_KIND SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT PHYSICAL_PORT as SOURCE_PHYSICAL_PORT SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT TRUNKED as...

Page 1855: ...H OPERATIONAL_STATUS AS SOURCE_SWITCH_OPERATIONAL_STATUS SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH STATE AS SOURCE_SWITCH_STATE SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH STATUS AS SOURCE_SWITCH_STATUS SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH STATUS_REASON AS...

Page 1856: ...DEST_CORE_SWITCH_WWN DEST_CORE_SWITCH NAME AS DEST_CORE_SWITCH_NAME DEST_CORE_SWITCH TYPE AS DEST_CORE_SWITCH_TYPE DEST_CORE_SWITCH OPERATIONAL_STATUS AS DEST_CORE_SWITCH_OPERATIONAL_STATUS DEST_CORE_...

Page 1857: ...H_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER ISL DEST_PORT_NUMBER JOIN FABRIC ON FABRIC ID ISL FABRIC_ID WHERE SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH MONITORED 1 AND SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH TYPE NOT IN 40 41 AND SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT CATEGORY IS...

Page 1858: ..._PORT_NUMBER and DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER FABRIC_ID ISL FABRIC_ID and DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH DOMAIN_ID ISL DEST_DOMAIN_ID and DEST_SWITCH_PORT VI...

Page 1859: ...INFO SOURCE_SWITCH_NAME ISL_INFO SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID ISL_INFO DEST_PORT_NUMBER ISL_INFO DEST_SWITCH_ID DEST_CORE_SWITCH IP_ADDRESS as DEST_SWITCH_IP_ADDRESS DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH WWN as DEST_SWITCH_WW...

Page 1860: ...TIME MAPS_EVENT CATEGORY MAPS_EVENT VIOLATION_TYPE MAPS_EVENT MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID MAPS_EVENT ORIGIN_FABRIC_ID MAPS_EVENT SWITCH_PORT_ID MAPS_EVENT INTERFACE_ID MAPS_EVENT FCIP_CIRCUIT_ID MAPS_EVENT FRU...

Page 1861: ...GICAL_PORT EDGE_SWITCH_PORT PORT_INDEX as EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_ZONING_PORT_INDEX EDGE_SWITCH_PORT PORT_ID as EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_ID EDGE_SWITCH_PORT AREA_ID as EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_AREA_ID EDGE_SWITCH_PORT MAC_A...

Page 1862: ...IC MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED EDGE_FABRIC TYPE as FABRIC_TYPE EDGE_FABRIC SEED_SWITCH_WWN EDGE_FABRIC PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN as PRINCIPAL_WWN AG_F_PORT WWN as AG_F_PORT_WWN AG_F_PORT SLOT_NUMBER as AG_F_...

Page 1863: ...AL_SWITCH VENDOR as AG_PHYSICAL_SWITCH_VENDOR AG_PHYSICAL_SWITCH REACHABLE as AG_PHYSICAL_SWITCH_REACHABLE AG_PHYSICAL_SWITCH OPERATIONAL_STATUS as AG_PHYSICAL_SWITCH_OPERATIONAL_STATUS AG_PHYSICAL_SW...

Page 1864: ...CH_PORT_WWN left join DEVICE_NODE END_DEVICE_NODE on END_DEVICE_PORT NODE_ID END_DEVICE_NODE ID left join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL on END_DEVICE_NODE WWN USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL WWN left join SWI...

Page 1865: ...distinct MODULE MODULE_ID MODULE NUM_PORTS MODULE IS_PRESENT MODULE IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE MODULE NUM_CPUS MODULE HW_REVISION MODULE SW_REVISION SLOT SLOT_NUM PHYSICAL_DEVICE DEVICE_ID PHYSICAL_DEVICE...

Page 1866: ...N AG_F_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER as F_PORT AG_F_PORT WWN as AG_F_PORT_WWN AG_F_PORT REMOTE_NODE_WWN from NPORT_WWN_MAP SWITCH_PORT AG_N_PORT SWITCH_PORT AG_F_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH AG_SWITCH where NPORT_WWN_...

Page 1867: ...RIC_WATCH_STATUS_REASON TEMP_DEVICE ADMIN_STATUS case when TEMP_DEVICE ADMIN_STATUS 1 then TROUBLESHOOTING else NORMAL end as ADMIN_STATUS_TXT TEMP_DEVICE ADMIN_STATUS_LAST_UPDATED TEMP_DEVICE MEMO TE...

Page 1868: ...EMP_DEVICE SUB_CATEGORY 4 then DCX when TEMP_DEVICE SUB_CATEGORY 5 then DCX 4S when TEMP_DEVICE SUB_CATEGORY 6 then VCS VDX when TEMP_DEVICE SUB_CATEGORY 7 then VDX 6720 24 when TEMP_DEVICE SUB_CATEGO...

Page 1869: ...ECK_CONFIG BOTTLENECK_DETECT_ENABLED PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG ALERTS_ENABLED PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG CONGESTION_THRESHOLD PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG LATENCY_THRESHOLD PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG WINDOW_ PORT_BOTT...

Page 1870: ...RIC_NAME FABRIC MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED PORT_GROUP ID as PORT_GROUP_ID PORT_GROUP_MEMBER ID as PORT_GROUP_MEMBER_ID from SWITCH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH FABRIC FABRIC_MEMBER PORT_GROUP_MEMBER PORT_GROUP...

Page 1871: ...S_PFC_MAP COS0_TX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP COS0_RX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP COS1_TX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP COS1_RX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP COS2_TX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP COS2_RX PORT_PROFILE_QOS_...

Page 1872: ...BEL VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE NAME as VM_NAME VM_VCENTER_MEMBER HOST_NAME as HOST_NAME VM_VCENTER NAME as VCENTER_NAME INTERFACE IDENTIFIER from PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP left outer join VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPT...

Page 1873: ...C_SUBNET_BITS DEST_SUBNET_BITS IN_PRIORITY OUT_PRIORITY IN_VLAN OUT_VLAN L3_PROTOCOL L4_SRC_PORT L4_DEST_PORT TIME_IN_SECONDS SRC_MAC DEST_MAC L3_SRC_ADDR L3_DEST_ADDR TCP_FLAGS LOCAL_AS SRC_AS SRC_PE...

Page 1874: ...S EE_MONITOR_STATS CREATION_TIME SOURCE_PORT PORT_ID as SID DEST_PORT PORT_ID as DID SOURCE_NODE WWN as SOURCE_DEVICE_WWN SOURCE_PORT WWN as SOURCE_PORT_WWN DEST_NODE WWN as DEST_DEVICE_WWN DEST_PORT...

Page 1875: ..._STATE VIRTUAL_SWITCH MONITORED from SENSOR CORE_SWITCH VIRTUAL_SWITCH where SENSOR CORE_SWITCH_ID CORE_SWITCH ID and SENSOR CORE_SWITCH_ID VIRTUAL_SWITCH CORE_SWITCH_ID SMART_CARD_USAGE_INFO create o...

Page 1876: ...D SC FIRST_NAME SC LAST_NAME SC NOTES SC CREATION_TIME EE ID ENGINE_ID 1 ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID GROUP_NAME 1 CARD_POSITION EE SWITCH_ID CRYPTO_SWITCH_ID EE SLOT_NUMBER SLOT_NUMBER from SMART_CARD SC ENCR...

Page 1877: ...ITCH_PORT_WWN SWITCH_PORT AREA_ID as REMOTE_PORT_AREA_ID SWITCH_PORT MAC_ADDRESS as REMOTE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS SWITCH_PORT PORT_MOD as REMOTE_PORT_MOD SWITCH_PORT FULL_TYPE as REMOTE_PORT_FULL_TYPE SWITC...

Page 1878: ...ETAILS SUB_TYPE 0 character varying integer SWITCH_MODEL SUBTYPE where SWITCH_PORT LICENSED 1 and SWITCH_PORT PHYSICAL_PORT 1 and SWITCH_PORT KIND text ICL text and SWITCH_PORT TYPE text ANY array E P...

Page 1879: ...SLOT_NUMBER SWITCH_PORT PORT_NUMBER SWITCH_PORT USER_PORT_NUMBER SWITCH_PORT NAME as PORT_NAME SWITCH_PORT SPEED as PORT_SPEED SWITCH_PORT STATUS as PORT_STATUS SWITCH_PORT STATE as PORT_STATE SWITCH...

Page 1880: ...SWMDL_VIEW REMOTE_PORT_MOD SWPRT_VSW_CSW_CSWDET_SWMDL_VIEW REMOTE_PORT_FULL_TYPE SWPRT_VSW_CSW_CSWDET_SWMDL_VIEW REMOTE_PORT_HEALTH SWPRT_VSW_CSW_CSWDET_SWMDL_VIEW REMOTE_SWITCH_PORT_STATUS_MESSAGE SW...

Page 1881: ...ng as DEVICE_VENDOR coalesce DEVPORT_DEVNODE_VIEW DEVICE_NODE_TYPE SWPRT_VSW_CSW_CSWDET_SWMDL_VIEW REMOTE_SWITCH_MODEL_DESCRIPTION CHARACTER VARYING as DEVICE_TYPE coalesce SWPRT_VSW_CSW_CSWDET_SWMDL_...

Page 1882: ...STERED CORE_SWITCH SNMP_REGISTERED CORE_SWITCH USER_IP_ADDRESS CORE_SWITCH MANAGING_SERVER_IP_ADDRESS CORE_SWITCH CREATION_TIME as CS_CREATION_TIME CORE_SWITCH LAST_UPDATE_TIME as CS_LAST_UPDATE_TIME...

Page 1883: ...ROTOCOL FABRIC_MEMBER FABRIC_ID FABRIC_MEMBER TRUSTED FABRIC_MEMBER MISSING FABRIC_MEMBER MISSING_TIME CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS ETHERNET_MASK CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS FC_MASK CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS FC_IP CORE_SWIT...

Page 1884: ...ITCH_DETAILS CORE_SWITCH_ID CORE_SWITCH ID SWITCH_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO create or replace view SWITCH_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO as select L2_NEIGHBOR LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_VALUE L2_NEIGHBOR INTERFACE_ID INTERFA...

Page 1885: ...MBERS SWITCH_PORT PROHIBIT_PORT_COUNT SWITCH_PORT NPIV SWITCH_PORT NPIV_CAPABLE SWITCH_PORT NPIV_ENABLED SWITCH_PORT FC_FAST_WRITE_ENABLED SWITCH_PORT ISL_RRDY_ENABLED SWITCH_PORT RATE_LIMIT_CAPABLE S...

Page 1886: ...RE_SWITCH_DETAILS MODEL_NUMBER as SWITCH_MODEL_NUMBER FROM SWITCH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH CORE_SWITCH LEFT JOIN CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS ON CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS CORE_SWITCH_ID CORE_SWITCH ID where SWITCH_PORT V...

Page 1887: ...IALS WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING select SNMP_PROFILE WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE NAME default as SNMP_WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING coalesce SNMP_CREDENTIALS USER_NAME select SNMP_...

Page 1888: ...TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR union all select TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY TIME_IN_SECONDS TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY TARGET_TYPE TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY MEASURE_ID TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY TARGET_ID TIME_SERIES_...

Page 1889: ...series_data_info tsd JOIN device de ON tsd target_id de device_id JOIN pm_data_collector pdc ON pdc id tsd collector_id JOIN measure ON measure id tsd measure_id WHERE tsd target_type 0 OR tsd target_...

Page 1890: ...tch_port sp ON tsd target_type 4 OR tsd target_type 5 OR tsd target_type 6 AND tsd target_id sp id JOIN switch_info vs ON sp virtual_switch_id vs id JOIN pm_data_collector ON pm_data_collector id tsd...

Page 1891: ...TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP ID TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP ME_ID TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP MASTER_PORT_NUMBER TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER PORT_NUMBER as MEMBER_PORT_NUMBER MEMBER_DEVICE DEVICE_ID INTERFACE INTERFACE_ID VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBE...

Page 1892: ...E_PORT VLAN_ID VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT DEVICE_COUNT VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT PEER_MAC VIRTUAL_SWITCH WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN VIRTUAL_SWITCH ROLE as SWITCH_ROLE VIRTUAL_SWITCH VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as VIRTUAL_FABRIC_...

Page 1893: ...WITCH CS1 on VS1 CORE_SWITCH_ID CS1 ID left outer join CORE_SWITCH CS2 on VS2 CORE_SWITCH_ID CS2 ID left outer join SWITCH_PORT SP1 on SP1 VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID VS1 ID and VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS SLOT_NU...

Page 1894: ...VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID left outer join MAC_GROUP on TEMP_MAC_RELATION MAC_GROUP_DB_ID MAC_GROUP ID left outer join MAC_GROUP_MEMBER on MAC_GROUP_MEMBER MAC_GROUP_DB_ID MAC_GROUP ID left outer join...

Page 1895: ...INED_DEVICE_DETAIL WWN CORE_SWITCH SWITCH_PORT VIRTUAL_SWITCH DEVICE_NODE FABRIC VM_STORAGE VM_PATH DEVICE_ENCLOSURE VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE VM_VCENTER VM_DATA_CENTER VM_HOST where VM_PATH HBA_PORT DEVICE_...

Page 1896: ...ORT_ID SWITCH_PORT PORT_ID SWITCH_PORT PORT_NUMBER SWITCH_PORT SLOT_NUMBER USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL NAME as ADAPTER_PORT_NAME VM_PATH FABRIC_ID VM_PATH VM_PORT_WWN VM_STORAGE MODEL VM_STORAGE VENDOR...

Page 1897: ...FILE NAME as PORT_PROFILE_NAME PROFILE_DOMAINS DOMAIN_NAMES as PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_NAMES PROFILE_VLAN_MAP VLAN as PORT_PROFILE_VLAN VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS VLAN_IDS as PORT_GROUP_VLAN from VM_VIRTUAL_MACH...

Page 1898: ...as PORT_PROFILE_VLAN VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS VLAN_IDS as PORT_GROUP_VLAN from select VNIC ID as VNIC_ID VNIC MAC_ADDRESS VNIC IP_ADDRESS as VM_IP_ADDRESS VNIC DISPLAY_LABEL VNIC PORT_GROUP_NAME VNIC VM_ST...

Page 1899: ...virtual_machine_datastore_map vm_datastore_details_id vm_datastore_details datacenter_id vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map provisioned_storage vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map not_shared_storage vm_vir...

Page 1900: ...CREATION_TIME from EE_MONITOR_STATS group by EE_MONITOR_ID comment on view VM_EE_MONITOR_INFO is Combined ee_monitor ee_monitor_stats device_port and device_node tables to get the EE Monitor info for...

Page 1901: ...UMBER VM_STORAGE TYPE VM_STORAGE CAPACITY VM_STORAGE STATUS as LUN_STATUS VM_STORAGE PATH_POLICY VM_STORAGE ISCSI_TARGET_ADDRESS VM_STORAGE ISCSI_TARGET_PORT VM_STORAGE NAS_REMOTE_HOST VM_STORAGE NAS_...

Page 1902: ..._SWITCH FC_PORT_STATS VIRTUAL_SWITCH where VM_PATH HBA_PORT BPCHAR DEVICE_PORT WWN and VM_PATH VM_ID VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE ID and VM_PATH STORAGE_ID VM_STORAGE ID and VM_STORAGE HOST_ID DEVICE_ENCLOSURE...

Page 1903: ...OSURE_ID and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE ID VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE HOST_ID and DEVICE_PORT ID DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP DEVICE_PORT_ID and DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP MAC_ADDRESS GIGE_PORT REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS and G...

Page 1904: ...CONN_MODULE WWN left outer join CORE_SWITCH on CORE_SWITCH ID VIRTUAL_SWITCH CORE_SWITCH_ID inner join FABRIC_MEMBER on FABRIC_MEMBER VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID inner join FABRIC on FABRIC_ME...

Page 1905: ...lace view VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT_INFO as select VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT ID VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT VR_CONN_MODULE_ID VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT WWN VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT POSITION_ VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT FABRIC_NAME VR_CONN_...

Page 1906: ...RT PORT_NUMBER VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT POSITION_ as UPLINK_PORT_NUMBER DEVICE_PORT ID as DEVICE_PORT_ID DEVICE_PORT NUMBER as DEVICE_PORT_NUMBER DEVICE_PORT TYPE as DEVICE_PORT_TYPE DEVICE_NODE ID as DEVI...

Page 1907: ...RTUAL_MACHINE VM_VCENTER_MEMBER VM_VCENTER where VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE ID AND VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE HOST_ID VM_VCENTER_MEMBER VM_HOST_ID AND VM_VCENTER_MEMBER...

Page 1908: ...R_MEMBER VM_VCENTER Where VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE ID And VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE HOST_ID VM_VCENTER_MEMBER VM_HOST_ID And VM_VCENTER_MEMBER VM_VCENTER_ID VM_VCENTE...

Page 1909: ...ric seed_switch_wwn virtual_switch wwn JOIN core_switch ON virtual_switch core_switch_id core_switch id WHERE fabric type 4 AND fabric managed 1 AP_USAGE CREATE VIEW ap_usage AS SELECT ap_station devi...

Page 1910: ...CAL_DEVICE DEVICE_ID PHYSICAL_DEVICE DESCRIPTION PHYSICAL_DEVICE NUM_SLOTS PHYSICAL_DEVICE TABLE_SUBTYPE PHYSICAL_DEVICE UNIT_NUMBER PHYSICAL_DEVICE UNIT_NEIGHBOR1 PHYSICAL_DEVICE UNIT_NEIGHBOR2 PHYSI...

Page 1911: ...SWITCH VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID coalesce VIRTUAL_SWITCH WWN CS_ME WWN DEVICE NODE_WWN as NODE_WWN from MANAGED_ELEMENT left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH on MANAGED_ELEMENT ID VIRTUAL_SWITCH MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID l...

Page 1912: ...collector collector_id sd collector_id AS collector_name SELECT mib_object name text text sd mib_index text AS collectible_name FROM mib_object WHERE mib_object mib_object_id sd mib_object_id AS colle...

Page 1913: ...mib_object name text text sd mib_index text AS collectible_name FROM mib_object WHERE mib_object mib_object_id sd mib_object_id AS collectible_name SELECT mib_object oid AS collectible_detail FROM mi...

Page 1914: ...DV_SWITCH VM_PHYSICAL_NIC VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY INTERFACE DEVICE PHYSICAL_INTERFACE PHYSICAL_PORT where VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE ID VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID and VM_VIRTUAL_ETHER...

Page 1915: ..._STANDARD_VIRTUAL__SWITCH_ID VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID and VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH ID VM_PHYSICAL_NIC VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and VM_PHYSICAL_NIC ID VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY VM_PHYSIC...

Page 1916: ...DEVICE_ID MASTER_INTERFACE INTERFACE_ID as MASTER_INTERFACE_ID MASTER_INTERFACE IF_NAME as MASTER_IF_NAME MEMBER_INTERFACE INTERFACE_ID as MEMBER_INTERFACE_ID MEMBER_INTERFACE IF_NAME as MEMBER_IF_NAM...

Page 1917: ...e_id i name i if_name i identifier pi speed_in_mb pi physical_address FROM device d physical_device pd slot s module_slot_present msp physical_port pp physical_interface pi interface i WHERE d device_...

Page 1918: ...DUPLEX when L2 DUPLEX_MODE 3 then AUTO SENSE else null end as DUPLEX_MODE_TXT L3 IP_ID L3 IP_INTERFACE_ID L3 IP_ADDRESS L3 SUBNET_MASK from select distinct D DEVICE_ID D MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID D IP_ADDRE...

Page 1919: ...Y CEE_PORT QOS_TYPE CEE_PORT QOS_NAME CEE_PORT DOT1X_ENABLED CEE_PORT PORT_ROLE CEE_PORT AMPP_PROFILE_MODE CORE_SWITCH IP_ADDRESS as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_IP CORE_SWITCH WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN GIGE_PORT...

Page 1920: ...1868 Brocade Network Advisor SAN User Manual 53 1003154 01 Views H...

Page 1921: ...2 ISL protocol thresholds 1004 link reset thresholds 1003 members to LSAN zone LSAN zone adding members 913 property labels 373 1492 storage ports to storage array 562 switches to fabric binding 989 t...

Page 1922: ...ing event filters 408 test connection 403 viewing 394 configuring 390 roles and access levels 1469 status determining 363 system requirements 391 viewing status 404 call home event filters table remov...

Page 1923: ...tication using the GUI 595 server name 103 server port 130 smart cards 696 SNMP credentials 42 software 108 support mode settings 131 Switch authentication 443 traffic isolation zoning 917 UNIX authen...

Page 1924: ...policies 1112 VM managers 70 zone alias 898 zone configuration 903 zones 894 deleting firmware files from firmware repository 504 deleting servers 555 deleting views 380 deployment configuration delet...

Page 1925: ...om properties 868 enabling from properties 868 Element Manager launching launching Element Manager 413 e mail event notification setup roles and access levels 1469 e mail filter override 598 e mail no...

Page 1926: ...gine operations tab 883 ESXi adding host adapter credentials 576 CIM listener ports 576 ESXi hosts updating drivers 578 ESXi systems management application support for 575 Ethernet events disabling 90...

Page 1927: ...and access levels 1471 Fabric OS seed switch version 53 Fabric OS feature listing 29 fabric properties 1474 fabric properties dialog boxes customizing 1474 fabric tracking roles and access levels 1471...

Page 1928: ...1470 setup tools 1470 software configuration properties 1470 storage encryption configuration 1471 storage encryption key operations 1471 storage encryption security 1471 technical support data colle...

Page 1929: ...ity deployment 717 high integrity fabric roles and access levels 1471 high integrity fabric configuration setttings 1034 high integrity fabrics HIF requirements 1017 historical performance data disabl...

Page 1930: ...Invalid words threshold 998 invalid words thresholds adding 1002 editing 1010 1011 IP frames 934 IP interfaces configuring 958 IP routes configuring 958 IPsec FCIP 944 IPSec policies configuring 968...

Page 1931: ...ed to an encryption target container 831 M Main window master log 359 minimap 361 main window SAN tab 352 Management application server and client 3 management application main window 2 352 user inter...

Page 1932: ...9 monitoring pairs deleting 1094 refreshing 1094 monitoring statistics 573 multi path configuration for encrypted storage using the Management application 818 multi path environments configuring encry...

Page 1933: ...rt fencing description 993 port label changing 386 port optics refreshing 524 viewing 522 port properties 517 1482 port properties dialog box 1482 port status determining 522 port status viewing 12 po...

Page 1934: ...metadata requirements 828 remote replication luns SRDF 827 remote SMIA configuration tool logging in 459 removing members from zone 893 objects from zone alias 897 servers 555 switches from fabric bin...

Page 1935: ...ng 11 servers associating to HBAs 556 determining name 363 logging in 3 removing 555 renaming 555 setting up advanced filtering 1259 discovery 37 setup tools 411 adding menu options 419 adding to devi...

Page 1936: ...array 563 storage properties 1478 support mode configuring 131 Switch authentication configuring 443 switch configuration backup 479 deleting 486 exporting 487 file search content 485 file view conte...

Page 1937: ...unching session 412 testing FTP server 129 thin provisioned luns general 861 thin provisioning support 861 third party tools adding 411 adding menu option 419 adding to device shortcut menu 421 changi...

Page 1938: ...bers listing 929 user privileges 1451 User Administrator 1451 user ID determining 363 user interface description 1 user management roles and access levels 1470 user privileges defined 695 1451 RBAC 14...

Page 1939: ...ize 888 merging 888 removing 901 traffic isolation adding members 918 traffic isolation creating 918 traffic isolation disabling 920 traffic isolation disabling failover 920 traffic isolation enabling...

Page 1940: ...ew 889 configuring 889 invalid names 888 LSAN 911 naming conventions 888 offline 887 online 887 overview 885 traffic isolation 916 traffic isolation configuring 917 zoning activation roles and access...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands